CX75 - CX85 - CX95 - CX105

Operator's Manual

McCormick’s Commitment To
Quality

McCormick tractors remain true to the values and

principles that made McCormick a world-beater for so
many years. That means no compromises in quality. This
McCormick tractor is a product of the highest quality and
reliability.

Your authorized dealer guarantees that this McCormick

tractor is delivered in top condition by carrying out a Pre-
Delivery Inspection before it reaches you. They will also
give you a comprehensive introduction into a newly
acquired tractor which ensures maximum benefits from
the machine.

The purchase of this McCormick tractor gives the certainty

of possessing a state-of-the-art tractor of the highest
quality. Its continued value, operation and reliability
depend to a large extent on the regular maintenance and
care of this McCormick tractor.

Argo T ractors S
Tractors .p.A.
S.p.A.
42042 Fabbrico [RE] Italia - via G. Matteotti, 7
t. +39.0522.656111 - f. +39.0522.656476
Publication N° OM9-2201 GB webmaster@argotractors.com
Printed 2007 www.argospa.com
 Tractor, Customer and Dealer
Data
! WARNING
Type: ........................................
IMPROPER OPERATION OF THIS TRACTOR Serial No.: ........................................
CAN CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH. BEFORE
USING THIS TRACTOR, MAKE CERTAIN THAT Engine No.: ........................................
EVERY OPERATOR:
Transmission No.: ........................................
● Is instructed in safe and proper use of the Registration No.: ........................................
tractor.
Delivery Date: ........................................
● Reads and understands the Manual(s) Operators Manual: ........................................
pertaining to the tractor.

● Reads and understands ALL Safety Decals 1st. Owner

on the tractor.
Name: ...............................................................
● Clear the area of other persons.
Address: ...............................................................
● Learns and practices safe use of tractor ...............................................................
controls in a safe, clear area before operating ...............................................................
on a job site. ...............................................................

It is your responsibility to observe pertinent laws Tel No.: ...............................................................

and regulations and follow McCormick Tractors
International Limited instructions on tractor
operation and maintenance as quoted in this 2nd. Owner
Operators Manual.
Name: ...............................................................

Address: ...............................................................
...............................................................
CALIFORNIA ...............................................................
Proposition 65 Warning ...............................................................
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its Tel No.: ...............................................................
constituents are known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth defects,
and other reproductive harm. Dealer
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead Name: ...............................................................
compounds.
Address: ...............................................................
Wash hands after handling.
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................

Tel No.: ...............................................................

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ............................................... 1 FIELD OPERATION ....................................... 99
Product Identification And Serial Numbers ..... 3 Transmission Creeper Operation.................. 99
Warranty ......................................................... 4 Wheel Slip Indicator ................................... 100
Rear Power Takeoff ................................... 102
Front Power Takeoff Operation .................. 106
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................................ 5
Rear Three Point Hitch Preparation ........... 107
Safety .............................................................. 5
Rear Three Point Hitch Operation .............. 114
Personal Safety .............................................. 6
Ride Control .............................................. 122
Transporting Passengers ................................ 7
Differential Lock Control ............................. 123
Neutral Start System ....................................... 7
Mechanical Front Drive (Mfd) Operation .... 124
Operator Presence System ............................ 7
Front Hitch ................................................. 126
Operation ........................................................ 8
Remote Hydraulic Valves ........................... 130
Highway/public Road Operation ..................... 9
Remote Hydraulics Operation .................... 132
Leaving The Tractor ...................................... 11
Foldable Rops Frame ................................ 135
Implements ................................................... 11
PTO Operation .............................................. 11
Service .......................................................... 12 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST ........................ 137
Battery Safety ............................................... 12 Tyre Inflation Specifications ....................... 137
Hazardous Chemicals ................................... 13 Tyre Pressures And Load Capacities ........ 139
Fire Or Explosion Prevention ........................ 13 Instrument Cluster Programming For
Basic Rule ..................................................... 13 Different Tyre Sizes ............................... 142
Safety Decals ................................................ 14 Setting The Front Wheel Toe-in ................. 144
Roll Over Protective Structure (ROPS) ......... 19 Axle - Steering And Oscillation Stops ........ 146
Two Wheel Drive Front Axle
Tread Adjustment .................................. 147
INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS ........................ 21
Mfd Front Wheel Tread Widths .................. 149
Tractor Access .............................................. 21
Front Wheel Bolt Torques .......................... 150
Operators Seat ............................................. 22
Front To Rear Tyre Size Combinations ..... 151
Steering Column Adjustment ........................ 28
Front Wheel Fenders ................................. 154
Instrument Clusters ....................................... 29
Rear Wheel Tread Adjustment ................... 155
Standard (Analog) Instrument Cluster .......... 29
Rear Wheel Bolt Torques ........................... 158
Deluxe (Digital) Instrument Cluster .............. 30
Tractor Ballast ............................................ 159
Programming The Digital Instrument Cluster 34
Operating Controls ........................................ 47
Operator Cab Environment Controls ............ 54 ROUTINE SERVICING ................................. 167
Deluxe Cab ................................................... 54 Recommendations Before You Service ..... 167
Rear View Mirrors ......................................... 57 Service/Hourmeter ..................................... 168
Additional Cab Features ............................... 58 Service Access .......................................... 169
Lubricants And Capacities ......................... 170
Service Intervals ........................................ 172
GENERAL OPERATION ................................ 61
10 Hours Or Daily Service ......................... 174
General Operation ........................................ 61
50 Hour Service ......................................... 177
Before Starting The Engine .......................... 61
100 Hour Service ....................................... 180
Run In Procedure .......................................... 61
250 Hour Service ....................................... 185
Service Indicator Lamps And Gauges .......... 62
500 Hour Service ....................................... 190
Starting Procedure ........................................ 63
1000 Hour Service ..................................... 195
Cold Temperature Operation ........................ 64
2000 Hour Service ..................................... 206
Parking The Tractor ...................................... 67
General Maintenance ................................. 208
Master Disconnect Switch ............................. 68
Operating The Transmission ........................ 69
Cab Environment .......................................... 76
Cab Environment Adjustments ..................... 79
Drawbar ........................................................ 81
Height Adjustable Trailer Hitches .................. 85
Auto Hitch ..................................................... 88
Implement/Trailer Drawbar Dimensions ....... 92
Trailer Brake Couplings ................................ 93
Auxiliary Electrical Power Sockets ................ 95
Implement Cable Access .............................. 97
How To Transport The Tractor ..................... 98

Page i
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

ELECTRICS .................................................. 211

Batteries ..................................................... 211
Bulb And Lamp Replacement ..................... 214
Relays ......................................................... 220

MACHINE STORAGE .................................. 223

Putting The Tractor Into Storage ................ 223

SPECIFICATIONS ........................................ 225

Diesel Engine ............................................. 225
Electrical System ........................................ 227
General Machine ........................................ 228
Approximate Travel Speeds ....................... 231
Approximate Tractor Dimensions ............... 238
Approximate Tractor Weights ..................... 248
Noise Levels ............................................... 250

DETAIL INDEX ............................................. 251

Page ii
 INTRODUCTION

TO THE OWNER

About This Manual McCormick Technical

Documentation
Read this manual before you start the engine or operate
your McCormick tractor. If you need any more information, McCormick tractors are being constantly improved.
see your dealer. Your dealer has technicians with Technical changes introduced since this Operator’s
specialized training that know the best methods of repair Manual went into print are therefore not taken into
and maintenance for your tractor. consideration.

Refer to the Alphabetical Index at the end of this manual There is a large selection of McCormick tractor
for locating specific items about your tractor. models available for vastly differing applications.
This is a worldwide Operator ’s Manual and therefore
Operator’s
The right and left of the tractor in this manual are the may include some information, illustrations and
same as your right and left when sitting in the tractor photographs which may differ to the standard
seat looking forward. equipment and accessories on your tractor
tractor..

Some of the illustrations/photographs in this manual may Additional manuals are available from your Dealer for the
look slightly different to that of your tractor as they may operation, service and repair of your tractor. For prompt
have been produced from photographs taken on prototype convenient service, contact your Dealer for assistance in
tractors. obtaining the manuals for your tractor.

DO NOT operate or permit anyone to operate or service Your Dealer can expedite your order for Operator’s
this tractor until you or the other persons have read this Manuals, Parts Catalogues, Service Manuals etc.
manual. Use only trained operators who have
demonstrated the ability to operate and service this tractor Always give the tractor Name, Model and P.l.N. (product
correctly and safely. identification number) or S.N. (serial number) of your
tractor so your Dealer can provide the correct manuals
This tractor, with standard equipment and authorized for your tractor.
attachments, is intended to be used for farming, and
related operations. DO NOT use this tractor for any
application or purpose other than those described in this
manual. Consult an authorized dealer or Landini on
changes, additions or modifications that can be required
for this tractor to comply with various country regulations
and safety requirements. Unauthorized modifications may
cause serious injury or death. Anyone making such
unauthorized modifications is responsible for the
consequences.

Page 1
 INTRODUCTION

Manual Storage Important Information for EEC

Keep the Operators Manual stored in the manual Member States
storage compartment equipped on this tractor.
This tractor complies with the provisions of the
following directive:
74/150/EEC - Type Approval.

Included in this directive is 89/336/EEC-

Electromagnetic Compatibility. As an operator it is
important to know the following:

EMC - Supplementary Information

Safety information for the supplementary
installation of electrical and electronic
appliances and/or components.
This tractor is equipped with electronic constituents
DP96E064 and component parts whose function can be
Make sure this manual is complete and in good influenced by electromagnetic radiations of other
condition. appliances. Such influences can cause hazards for
persons if the following safety information is not taken
IMPORTANT: This operators manual is part of into account.
your tractor. If the tractor is sold, loaned or
rented, the operators manual MUST go with it. 1. For supplementary installation of electrical and
electronic appliances and/or constituents on the
tractor with a connection to the onboard system, the
user HAS to verify whether the installation causes
Units of Measurement disturbances to the electronics on the tractor or other
constituents. This particularly applies to the Hitch,
All units of measurement used in this manual are PTO, Powershift Control and the Instrument Cluster.
metric unless otherwise stated. Use the following
Also it has to be taken into account that the
table to convert from metric to imperial units.
supplementary installed electrical and electronic
components comply with the EMC Directive 89/
336/EEC in the respective current version and that
mm x 0.03937 = inches
they are CE marked.
kg x 2.2 = pounds (lb) 2. For the supplementary installation of mobile
communication systems (i.e. radio communication,
Bar x 14.5038 = PSI
mo bile t ele pho ne ) t he fo llow ing a dd ition al
Litres x 0.22 = Imperial Gallons requirements have to be fulfilled:
A. Only devices with an approval complying with
Litres x 0.264 = U.S Gallons
the valid national regulations must be installed.
N (Newtons) x 0.225 = lbf B. The devices must be firmly installed.
Nm x 0.738 = lb. ft C. The operation of portable or mobile devices
w i t h i n t h e c a b o f t h e t r a c t o r i s O N LY
Nm x 8.85 = lb. in permitted if the device has a fixed outside
antenna.
° C x 1.8 (=32) = ° F
D. The transmitting part shall be installed
km/h x 0.62 = MPH separately to the tractor electronics.
E. Installation of the antenna must be carried
out by a professional and the antenna must
have a good ground connection between the
antenna and the tractor ground.
For the correct size cabling, installation and the
maximum permissible current supply, see your
dealer.

Page 2
 INTRODUCTION

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS

Write your tractor Model number, Product 1. TRACTOR MODEL NUMBER
Identification Number (P.I.N.), and Serial __________________________________________
numbers on the lines provided opposite. If
needed, give these numbers to your dealer when 2. PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
you need parts or information for your tractor.
__________________________________________
Keep the record and your Manufacturers
3. MFD AXLE SERIAL NUMBER

INTRODUCTION
Statement of Origin in a safe place. If the tractor
is stolen, report the numbers to your local police. __________________________________________

4. ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

__________________________________________

5. TRANSMISSION SERIAL NUMBER

__________________________________________

6. CAB/PLATFORM ROPS SERIAL NUMBER

__________________________________________

1 2
1 2

3
4
5
DR99J063

1
2
DS98E265

ROPS (Platform) ONLY

Page 3
 INTRODUCTION

WARRANTY
Base Warranty Cover
All McCormick tractors carry a minimum 12 month or
1200 hour warranty covering both parts and labour costs
arising from faulty material or workmanship with no
restrictions on operating hours during the warranty
period.
See your authorized dealer for the warranty period
pertaining to your market area and for full terms and
conditions.

This warranty does not restrict or affect your statutory

rights and all that is required of you is to make sure that
the inspections, preventative maintenance and service
requirements, (set out in this Operator’s Manual), are
undertaken and that the tractor is made available in a
timely manner to your authorized dealer in the event of a
repair becoming necessary under warranty.

Warranty will not apply if the tractor has been misused

or modified, unless such modification has been carried
out with written approval from mcCormick.

Due to the variety of equipment used and operating

conditions, this warranty cannot include cost of:

Equipment removal,

Productivity loss/consequential damage,

Transportation,

Service items (e.g. oils, filters and wearing parts

etc.).

Page 4
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

! SAFETY !

Before operating, read and comply with all safety

instructions quoted in this Operators Manual. THIS SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL
INDICATES IMPORTANT SAFETY
Understand that your safety and the safety of other MESSAGES IN THIS MANUAL. WHEN
persons is measured by how you service, and YOU SEE THIS SYMBOL
operate this tractor. Know the positions and ! CAREFULLY READ THE MESSAGE
operations of all controls before you try to operate. THAT FOLLOWS AND BE ALERT TO
MAKE SURE YOU CHECK ALL CONTROLS IN A THE POSSIBILITY OF DEATH OR

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFE AREA BEFORE STARTING YOUR WORK. SERIOUS INJURY.
READ THIS MANUAL COMPLETELY and make
sure you understand the controls. All equipment has
a limit. Make sure you understand the speed, Intended Use
brakes, steering, stability, and load characteristics of
this tractor before you start to operate. This McCormick tractor is designed solely for use in
customary agricultural or similar operation
The "Operators Manual Symbol", is intended to (intended use).
direct the operator to the Operators Manual for
correct information with regard to operation, Use in any other way is considered as contrary to
maintenance/adjustments etc. When you see this the intended use. The manufacturer accepts no
symbol on any particular part of the tractor refer to liability for any damage or injury resulting from this
your Operators Manual. misuse and these risks must be born solely by the
user.

Compliance with and strict adherence to the

conditions of operation, service and repair as
specified by the manufacturer also constitutes
essential elements for the intended use.

This McCormick tractor should be operated,

serviced and repaired only by persons familiar with
all its particular characteristics and acquainted with
the relevant safety rules (accident prevention).

The accident prevention regulations, all other

generally recognized regulations on safety and
DI96K246
occupational medicine and the road traffic
regulations must be observed at all times.
The safety information given in this manual does
not replace safety codes, insurance needs, federal, Any arbitrary modifications carried out on the
state and local laws. Make sure your tractor has the tractor will relieve the manufacturer of all liability for
correct equipment needed by the local laws and any resulting damage or injury.
regulations.

McCormick Tractors International Limited are

continuing to work for your safety: by making
tractors with better protection and by giving these
rules for safe operation.

Page 5
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

General Safety And ! Personal Safety

! Accident Prevention
Regulations Throughout this manual and on the Safety Decals
on this tractor you will find precautionary
statements which use the words Danger, Warning
● In addition to the instructions contained in this or Caution. These precautionary statements are
Operators Manual, also observe the general intended for your personal safety.
safety and accident prevention regulations.
Failure to follow the Danger, Warning or Caution
● Always comply with local traffic regulations instructions may result in serious bodily injury or
when driving on public roads. death.
● Before starting work, familiarize yourself with all Danger, Warning or Caution are defined as
the controls and instruments and their follows:
functions. During work is too late.
● DANGER: Indicates an immediate hazardous
● Securely fasten your seat belt, if equipped. Your situation that if not avoided, will result in death
tractor is equipped with a ROPS cab or frame or serious injury. The colour associated with
for your protection. The seat belt can help Danger is RED.
insure your safety if it is used and maintained.
Never wear a seat belt loosely or with slack in
● WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous
situation that if not avoided, could result in
the belt system. Never wear the belt in a twisted
death or serious injury. The colour associated
condition or pinched between the seat
with Warning is ORANGE.
structural members.
● CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous
● Start the engine only from the operator’s seat. situation that if not avoided, may result in minor
● Never attempt to start engine by shorting or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert
across the starting motor terminals as the against unsafe practices. The colour associated
tractor may immediately start to move. with Caution is YELLOW.

● Before moving away, always check the Safety Decals on this tractor which are ISO-two
immediate vicinity of the tractor (e.g. for panel Pictorial type decals, are defined as follows:
children). Ensure adequate visibility. ● The first panel indicates the nature of the
● Never run the engine in a closed building. hazard.
Proper ventilation is required. ● The second panel indicates the appropriate
avoidance of the hazard.
● Clothing worn by the operator must be close-
fitting. Avoid wearing loose jackets, shirts or ● Background colour is YELLOW.
ties.
● Prohibition symbols such as
● Handle fuel with care as it is highly flammable. and STOP if used, are RED.
Never refuel the tractor in the vicinity of naked
flames or sparks. Do not smoke during
refuelling.

● Never refuel the machine when the engine is

hot or running. Never smoke while refuelling.

● Always stop the engine and remove the main

switch key before refuelling. Fill fuel tank
outdoors. Clean up any spilled fuel immediately.

● Prevent fires by keeping the tractor clean.

● Exposure to high noise levels may cause
hearing loss. Always wear suitable ear
protection when working in a noisy
environment.

Page 6
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

! Transporting Passengers ! Neutral Start System

(XtraShift Tractors Only)
● Passengers may only be carried if a proper
● For your safety a Neutral Start Switch is fitted
passenger seat is fitted.
in the FORWARD/NEUTRAL/REVERSE
● The carrying of passengers is otherwise not circuits which prevents unintentional tractor
permitted. movement when starting the tractor engine.
The engine should only start when the F-N-R
Passenger Seat Safety (If Equipped) lever is in NEUTRAL.
● Make sure the Neutral Start System is

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
operating properly by doing the following
checks, in a clear open area, with no other
persons or objects near the tractor:

While sitting in the operators seat, with the

engine not running, place the F-N-R lever into
FORWARD. Attempt to start the engine. The
engine should not start.
Repeat procedure for REVERSE lever
position. The engine should not start. If the
engine starts, see your Dealer for repair.

! Operator Presence System

DD00A117

(XtraShift Tractors Only)

● The passenger seat allows a colleague to ride
in safety and comfort. Children are NOT ● For your safety an Operator Presence Safety
permitted to use the passenger seat. Switch is fitted in the FORWARD/NEUTRAL/
REVERSE circuits. This is activated by the
● When the passenger Seat is occupied, the operator sitting on the seat as follows:
following precautions must be taken:
1. With the operator sitting on the seat (switch
A. Tractor should be driven at a slower closed) and the TRACTOR MOVING; if the
speed and on level ground. operator gets off the seat, the tractor will
continue moving, but the tractor will stop if
B. Avoid driving on highways or public the F/N/R lever is moved to a new position.
roads.
2. If the operator IS NOT sitting on the seat
C. Avoid quick starts or stops. (switch open); the F/N/R circuits will not
D. Avoid sharp turns. function and the tractor will not drive when
the F/N/R lever is moved from neutral to
E. The left hand door MUST be closed at either forward or reverse direction.
all times, while the tractor is in motion.
WARNING: ONLY operate the tractor
WARNING: A frequent cause of personal when sitting on the seat. DO NOT try to
injury or death is persons falling off and bypass the OPERATOR PRESENCE
! being run over. DO NOT permit others to SAFETY SWITCH, for example, by putting
ride, except on the designated Passenger heavy objects on the seat. This can result
Seat. ! in serious injury or death.
If you try to bypass the safety switch wiring,
after a set period of time, the tractor will
shut down and not operate.

Page 7
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

● Extra weight and bad traction conditions such

! Operation as mud or ice increase your stopping distance.
Remember that liquid in the tires, weights on
● DO NOT operate the tractor while under the the machine or wheels, tanks filled with
influence of alcohol and/or drugs. fertilizer, herbicides or insecticides; all these
add weight and increase the distance you need
● Always adapt your ground speed to the ground to stop.
conditions. Avoid making sharp turns when
driving up or down slopes or when driving ● Do not drive on roads, or at high speed
across the slope. Do not attempt to turn the anywhere, with the differential lock engaged.
tractor with the differential lock engaged. When Difficult steering will occur, and can result in an
driving down slopes, never depress the clutch accident. In field operation, use the differential
and change gear. DO NOT operate up and lock for traction improvement, but release for
down slopes of more than 30 degrees and DO turning at row ends.
NOT operate across slopes of more than 15
degrees. ● Travel speed should be such that complete
control and machine stability is maintained at all
● Attach trailers and/or implements correctly. The times. Where possible, avoid operating near
operating, steering and braking behavior will be ditches, embankments and holes. Reduce
affected by attaching implements, trailers and speed when turning, crossing slopes, and on
ballast weights. Therefore ensure adequate rough, slick, or muddy surfaces.
steering and braking power.
● Stay off slopes too steep for safe operation.
● Before starting the engine, be sure all operating Shift down before you start up or down a hill
controls are in neutral. This will eliminate with a heavy load. Avoid "free wheeling".
accidental movement of the machine or start up
of power driven equipment. ● Never allow the tractor to coast down hill with
the transmission in neutral or with the clutch
● Operate controls only when seated in the pedal depressed. To do so could result in the
Operators seat. operator not having full control of the tractor
and may result in personal injury.
● Never attempt to start engine by shorting
across the starting motor terminals as the
machine may immediately start to move.

● Collision of high speed road traffic and tractors

or implements can cause personal injury or
death. On roads, use flasher/lights according to
local laws. Keep SMV emblem visible. Pull over
to let faster traffic pass. Slow down and signal
before turning off.

● Brake pedals must be locked together for road

travel. This will insure uniform brake application
and maximum stopping ability.

● Make sure that the weight of a trailed vehicle

that is not equipped with brakes, NEVER
EXCEEDS the weight of the machine that is
towing the vehicle. Stopping distance increases
with increasing speed as the weight of the
towed load increases, especially on hills and
slopes.

Page 8
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

! Highway/Public Road Amber Warning Lamps Operation

Operation The amber warning lamps operate as follows,
when the main lamp switch is turned to the first
● Comply with road traffic laws, including any and second positions clockwise.
speed restrictions and the correct use of
Hazard Warning Lamps and SMV Symbol.
● Connect the brake pedals together with the
brake pedal interlock. This will ensure
uniform braking and maximum stopping 1 2
ability.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
● Check clearance before going under electric
power lines, bridges etc.

Tractor Warning Lamp Usage

North American Tractors
● The flashing amber warning lamps must be MD02E054
used according to road traffic laws.
FIRST POSITION (1) - ALL the amber warning
The flashing amber warning lamps must be used lamps will flash ON and OFF.
when operating the tractor on the road during the
day or night. A vehicle operator that comes near SECOND POSITION (2) - ALL the amber
the tractor must see an SMV symbol and the tail warning lamps will flash ON and OFF. Tail lamps
lamps from the rear and the flashing amber and headlamps will be illuminated.
warning lamps from the front and rear. When the direction turn signal switch is used, the
amber warning lamps will operate as follows:

1 2
1

4 3

2
RD99D026

1. When indicating to turn right, the Right amber

5 warning lamp will flash ON and OFF and the
Left amber warning lamp will illuminate but
will not flash.

2. When indicating to turn left, the Left amber

DP97F098A
warning lamp will flash ON and OFF and the
Right amber warning lamp will illuminate but
1. AMBER WARNING LAMP AND TURN SIGNAL LAMP (LEFT will not flash.
SIDE)
2. AMBER WARNING LAMP AND TURN SIGNAL LAMP (RIGHT IMPORTANT: When towing an implement or wagon
SIDE)
with the tractor, the complete rear area warning
3. TAIL LAMP (RIGHT SIDE) system (amber warning lamps, red tail lamps and
4. TAIL LAMP (LEFT SIDE) SMV symbol) must be easily seen by any vehicle
5. SLOW MOVING VEHICLE (SMV) SYMBOL operator coming near the tractor.

Page 9
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Tractor Warning Lamp Usage Rotating Amber Beacon (If Equipped)

Rest Of World Tractors
● The rotating amber beacon must be used
● The flashing amber warning lamps must be according to local road traffic laws.
used according to local road traffic laws.

1 2

DR99J012

DP97C136 The rotating amber beacon is operated by pressing

The amber warning lamps are used to indicate a the switch (2) with the flashing beacon symbol.
hazard to other road users. To operate, press the
switch (1) as shown above. This operates all four Slow Moving Vehicle Symbol
direction turn indicator lamps at once. (If Equipped)
IMPORTANT: When operating the tractor, towing an ● For correct use of the SMV symbol (3),
implement or trailer, the complete rear area warning system observe local road traffic laws.
(amber warning lamps, when applicable, and red tail lamps)
must be easily seen by any vehicle operator coming near the
tractor.

Implement Warning Lamps

(If Equipped)
It is recommended that implement warning lamps
are used:
3
● If the flashing warning lamps and red tail lamps
on the tractor cannot be seen because they are
obstructed by the implement.
● If the towed implement is 1219 mm (4 ft) or
more behind the hitch point of the tractor.
● If the towed implement is 1219 mm (4 ft) or DP97E255

more to the left or right of the center of the If a Slow Moving Vehicle (SMV) symbol is
tractor. equipped it must be installed on the rear part of
the tractor.
● If the towed implement is 3000 mm (10 ft) or
more wide. To install the SMV symbol on an implement or
trailer a special bracket must be obtained from
Install the warning lamps to indicate the side of the
your dealer.
implement nearest the centre of the road.

WARNING: Collision of high speed road

traffic and slow moving machines can
cause personal injury or death. On roads,
! use amber warning lamps according to
local laws. Keep SMV emblem visible. Pull
over to let faster traffic pass. Slow down
and signal before turning off.

Page 10
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

! Leaving The Tractor ! PTO Operation

● When leaving the tractor, ensure that it will not ● Always shut off engine before connecting or
roll away (apply park brake, wheel wedges) disconnecting drive shaft.
stop the engine.
● Clothing worn by the operator must be close-
● Remove the main switch key and lock the fitting. Avoid wearing loose jackets, shirts or
operator’s cab. ties.

● Never leave the tractor unattended as long as ● When operating the PTO, no-one must be

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
the engine is still running. allowed to remain in the vicinity of the rotating
PTO stub shaft or drive shaft.
● Never leave the operator’s cab when driving.
● PTO driven machinery can cause serious injury.
● Lower implement or equipment to the ground Before working on or near the PTO shaft, or
before leaving the tractor. servicing or clearing the driven machine, put
the PTO lever in the DISENGAGE position and
STOP the engine.
! Implements ● Whenever a PTO driven machine is in
operation, the PTO guard must be in place for
● Attach implements and trailers to the tractor most operations to prevent injury to the
only using the prescribed drawbars or hitches. operator or bystanders. Where attachments,
Rear upset can result if pulling from wrong such as pumps, are installed on the PTO shaft
location on tractor. The three point hitch must (especially if the tractor PTO guard is moved
only be used with the implements designed for upward or removed) extended shielding
its use, not as a drawbar. equivalent to the PTO guard must be installed
with the attachment. Install the PTO guard to its
● Take particular care when attaching trailers or original position immediately when the
implements. The operating, steering and attachment is removed.
braking behavior will be affected by attaching
implements, trailers and ballast weights. ● When doing stationary PTO work and
Therefore ensure adequate steering and dismounting from the tractor with the PTO
braking power. running, keep clear of all moving parts as they
are a potential safety hazard
● Prevent trailer and implement from rolling away.
● High-inertia implements do not become
● Operate tractor only when all guards are fitted stationary immediately when PTO is
and in their correct position. disengaged. Allow sufficient time for implement
to “coast down” to a halt before cleaning or
adjusting.

● Guards for drive shaft and PTO stub shaft must

be fitted. As soon as drive shaft has been
removed, install guard over PTO stub shaft.

Page 11
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

● Do not attempt to mount a tyre unless you have

! Service the proper equipment and experience to
perform the job safely. See page 141.
● Do not service the tractor with the engine
running. Follow the instructions in this manual ● Retighten wheel nuts after the specified hours
or see your dealer. in this manual. See page 172.
● This tractor is equipped with a spring applied
mechanical front wheel drive (MFD) clutch and ● Always disconnect the battery ground strap(s)
a front axle limited slip differential. Even with before carrying out any electrical repairs on the
the MFD engaging switch in the OFF position, tractor. See page 211.
the front axle clutch can propel both front
wheels if any of the following conditions occur: ● Use original manufacturers parts. Spare parts/
Service parts must comply with the
1. The engine is turned off.
manufacturers technical specifications.
2. The engine is stopped when the rear wheels
are still coasting.
3. Any interruption in the clutch operating
hydraulic system flow or pressure or in the ! Battery Safety
electrical controls for clutch operation.
● DO NOT make sparks or use an open flame
For these reasons, the following service near the battery.
procedures must be followed.
Before rotating the rear wheels of a MFD tractor ● BATTERY ACID CAUSES SEVERE BURNS.
(if you are using engine power with the rear Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact
wheels supported off the ground), one of the with skin, eyes or clothing. Antidote:
following procedures must be done to prevent EXTERNAL - Flush with water.
an accidental tractor movement. INTERNAL - Drink large quantities of water or
milk. DO NOT induce vomiting. Seek medical
1. Jack up and support BOTH front wheels attention immediately.
completely off the ground. EYES - Flush with water for 15 minutes and
OR get medical attention immediately.

2. Disconnect the front wheel drive shaft. ● Battery explosion and/or damage to electrical
components can result from improper
● Escaping fluid (fuel or hydraulic oil) under high connection of booster batteries or charger.
pressure can penetrate the skin and cause Connect positive to positive and negative to
serious injury. negative. Externally, battery acid can cause
To Prevent Personal Injury: burns and blindness, and taken internally is
poison.
Relieve all pressure, before disconnecting fluid
lines.Before applying pressure, make sure all ● BATTERIES PRODUCE EXPLOSIVE GASES.
connections are tight and components are in Keep sparks, flame, cigars and cigarettes away.
good condition. Never use your hand to check Ventilate when charging or using in enclosed
for suspected leaks under pressure. Use a area. Always wear eye protection when working
piece of cardboard or wood for this purpose. If near batteries. Wash hands after handling.
any fluid is injected into the skin, consult a KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
doctor immediately as other-wise serious
infections may result. ● When working around storage batteries,
remember that all of the exposed metal parts
● It is recommended that you know the location of are “live”. Never lay a metal object across the
a First Aid Kit and Fire Extinguisher and have terminals because a spark, short circuit,
access before servicing the tractor. explosion or personal injury may result.

● Dispose of oil, fuel and filters in accordance

with local regulations. Do not drain the oil on
the ground or into a drain. Be responsible for
the environment.

Page 12
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

! Hazardous Chemicals ! Fire Or Explosion

Prevention
● If you are exposed to or come in contact with
hazardous chemicals, you can be seriously ● Fire risks can be minimized by frequent removal
injured. The fluids, lubricants, paints, of accumulated crop material, trash or debris
adhesives, coolants, etc., used with your tractor from the tractor. Remove all crop material, trash
can be hazardous, ALWAYS follow the or debris at the start of each working day. Take
chemical manufacturers instructions extra care to make sure the engine area and
thoroughly. exhaust system are clean.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
● North America Only: ● Engine fuel is flammable and can cause a fire
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) provide or an explosion. DO NOT fill the fuel tank or
information about the chemical substances service the fuel system near an naked flame,
within a product, safe handling procedures, welding, burning cigars, cigarettes etc.
first aid measures and procedures to be
taken when the product is accidentally spilled ● Use nonflammable cleaning solvents to clean
or released. In North American, Material parts.
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are available
from your dealer. ● A fire can cause serious injury or death.
Before you service your machine, check the ALWAYS have a fire extinguisher near or on the
MSDS for each fluid, lubricant, etc., used in tractor. Make sure the fire extinguisher is
this machine. This information indicates what serviced according to the manufacturers
the risks are and how to service the machine instructions.
safely. Follow this information when servicing
the machine. ● If a fire extinguisher has been used, always
recharge or replace after use.
● Before you service the tractor and dispose of
the old fluids and lubricants, always remember ● Refer to Fire Prevention in the storage section
the environment. DO NOT put oil or fluids into of this manual for more information.
the ground or into containers that can leak.

● Check with your local environmental or ! Basic Rule

recycling center or your dealer for correct
disposal information.
● Always check the operating and road safety of
the tractor before starting.

● ALWAYS make sure the working area is clear of

other persons, pets, tools etc. before you start
operating this tractor. Never allow anybody in
the work area during tractor operation.

Page 13
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY DECALS
IMPORTANT: Install new decals if the old decals are destroyed, lost, painted over or cannot be read. When parts are replaced that
have decals, make sure you install a new decal with each new part. New decals are available from your dealer. When you clean
the decals, use only a cloth, water and soap. Do not use solvent, gasoline, etc.

North American Tractors

NOTE: Due to North American market requirements, the following safety decals are fitted.

DECAL 1
Part No. 305584A1

5
3

MR01E006
4

1 DECAL 2
Part No. 321-7040
(Located on the Starter Motor)
7

DS00H118

321-7040 DS98E115

Page 14
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

DECAL 3 DECAL 6
Part No. 249807A1 Part No. 400853A1 or 400852A1
(If Equipped with True Ground (If Equipped with External Hitch
Speed Sensor) Controls)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
DS96M125
TYPE A TYPE B
DECAL 4
Part No. 400848A1
(If Equipped - Located on the DECAL 7
Inside of Right Hand Rear Fender) Part No. 250937A1
(If Equipped with a ROPS Frame)

DE98E118

DS00M091 DECAL 8
Part No. 1985614C1
DECAL 5 (If Equipped with Thermostart)
Part No. 1902074R2

1985614C1
DS96M078

Page 15
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Rest Of World Tractors

NOTE: Due to differing market requirements, the following decals are fitted for ALL markets other than Nor th
America.

3 4

11

3
6
7 2
10
1
12
DI96M079

9 8

DS00H118

DECAL 1 DECAL 2
Part No. 249809A1 Part No. 243007A1

WARNING: Risk of being

crushed. DO NOT allow any
passenger to sit on the
fenders or on any other part
of the tractor or towed
implement.

DI96K245

WARNING: Always read the safety and operating

DI96K245
instructions in your Operators Manual.

Page 16
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

DECAL 3 DECAL 6
Part No. 249806A1 Part No. 180543A1
(Located on Starter Motor)
CAUTION: Before
operation, always read the
safety and operating
instructions in your
Operators Manual.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
180543A1

DI96K246 WARNING: Risk of being crushed. DO NOT short

across starter terminals to start the engine. Only start
the engine from the operators seat.
DECAL 4
Part No. 281726A1
(If Equipped with DECAL 7
Opening Windsheild) Part No. 249807A1
(If Equipped with True
CAUTION: DO NOT open Ground Speed Sensor)
the windshield when a front
loader is fitted.
WARNING: DO NOT look
directly into the face of the
ground speed sensor keep clear
of sensor unit

DS97K032

DS96M125
DECAL 5
Part No. 1534713C1
(If Equipped with Front PTO) DECAL 8
Part No. 249807A1
(If Equipped with Wheel Wedge)

DS97F031

WARNING: Keep clear. Front PTO shaft rotates at DS96M125

1000 rpm.
CAUTION: ALWAYS use a wheel wedge in front of or
behind a wheel when parked on a slope.

Page 17
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

DECAL 9 DECAL 11
Part No. 400855A1 Part No. 400853A1
(Located on the Inside of (If Equipped with
Right Hand Rear Fender) External Hitch Controls)
WARNING: Risk of
entanglement.
Keep all guards in place both on
the tractor and implement(s).
Read your Operators Manual for
correct PTO operational
procedure.

DS96M125
DI00H113

WARNING: Stand well clear of the rear linkage and

implements when using the hitch remote switches or injury
DECAL 10
can result from moving parts.
Part No. 1902074R2

DECAL 12
Part No. 250937A1
(If Equipped with a ROPS Frame)

DS96M078

WARNING: Keep clear. Rear PTO shaft(s) rotates at

540 or 1000 rpm.

PTO SPEEDS EXAMPLE ABOVE SHOWS 540/1000

SHIFTABLE REAR PTO.
DE98E118
OTHER DECALS WHICH MAY BE FITTED DEPENDING
UPON PTO OPTION ARE: WARNING: ROPS frame clearance.
(Refer to page 135. for correct operation and related safety
540 RPM ONLY - SINGLE SHAFT PTO
issues).
PART NO. 1091659R1
540 & 1000 RPM - DUAL SHAFT PTO
PART NO. 278372A1
540/750 RPM - SHIFTABLE PTO
PART NO. 1964195C2

Page 18
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ROLL OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE (ROPS)

ROPS Safety Rules

WARNING: Securely fasten your seat belt
(if equipped). Your tractor is equipped with
Do not make modifications to the ROPS.
a ROPS cab for your protection. The seat
Example; welding an accessory to the ROPS, or
belt can help ensure your safety if it is used
drilling a hole in the ROPS. Special fasteners are
! and maintained. Never wear a seat belt
used to install the operator protective parts.
loose or with slack in the belt system.
Replacement parts must be the same as given in
Never wear the belt in a twisted condition
the Parts Catalog for your tractor.
or pinched between the seat structural

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
members.
ROPS Plate
Your tractor is equipped with a Roll Over Protective
Structure (ROPS) cab. Seat belts (if equipped and
permitted by local regulations) are a part of your
protective system and must be worn at all times.
Carefully follow all instructions to get all the safety
advantages of the equipment provided. DI96M016

Each ROPS is equipped with a ROPS Plate. The

Tractor Roll Over plate shows the ROPS serial number and
applicable standards. See page 3. for location.
ROPS is a special safety unit. The ROPS must be
replaced with a new ROPS if damaged, to ensure
you will get the same protection.

The ROPS, the operators seat, the seat belt (if

equipped) and all the mounting accessories and
wiring inside the operators protective system must
be carefully checked if a ROPS cab is damaged,
and all damaged parts must be replaced with new
parts immediately.

DO NOT TRY TO MAKE REPAIRS OR WELD A

ROPS.

Page 19
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

NOTES:

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

Page 20
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

TRACTOR ACCESS

WARNING: Jumping on or off the tractor

can cause an injury. Always face the
tractor, use the hand rails and steps, and
! get on or off slowly. Maintain a three point
contact to avoid falling, (both hands on rails
and one foot on the step, or one hand on
the hand rail and both feet on the steps).

Cab Door Lock

Use the key for the key switch to lock or unlock the
cab door from the outside.

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
When mounting or dismounting from the tractor
use the left hand door when possible. If you use
the right hand door, avoid interference with the
control levers.

MD02E072

DP96J383

Page 21
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

OPERATORS SEAT

WARNING: Do not adjust the seat while driving. Loss of control and injury
! can result.

Mechanical Suspension Seats - Cab Tractors

NOTE: The standard mechanical seat is also optional for ROPS (platform) tractors with a
waterproof covering.

1 2

DS99G094 DS99G099

DS99G069

DS99G093

4 DS99G092

1. FORE/AFT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - Lift 4. WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL AND

lever and adjust as required, release lever to WEIGHT INDICATOR - With the seat empty
lock in position. turn knob as required until operators weight is
shown on the weight indicator.
2. BACK REST ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - Lift
control to tilt as required, release lever to lock
in position. WARNING: To prevent injury the operators
weight setting must be checked and
3. HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - Grip ! adjusted to suit the operator before the
seat and raise to required height. To lower, tractor is driven.
raise seat fully passed the upper end stop
then lower to lowest position.

Page 22
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

5 6

DS99G096 DS99G097

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
DS99G098

10
DS99G069

DS99G101 8
DS99G123

DS99G100

5. ARM RESTS - Lift up or down. 9. CUSHION TILT ADJUSTMENT (Deluxe Seat

Only) - Lift lever to adjust seat cushion tilt
6. BACK REST HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT/ angle.
REMOVAL (If Equipped) - Pull up or push
down to required height. Pull up past end stop 10.CUSHION DEPTH ADJUSTMENT (Deluxe
to remove. Seat Only) - Lift lever to adjust seat cushion
depth.
7. LUMBAR ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - Turn
knob as required.

8. SWIVEL ADJUSTMENT CONTROL (Deluxe

Seat Only) - Lift lever and adjust as required.

NOTE: There is no fore/aft adjustment in the

offset positions.

Page 23
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

Air Suspension Seats - Cab Tractors

DS99G096

DS99G089

1
DS99G074

DS99G068

6
4
DS99G090

DS99G073

5
DS99G072

1. FORE/AFT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - Lift 5. HEIGHT AND WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

lever and adjust as required, release lever to lock CONTROL - Lift and release for Automatic Weight
in position. Adjustment. Lift and hold to raise or push and hold
to lower.
2. ARM RESTS - Lift up or down.
NOTE: Seat must be lowered before the automatic
3. BACK REST ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - Lift weight adjustment can be made.
control to tilt. Release lever and lock in position.
IMPORTANT: Never operate the compressor
4. SWIVEL ADJUSTMENT CONTROL (Deluxe for more than 1 minute.
Cab Only) - Lift lever and adjust as required.

NOTE: There is no fore/aft adjustment in the WARNING: To prevent injury the operators
offset positions. weight setting must be checked and
! adjusted to suit the operator before the
tractor is driven.

6. ISOLATOR CONTROL - Move control from

rear to front (position 1) for float. Move control
from front to rear (position 2) to lock.

Page 24
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

10
9

DS99G071
DS99G097

11

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
DS99G098

DS99G068
8
12
7 DS99G086

DS99G101

DS99G100

7. CUSHION TILT ADJUSTMENT (Deluxe Seats 10.HEATED SEAT CUSHIONS (Super Deluxe
Only) - Lift lever to adjust seat cushion tilt Seat Only) (If Equipped) - Press switch down
angle. to turn heater ON. Press switch up to turn
heater OFF.
8. CUSHION DEPTH ADJUSTMENT (Deluxe
Seats Only) - Lift lever to adjust seat cushion 11. MANUAL LUMBAR ADJUSTMENT
depth. CONTROL - Turn knob as required.

9. BACK REST HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT/ 12.AIR LUMBAR ADJUSTMENT CONTROL

REMOVAL (If Equipped) - Pull up or push (Deluxe Seats Only) - Press upper and lower
down to required height. Pull up past end stop switches as required.
to remove.
IMPORTANT: Never operate the compressor
for more than 1 minute.

Page 25
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

Mechanical Suspension Seat - Seat Belt (If Equipped)

Tractor with ROPS (Platform)
WARNING: Securely fasten your seat belt.
Your tractor is equipped with a ROPS cab
2 or frame for your protection. The seat belt
! can help ensure your safety if it is used and
maintained. Never wear the belt in a
twisted condition or pinched between the
seat structural members.
DS99G112

STEP 1

DS99G111

DS99G108 DP97C132

Adjust the seat to your requirements.

3 Keep your back straight in the seat. Pull the seat
DS99G107 belt completely across your body and push the
metal eye into the latch assembly until it locks.
Adjust the position of the seat belt as low on your
1. FORE/AFT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - Lift body as possible.
lever and adjust as required, release lever to
lock in position. STEP 2

2. HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - Grip

seat and raise to required height. To lower,
raise seat fully past the upper end stop then
lower to lowest position.

3. WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL - With the

seat empty turn knob as required until
operators weight is shown on the weight
indicator.

WARNING: To prevent injury the operators

weight setting must be checked and
! adjusted to suit the operator before the
DP97C133

tractor is driven. To release the seat belt, push the red button on top
of the latch assembly.

IMPORTANT: From time to time, carefully

inspect the seat belt and replace belt if worn
or damaged.

Page 26
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

Passenger Seat (If Equipped)

The passenger seat allows a colleague to ride in
safety and comfort.

IMPORTANT:
1. Children are NOT permitted to use the
passenger seat.
2. The left hand door MUST be closed at all
times whenever the passenger seat is
occupied and the tractor is in motion.
3. See page 7 for additional safety information.

STEP 1
DD00A118

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
For the Operators convenience a net storage
pouch is provided on the rear of the passenger
seat.

DD00A115

Raise the seat base.

STEP 2

DD00A116

Insert the seat base support between the seat base

stops as shown above.

STEP 3
Store the seat in the reverse sequence.

Page 27
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT

WARNING: Never adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the
! steering column while driving can cause loss of control resulting in injury
or death.

DS98B210

1. Column Tilt Adjustment 2. Telescopic Column Adjustment

(If Equipped) (If Equipped)
The steering column can be adjusted up or down The steering column can be moved in or out at any
into ten different positions. of the tilt positions.
To adjust: To adjust:
Lift and hold the locking lever (1) up. Move the Lift and hold the locking lever (1) up. Pull or push
column up or down to the required position and the column in or out to the required position and
then release the lever to lock the column in then release the lever to lock the column in
position. position.

Page 28
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS
Standard (Analog) Instrument Cluster
(If Equipped)

6
N

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
5

4 3 2
DS99J060

1. INDICATOR LAMPS - see page 31 for details. 4. LOW FUEL WARNING LAMP

2. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE - 5. FUEL LEVEL GAUGE

Yellow area: low temperature.
6. ENGINE HOURMETER
Green area: normal working temperature.
Red area: overheating.

IMPORTANT: If the pointer is in the red area,

the master warning lamp will flash. STOP THE
ENGINE AND CHECK THE CAUSE OF
OVERHEATING. Make sure the engine is cool
before starting any inspection.

3. TACHOMETER/SPEEDMETER -
Upper dial: engine revolutions per minute (rpm).
PTO symbols: correct engine rpm for the PTO
speed.
Lower dial: tractor speed in kilometers per hour
(km/h) outside, and miles per hour (mph) inside.

NOTE: If the rear tyre size is changed the

instrument cluster must be reprogrammed with the
new tyre size, see page 142 for correct procedure.

Page 29
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

Deluxe (Digital) Instrument Cluster

(If Equipped)

7 2
750
1000

5 4 3
DS999G182

1. INDICATOR LAMPS - see page 31 for details. 4. MAIN DIGITAL DISPLAY - see page 31 for
more details.
2. McCORMICK LOGO or AIR PRESSURE
GAUGE (If Equipped) - indicates system 5. LOW FUEL WARNING LAMP
pressure for pneumatic trailer brakes.
6. FUEL LEVEL GAUGE
3. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE -
Yellow area: low temperature. 7. CLOCK, POWERSHIFT INDICATOR AND
ENGINE HOURMETER
Green area: normal working temperature.
Red area: overheating.

IMPORTANT: If the pointer is in the red area,

the master warning lamp will flash. STOP THE
ENGINE AND CHECK THE CAUSE OF
OVERHEATING. Make sure the engine is cool
before starting any inspection.

Page 30
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

Indicator Lamps Main Digital Display

NOTE: A complete description of the digital display
1. POSITION LAMPS ILLUMINATED -
programming procedures can be found on page 34.
Green.

2. LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE WARNING

1 8
- Red.

3. ENGINE AIR FILTER RESTRICTION -

Amber.
2
4. LOW COOLANT LEVEL WARNING -
Red. 3

5. MASTER WARNING - Amber.

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
4

6. MFD ENGAGED - Green.

7. DIFFERENTIAL LOCK ENGAGED -

Green. 7 6 5
DI98K042
8. HEADLAMP HIGH BEAM -
Blue. 1. WHEEL SLIP INDICATOR
NOTE: If equipped with a true ground speed
9. LEFT/RIGHT TURN SIGNAL - sensor, see “Wheel Slip Display” on page 100.
Green.
2. AREA or AREA/HOUR INDICATOR
10. PARK BRAKE ENGAGED -
Red. 3. DISTANCE TRAVELLED INDICATOR

11. ALTERNATOR CHARGE - 4. PTO RPM or ENGINE RPM INDICATOR

Red.
5. AREA FUNCTION ON/OFF BUTTON
12. LOWER WORKLAMPS - Amber.
6. ENGINE/PTO RPM BUTTON

13. FIRST TRAILER TURN SIGNAL - 7. DISTANCE TRAVELLED ON/OFF FUNCTION

Green. BUTTON

14. SECOND TRAILER TURN SIGNAL - 8. TRUE GROUND SPEED SENSOR

Green. INDICATOR

15. 750 or 1000 RPM PTO ENGAGED -

750
1000 Amber.
NOTE: PTO speed 750 or 1000 rpm depending
upon PTO option fitted.

16. SHIFT F/N/R LEVER TO NEUTRAL -

Amber - XtraShift Tractors ONLY.

17. REVERSE GEAR SELECTED -

Green - XtraShift Tractors ONLY.

Page 31
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

Digital Displays in Keyswitch When a ‘0’ is programmed for old instrument

cluster hours, this function is not displayed.
Positions
New tractors are programmed with ‘0’ old
ACCESSORY MODE- One position instrument cluster hours, so this function will not
counterclockwise from OFF. display on a new tractor.
NOTE: If you have to replace the hour meter,
the old (‘OLd’) hours recorded can be
programmed into the cluster, see page 40 for
more information.

DI96J444A

When the keyswitch is turned from OFF to the 1

ACCESSORY position the service hours will be
displayed; service interval time on the upper DI96J448
display with the service hour symbol, elapsed time
on the lower display. With the keyswitch in the ACCESSORY position, if
the AREA FUNCTION button (1) is pressed, the
NOTE: The timer is set to the engine oil upper digital display will show the units (A for acres
change interval of 250 hours. When 250 hours or h for hectares), and the lower digital display will
has elapsed, the service timer symbol will show the total area worked. The Area symbol will
flash. Flashing and counting will continue until also be displayed.
the timer is read once, and then it will return to
0 and start again. The service timer can be set
to any value between 0 and 999. See page 38
for more information.

1
DI96J450

If the AREA FUNCTION button is pressed again,

the lower digital display will show the units and the
upper digital display will show the area worked per
hour. The Area per Hour symbol will also be
DI96J445 displayed.

When the keyswitch is in the ACCESSORY If the AREA FUNCTION button is pressed again,
position, if the ENGINE rpm button is pressed while the display will return to total area worked. To reset
the service hours are displayed, the old instrument to zero, press the AREA FUNCTION button and
cluster hours will be displayed with ‘OLd’ and the ENGINE/PTO RPM button together for 1 second.
service timer symbol on the upper display and
hours on the lower display. If the ENGINE rpm
button is pressed again, the display will show
service hours.

Page 32
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

If an open circuit is detected, contact your dealer.

If the true ground speed sensor is not operating,
the instrument cluster will use the wheel speed
sensor for ground speed automatically.

IMPORTANT: If the FORWARD/ NEUTRAL/

REVERSE lever is moved into forward or reverse
before the initial test is completed the tractor will
2 not move. To reset, move the lever into neutral and
then select the direction required.
DI96J449A

If the DISTANCE FUNCTION button (2) is pressed Normal Operation

the lower digital display will show the distance
travelled in feet (F) or metres (m). The Distance
symbol will also be displayed.

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
2 DI96J453

DI98K048 After the self test, the tractor speed in either ‘mph’
If the DISTANCE FUNCTION button is pressed or ‘km/h’ will be displayed in the upper display and
again, the upper display will show the distance the engine rpm in the lower display.
travelled in miles ‘M’ or kilometres ‘km’. The
distance symbol will also be displayed.

To reset to zero, press the DISTANCE FUNCTION

button and ENGINE/PTO RPM button together for
1 second.
NOTE: If the distance travelled is greater than
9999 feet or metres, the display will only show
the distance travelled in miles or kilometres.

IGNITION ON/RUN MODE - One position

clockwise from OFF. DI96J452

If the ENGINE rpm / PTO rpm button is pressed,

Initial Self Test the lower display will show the PTO shaft rpm with
the PTO speed and symbol on the right.
When the keyswitch is turned from the OFF
If the tractor is equipped with a true ground speed
position to the ON/RUN position, the instrument
sensor, the sensor symbol is also displayed at the
cluster will go through an INITIAL SELF TEST.
top RH corner.
All digital displays and some warning and indicator
lights will be illuminated for approximately 3.5
seconds.
If equipped with true ground speed sensor AND AN
OPEN CIRCUIT IS DETECTED in the true ground
speed sensor signal input, the true ground speed
sensor symbol will flash for 6 seconds.

Page 33
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

PROGRAMMING THE DIGITAL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

General Information
There are three different programming modes for the digital instrument cluster:
1. ACCESSORY MODE - see below.
2. IMPLEMENT WIDTH MODE - see page 41.
3. DYNAMIC MODE - see page 41.

1. Programming in the Programming the Clock (Menu Code 1)

Accessory Mode NOTE: The digital clock can be programmed to
display a 12 or a 24 hour time display.

STEP 2

E C

A B A B
DI98K051

DI98K051
If the menu code display (C) is not as shown press
switches (A) or (B) until the menu code 1-- is
STEP 1 displayed. The clock display (E) will begin to flash
Press and hold the Engine/PTO RPM switch (A) on and off.
and turn the key counterclockwise to the accessory
position. STEP 3

The top digital display should display the menu

code 1-- as shown. Release the switch, the clock
display (E) will begin to flash on and off.

NOTE: To change the menu code number C

press switch (A) to decrease the number and E
switch (B) to increase the number.

D
A B
DI98K052

Press and hold switches (A) and (B) at the same

time. The menu code will change to --1 and 12 or
24 will appear on the lower digital display (D),
release the switches.

The clock display (E) will become blank. To change

the display press the switch (A) to select 12 or
press switch (B) to select 24.

Page 34
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

NOTE: Selecting 12 will programme the clock Programming MPH or km/h

for a 12 hour time display and selecting 24 will (Menu Code 2)
programme the clock for a 24 hour time
display. STEP 6

STEP 4

C
C
E
A B
D
DI98K054

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
A B
If the menu code display (C) is not as shown,
DI97M122
press switches (A) or (B) until the menu code 2--
Press and hold switches (A) and (B) at the same is displayed. The MPH and km/h symbols will
time for 1 second to save the selection. The clock flash on and off alternately.
display (E) will appear. To change the hours,
press switch (A) and to change the minutes press STEP 7
switch (B).

STEP 5

C
A B
DI98K055

A B Press and hold switches (A) and (B) at the same

time. When the top digital display changes to --2
DI98K054
as shown, release the switches. The MPH or km/
Press and hold switches (A) and (B) at the same h symbol will be displayed (not flashing). Press
time for 1 second to save the selection. The code switch (A) to select the km/h option or switch (B)
menu display (C) will display 2-- and the MPH and to select the MPH option.
km/h symbols will flash on and off alternately. Continued ....

Page 35
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

STEP 8 STEP 10

C
E C E

D
A B A B
DI98K056 DI98K057

When the correct speed display option has been Press and hold switches (A) and (B) at the same
selected, press and hold switches (A) and (B) at time. When the top digital display changes to --3
the same time for 1 second to save the as shown, release the switches. The previous
selection. The code menu display (C) will programmed tyre radius will appear on the lower
display 3-- and ‘tirE’ will appear and flash on digital display (D), the clock display (E) will stop
and off on the clock display (E). flashing.
Press switch (A) to decrease the constant and
Programming Tyre Radius switch (B) to increase the constant.
(Menu Code 3)
NOTE: Use the table on the next page to the
STEP 9 determine the correct tyre radius constant to
be programmed into the cluster.
NOTE: If switch (A) or switch (B) is held down,
the numbers will increase or decrease rapidly.
To increase or decrease the number by one,
press and release the switch.

E C STEP 11

A B
DI98K056

If the menu code display (C) is not as shown, C

press switches (A) or (B) until the menu code 3--
is displayed, tirE will appear and flash on and off
on the clock display (E).
A B
DI98K058

When the correct tyre size constant has been

selected, press and hold switches (A) and (B) at
the same time for 1 second to save the selection.
The code menu display (C) will display 4-- and the
hour glass symbol will flash on and off.

Page 36
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

Rear Tyre Rolling Radius

ETRTO *
ROLLING
REAR TIRE SIZE MEASURING RADIUS
RADIUS
(mm)
13.6R28/13.6-28 610
14.9R28/14.9-28 640
16.9-28 or 16.9R28 670
14.9R30/14.9-30 665
16.9R30/16.9-30 695
1
18.4R30/18.4-30 720
480/70R30 695
12.4R32/12.4-32 640
16.9R34/16.9-34 745

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
18.4R34/18.4-34 770
480/70R34 745
520/70R34 770
540/70R34 770
540/65R34 745
12.4R36/12.4-36 690
13.6R36/13.6-36 715
12.4-38 720
2
13.6R38/13.6-38 740
15.5-38 or 15.5R38 745
12.4-42 750 MEASURE FROM CENTER OF
18.4-16.1 480 AXLE(1) TO BOTTOM OF
THE TIRE (2)
21.5-16.1 485

* ETRTO = EUROPEAN TIRE & RIM TECHNICAL ORGANISATION

IMPORTANT: The rolling radius can differ depending on tyre Manufacturer,

tyre wear, tyre pressures and load. For a more accurate rolling radius
dimension, use the Dynamic Mode procedure on page 41.

Page 37
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

Programming the Service Timer Interval STEP 14

(Menu Code 4)

STEP 12

C
A B
DI98K060

When the correct service interval has been

A B
selected, press and hold switches (A) and (B) at
DI98K058
the same time for 1 second to save the selection.
If the menu code display (C) is not as shown The code menu display (C) will display 5-- and the
press switches (A) or (B) until the menu code 4- area function symbol will flash on and off.
- is displayed. The hour glass symbol will flash
on and off.

STEP 13

D
A B
DI98K059

Press and hold switches (A) and (B) at the same

time. The top digital display (C) will change to --4
as shown, release the switches. The previous
programmed service interval will appear on the
lower digital display (D) and hour glass symbol
will stop flashing.

Press switch (A) to decrease the service interval

constant or switch (B) to increase the service
interval constant.

Page 38
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

Programming The Area Function Mode STEP 17

(Menu Code 5)
NOTE: The cluster can be programmed for
manual area or automatic area display. In the
manual area mode the cluster will continually
calculate the area worked when the area
function is turned on. In the auto area mode C
the cluster will only calculate the area worked
when the implement is in the lowered position
F
(working) and the area function is turned on.
STEP 15 A B
DI98K062

When the correct area function mode has been

selected, press and hold switches (A) and (B) at the

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
same time for 1 second to save the selection. The
code menu display (C) will display 6--. OLd will
C appear and flash on and off in the hourmeter display
(F) and the hour glass symbol will also flash on and
off.

A B
DI98K060

If the menu code (C) displayed is not as shown

press switches (A) or (B) until the menu code 5-- is
displayed. The area function symbol will flash on
and off.

STEP 16

A B
DI98K061

Press and hold switches (A) and (B) at the same time.
When the digital display (C) changes to --5 as shown,
release the switches. The previous area function
constant will appear on the lower digital display (D).
The area function symbol will stop flashing. Press
switch (A) to display the AUTO area function mode
constant ‘1’ or switch (B) to display the MANUAL area
function mode constant ‘2’.

Page 39
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

Programming the “OLd” Instrument STEP 19

Cluster Hours (As Required)
(Menu Code 6)
NOTE: The cluster hourmeter display reading
can not be changed. A new cluster or
hourmeter will always start recording at ‘0”. If
a new cluster or hourmeter is to be installed, C
the recorded hours from the old cluster can be
programmed into a separate ‘OLd hour display F
in the new cluster. This function provides the D
option to store and display the hours recorded A B
by a replaced cluster or hourmeter, so an DI98K063
accurate recording of the tractors total hours
can be kept electronically. Press and hold switches (A) and (B) at the same
time. When the digital display (C) changes to --6 as
STEP 18 shown, release the switches. The old hours will
appear on the lower digital display (D) and
hourmeter (F) and hour glass symbol will stop
flashing. Press switch (A) to decrease the old hour
number or switch (B) to increase the number.

STEP 20
C

F
A B
DI98K062
E C
If the menu code display (C) is not as shown press
switches (A) or (B) until the menu code 6-- is
displayed. OLd will appear and flash on and off in
the hourmeter display (F) and the hour glass A B
symbol will also flash on and off. DI98K051

When the correct old hours have been selected,

press and hold switches (A) and (B) at the same
time for 1 second to save the selection. The code
menu display (C) will display 1-- (Menu Code 1)
and the clock display (E) will flash on and off. To
exit, turn key to off.

Page 40
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

2. Programming in the Implement 3. Programming in the Dynamic

Width Mode Mode
NOTE: The factory settings for tyre radius and
true ground speed sensor will provide correct
tractor performance, however the following
calibration can be performed if more accurate
settings are desired.

STEP 1
E
F
60 METRES
D

START FINISH

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
A
C D
Mark off a straight line distance of 60 metres.
Use an acceptable method to mark the start line
and finish line.
DS98K064
STEP 2
STEP 1
To access the implement width programming
mode, press the AREA FUNCTION switch (B)
while turning the keyswitch from OFF to the
ACCESSORY position.
The upper display (A) will show the previous
width setting and the lower display (D) will show
“CAL”. The area symbol (E) will also illuminate.

STEP 2
Press the AREA FUNCTION switch (B) to A B
increase the implement width. Press the ENGINE
RPM/PTO RPM switch (C) to decrease the DS98K065
implement width. Make sure the decimal point
setting is accurate. While pressing the ENGINE RPM/PTO RPM
switch (A), turn the keyswitch from OFF to the
The implement width is programmable between 0 ON/RUN position and start the engine. The upper
and 99.9 . The factory setting is 5.0 metres for display will show “CAL” and the lower display will
Europe and 16.4 feet for North America. show “1”.

STEP 3 The lower display is the number of calibration

Turn the keyswitch to the OFF position to save runs which will be averaged automatically by the
the implement width setting and exit the cluster for the final calibration. The number of
implement width programming mode. calibration runs is programmable between 1 and
4.
If MPH is selected for the ground speed,
implement width is shown in FEEt (F) on the
Use the AREA FUNCTION switch (B) to increase
clock display. If km/h is selected, implement
the number of runs. Use the ENGINE RPM/PTO
width will be displayed in metres (m).
RPM switch (A) to decrease the number of runs.
The most accurate calibration will be obtained
using 4 calibration runs.
Continued ....

Page 41
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

STEP 3 STEP 5

A B A B
DS98K066
DS98K066

When the desired number of calibrations is set, When the tractor reaches the start line,
press the ENGINE RPM/PTO RPM (A) and AREA momentarily press either the ENGINE/PTO rpm
FUNCTION (B) switches at the same time for one switch (A) or the AREA FUNCTION switch (B). The
second to save the setting. The lower display will number of pulses displayed will start to increase.
show “0”. If equipped with a true ground speed
sensor, two “0” zeros will be displayed. The “0” STEP 6
represents the number of pulses received from the
sensor. This number will increase during each When the tractor reaches the finish line,
calibration run. momentarily press either the ENGINE RPM/PTO
RPM switch or the AREA FUNCTION switch. The
STEP 4 number of pulses displayed will return to “0”.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all calibration runs are
complete.

IMPORTANT: The programmed number of

calibration runs must be completed. If the
programmed number of calibration runs are not
60 METRES completed, the instrument cluster will remain in the
dynamic programming mode until the keyswitch is
turned to the OFF position, and the calibration will
START FINISH not be programmed.
DI96J517
STEP 7
Start the tractor and drive SLOWLY, but at more
than 2 km/h (1.25 mph), toward the start line.

DS98K067

When all calibration runs are complete, the upper

display will show the true ground speed sensor
calibration number (if equipped) and the lower
display will show the loaded tyre radius in
millimeters. The instrument cluster and the
display will then return to the normal operating
mode.

Page 42
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

Distance Function Operation

The distance function records and displays the STEP 3
distance travelled.

During normal operation:

STEP 1

B A
DS98K069

Press and hold the switch (A) for 2 seconds again.

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
The upper display will now show the distance
A travelled in miles (“M”) or kilometers (“km”).
DS98K068
NOTE: If the distance travelled in feet or metres is
Press the DISTANCE FUNCTION switch (A) to start greater than 9999, the distance travelled will only
measuring the distance travelled. The distance be displayed in miles or kilometres. The units for
symbol (B) is displayed. distance travelled is automatically selected based
upon the ground speed units.
Press the switch again to stop measuring. The
distance symbol (B) is turned off. The distance eg. If your cluster is programmed for mph, then
travelled is stored in the memory. feet and miles will be displayed. If your cluster is
programmed for km/h, then meters and
STEP 2 kilometers will be displayed.
(To display distanced travelled; in the run mode
while driving). STEP 4
To reset the distance travelled, press and hold
the DISTANCE FUNCTION and ENGINE RPM/
PTO RPM switches together for 1 second. The
C
lower display will change to zero and the
distance travelled information will be reset.

STEP 5
D To return to normal rpm display, press and
release the RPM switch once.
Continued ....
A
DS98K046

Press and hold the switch (A) for 2 seconds. The

upper display (C) will show the unit of measurement
(F for feet or m for metres) and the lower display (D)
will show the total distance travelled. The distance
symbol will also illuminate.

Page 43
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

The distance travelled can also be read with the STEP 2

keyswitch in the ACCESSORY position:

STEP 1
A DS98K069

Press the switch (A) again. The upper display will

C show the distance travelled in miles (“M”) or
kilometers (“km”).

STEP 3
To reset the distance travelled, press and hold
D the DISTANCE FUNCTION and ENGINE RPM/
PTO RPM switches together for 1 second. The
lower display will change to zero and the
A DI98K046 distance travelled information will be reset.

Press and release the DISTANCE FUNCTION switch

(A). The upper display (C) will show the unit of
measurement ( F for feet or m for metres ) and the
lower display (D) will show the total distance travelled.
The distance symbol will also illuminate.

Page 44
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

Area Function Operation

The area function can display the total area worked During normal operation:
or the area worked per hour.
STEP 1
IMPORTANT: Make sure the area function mode
and the implement width are programmed before
using the area function. The factory setting is in the
AUTO mode with an implement width of 5 meters.
To change this setting, See Programming The Area
Function Mode (Menu Code 5) on Page 39 of this B
manual

NOTE: For trailed implements, a connector is

provided on the harness behind the 7 pin A
auxiliary electrical socket, to connect an

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
implement position switch. This will turn the DS98K070
area function off when not required.
Press the AREA FUNCTION switch (A) to turn the
area measuring function on. The area symbol (B) will
be displayed.
Press the switch again to stop measuring. The area
symbol will be turned off. The area worked is stored in
the memory.

STEP 2
(To display area worked; in the run mode while
driving).

DH98K072
C
If the area worked is less than 1000 acres or
hectares, it is displayed with a decimal point on
the lower display.
D

DH98K073

Press and hold the switch (A) for 2 seconds. The upper
display (C) will show the unit of area (‘A’ for acres or ‘h’
for hectares) and the lower display (D) will show the
total area worked. The area symbol will also display.

Continued ....
DH98K071

If the area worked is more than 1000 acres or

hectares, the whole number is shown on the
lower display and the point and tenths on the
upper display.

Page 45
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

STEP 3 The area worked can also be read with the

keyswitch in the ACCESSORY position:

DI98K074
C
Press and hold the switch (A) again for 2 seconds.
The lower display will show the area units and the
upper display the area worked per hour. The area
D
per hour symbol (E) will illuminate. B
STEP 4
Press and release the RPM switch to return to A
normal display.
DH98K073
If the switch is held, the display will alternate
between total area worked and area worked per Press and release the AREA FUNCTION switch
hour. (A). The upper display (C) will show the unit of
area, either ‘A’ for acres or ‘h’ for hectares. The
NOTE: The units for area worked is automatically
lower display (D) will show the total area worked.
selected based upon the ground speed units. eg. If
The area symbol (B) will also illuminate.
your cluster is programmed for mph, then acres will be
displayed. If your cluster is programmed for km/h, then
STEP 6
hectares will be displayed.

STEP 5
To reset the area worked, press and hold the AREA
FUNCTION and ENGINE RPM/PTO RPM switches
together for 1 second. The lower display will change
to zero and the area worked information will be
reset. E

DI98K074

Press and release the switch (A) again. The

lower display will show the units, either ‘A’ for
acres or ‘h’ for hectares and the upper display
will show area worked per hour.The area per
hour symbol (E) will illuminate.

STEP 7
To reset the area worked, press and hold the
AREA FUNCTION and ENGINE RPM/PTO RPM
switches together for 1 second. The lower display
will change to zero and the area worked
information will be reset.

Page 46
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

OPERATING CONTROLS
Instrument Panel

1 2 3
4

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
5
6

MD02E053

1. THERMOSTART/COLD START SWITCH 5. KEY SWITCH - The key switch has four
(If Equipped) -See page 65 for instructions. positions as follows:

2. HAZARD WARNING SIGNAL SWITCH

Off Position - Turn from On/Run
position counter clockwise to stop the
3. WORK LIGHTS - Three position rocker
tractor. The key can only be removed
switch. The lights will operate as follows:
from this position.
First Position - OFF.
Second Position - The rear work lights are ON. Accessory Position - The radio can
The lamp in the rocker switch will also be be operated in this position and some
illuminated. of the cluster displays, also used for
Third Position - The front and rear work lights programming the digital instrument
are ON. The lamp in the rocker switch for the cluster.
rear work lights and the indicator lamp on the
cluster for the front work lights will also be On/Run Position - All bar graphs,
illuminated. digital displays, warning and indicator
lamps will be turned on for
4. UPPER HEAD LAMPS SWITCH (If Equipped approximately 3.5 seconds. This
with Front Hitch) - With head lamp switch in position is also used for dynamic
third position press the front of the switch calibration of rear tyre size and true
down, upper head lamps will illuminate and ground speed sensor, if equipped.
main head lamps will go off.
Start Position - Turn the key fully
clockwise against spring pressure will
energise the starter motor in addition to
the circuits already mentioned above.

Page 47
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

6. HEAD LAMP SWITCH - Direction Turn Signal, Hi/Low

Three Position Switch
Beam Switch and Horn

B C
3

A 1

8 2
MD02E053 DD98J149

A. First Position - All lamps OFF.

TURN SIGNAL:
B. Second Position - Front position lamps, tail
lamps, license plate lamps and the side console Position 1. = Right turn signal on.
illumination lamp will illuminate. Also analog
cluster illumination lamps will be ON. Position 2.= Left turn signal on.

C. Third Position - Front side lamps, tail NOTE: Self cancelling switch only: The turn signal
lamps, license plate lamps, the side console lamps will continue to flash until the steering wheel
illumination lamp and main head lamps will is turned in the opposite direction. You can override
illuminate. this function to cancel the indicator by moving the
switch in the opposite direction chosen.
Four Position Switch
HEADLAMP HI/LOW BEAM:
Position 3.= With headlamp switch in Third or
Fourth position, lifting the switch
towards the steering wheel, then
releasing, will select high beam,
B C (Blue indicator lamp on instrument
cluster will illuminated). Lifting the
A D switch again will select low beam,
(Blue indicator lamp will go off).
With headlamp switch in First or
Second position, lifting the switch
towards the steering wheel and
8 releasing will flash the headlamps.
MD02E054

A. First Position - All lamps OFF. HORN:

B. Second Position - ALL the amber warning Press the end of the switch to operate.
l a m p s w i l l f l a s h O N a n d O F F. ( R o a d -
Daytime).
C. Third Position - ALL the amber warning
lamps will flash ON and OFF. Tail lamps and
headlamps will be illuminated. (Road - Night).
D. Fourth Position - The side console
illumination lamp and main head lamps will
illuminate. Work lamp switch is enabled (Field).

Page 48
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

Forward/Neutral/Reverse Lever Pedal Controls

1
2 3
2

4
DP98J026 DP98E011

POWER SHUTTLE (XTRASHIFT TRACTORS)

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
1. CLUTCH PEDAL - See page 75 for correct
clutch pedal operation.

2. BRAKE PEDALS INTERLOCK - The brake

1
pedals interlock is used to lock the brake
pedals together.

WARNING: Brake pedals must be locked

together for road travel. This will ensure
! uniform brake operation and maximum
2 stopping ability.

3. THROTTLE PEDAL
MD02G054
SYNCHRO SHUTTLE 4. BRAKE PEDALS - The left brake pedal stops
the left rear wheel and the right brake pedal
Use the Forward/Neutral/Reverse (F/N/R) lever s to ps th e r i g h t r e a r w h ee l . Fo r o ff r o a d
to change direction of travel. operation the pedals can be used individually
to assist turning. For road oper ation the
Position 1. = Forward pedals MUST be locked together.

WARNING: Extra weight and bad traction

conditions such as mud or ice increase
your stopping distance. Remember that
liquid in the tyres, weights on the tractor or
wheels, tanks filled with fertilizer,
! herbicides or insecticides - all these add
Position 2. = Reverse
weight and increase the distance you need
in which to stop.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
tractor or axle operating wieights, as found
on the tractor P.I.N. plate.
NOTE: On tractors equipped with a synchro shuttle
selection must ONLY be made with the tractor
stationary and after fully depressing the clutch
pedal.

Page 49
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

Park Brake Auto Hitch Locking Latches

Release Control (If Equipped)

RP95N098

1. PARK BRAKE BUTTON DP98C317

The park brake is located at the LH side of the This release control is located behind the seat on
operators seat. Pull the lever fully up to engage the the RH side.
park brake. If you set the tractor in motion release
the park brake after putting the tractor in gear, see Pull the release control to unlock the locking
note. Press the button on the end of the lever IN latches.
and lower the lever to release the brake.
NOTE: If equipped with Ride Control the unlatching
When the park brake is engaged the warning lamp of the Auto Hitch can be made easier by holding the
on the instrument cluster will illuminate when the Ride Control Switch down while pulling the auto
keyswitch is turned to ON. The master warning hitch release control.
lamp will flash when the engine is started.
See Connecting an Implement on Page 88 of this
The lamps will go off when the brake is disengaged. manual for complete instructions.

NOTE: An audible alarm will sound, when the

engine is running, if a speed gear (1, 2, 3 or 4)
is selected when the park brake is engaged.

IMPORTANT: Driving the tractor with the park

brake partially engaged will cause damage to
internal transmission components. Make sure
brake is fully off.

Page 50
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

RIGHT HAND UPPER AND LOWER CONSOLE CONTROLS

3
4 5

9
2
10

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
11
6
1 8
7
MD02E055

1. THROTTLE LEVER - To increase or decrease 5. REMOTE HYDRAULIC VALVE LEVERS -

the engine speed. See page 132.

2. XTRASHIFT CONTROL 6. REMOTE LEVERS LOCKING DEVICE -

Three position rotary switch. See page 70 for See page 132.
more details.
7. FRONT PTO SWITCH (If Equipped) -
OR
See page 106.
TWO SPEED POWERSHIFT CONTROL
Two position rotary switch. 8. ROTATING BEACON SWITCH (If Equipped) -
See page 10.
= “DIRECT DRIVE”, NORMAL OPERATION.
9. ASHTRAY

= SPEED REDUCTION, INCREASE TORQUE. 10.RIDE CONTROL SWITCH (If Equipped) -

See page 122.
See page 72 for more details.
NOTE: DO NOT select speed reduction to 11. REAR FOG LAMP SWITCH (If Equipped)
improve engine braking.

3. TRANSMISSION SPEED LEVER -

See page 70.

4. TRANSMISSION RANGE LEVER (and

CREEPER LEVER, if equipped) - See page 69
for normal transmission operation and page 99
for Creeper operation.

Page 51
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

13

12

14

16
15

MH02H034

12.REAR PTO CLUTCH LEVER - 14.REAR PTO SHIFTABLE SPEED LEVER -

See page 102. See page 103.

13.HITCH CONTROL BOX - 15.THREE TERMINAL SOCKET - See page 96.

16.CIGARETTE LIGHTER

E A

D B

C
DP97C155

A. DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY - The display

indicates hitch operation error codes.
B. HITCH UPPER LIMIT CONTROL KNOB
C. HITCH TRAVEL CONTROL KNOB
D. HITCH DROP SPEED CONTROL KNOB
E. HITCH RESPONSE CONTROL KNOB
(If Equipped)

NOTE: Too slow a setting may limit the ability of the

hitch to follow the contours of the soil.

See page 121 for more information.

Page 52
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

18 19
20
21
17

22

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
DR99J013

17.HITCH UP/DOWN SWITCH - See page 114. 20.SLIP LIMIT CONTROL SWITCH -
See page 120.
18.DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SWITCH -
See page 123. 21.HITCH POSITION CONTROL -
See page 118.
19. MECHANICAL FRONT DRIVE (MFD)
(If Equipped) - See page 124. 22.HITCH DRAFT (LOAD) CONTROL KNOB -
See page 120.
NOTE: DO NOT use the MFD for light duty work or
when travelling on the highway. DO NOT drive the 23.FRONT LOADER CONTROL LEVER
tractor in high range third or fourth gear with MFD (If Equipped).
engaged.

23
WARNING: Tractors equipped with
Mechanical Front Drive (MFD) have
increased traction and can climb steeper
! slopes. Stay off slopes too steep for safe
operation. To prevent rear overturns, reverse
up steeper slopes.

DP97E451

Refer to loader manufacturers handbook and/or

your dealer for correct loader operation.

Page 53
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

OPERATOR CAB ENVIRONMENT CONTROLS

Deluxe Cab

1 2 3 4

6 6

7
DD95M222

1. WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER CONTROL - 5. AIR CONDITIONER PRESSURE INDICATOR

Three Positions: LAMP

Intermittent, clockwise to increase or 6. AIR OUTLET VENTS

counterclockwise to decrease wipes per 7. DEFROSTER CONTROL
minute.

I Slow.
8
II Fast.

NOTE: On tractors equipped with an

opening windshield there is only one
speed.

Push the control knob to activate windshield

washer (If Equipped).

2. TEMPERATURE CONTROL
DP96J356
NOTE: Under certain conditions the heater fan can
run at maximum speed when the control is in the 8. RECIRCULATION VENT
2nd, 1st or OFF position. This is a safety feature
designed to prevent overheating of resistors in the
circuit.

3. BLOWER CONTROL

4. AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL - Blower must

be operating.

Page 54
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

Low Profile Cab (without Air Conditioning)

2
1

3
DP97K027 DP99G059

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
4
5

2 2

DP97E257

1. WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER CONTROL- 4. TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Two Positions:
NOTE: Under certain conditions the heater fan can
Intermittent, clockwise to increase or
run at maximum speed when the control is in the
counterclockwise to decrease wipes
2nd, 1st or OFF position. This is a safety feature
per minute.
designed to prevent overheating of resistors in the
On. circuit.
I
Push the control knob to activate windshield 5. BLOWER CONTROL
washer (If Equipped).

2. AIR DISCHARGE VENTS

3. DEFROSTER VENTS

Page 55
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

Low Profile Cab (with Air Conditioning)

2
1

3
DP97K027 DP99G059

4
6

2 2
DR00N032

1. WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER CONTROL- 4. TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Two Positions:
NOTE: Under certain conditions the heater fan can
Intermittent, clockwise to increase or
run at maximum speed when the control is in the
counterclockwise to decrease wipes
2nd, 1st or OFF position. This is a safety feature
per minute.
designed to prevent overheating of resistors in the
On. circuit.
I
Push the control knob to activate windshield 5. BLOWER CONTROL
washer (If Equipped).
6. AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL (If Equipped)
2. AIR DISCHARGE VENTS - Blower must be operating.

3. DEFROSTER VENTS

Page 56
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

REAR VIEW MIRRORS

The mirrors give the operator a clear rear view for Extendable Mirrors
distance and an immediate rear view to check
implements when working.
(If Equipped)

Internal Mirror

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
DP99J053
To alter the length: loosen the locking knob (1) and
move the mirror to the required position, then
DP96J364 tighten the locking knob.
To adjust the mirror: hold firmly, tilt horizontally and
To adjust mirror head: hold firmly, tilt horizontally
vertically as required.
and vertically as required.
Basic Mirrors

DS97K180
To adjust the mirror head: hold firmly, tilt
horizontally and vertically as required.

Page 57
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

ADDITIONAL CAB FEATURES

Cab Side Windows Sun Visor
Deluxe Cab Visor
(If Equipped)

DD95M220

Push the window arm rearward and then push the

arm out until the window stops. DP96J366

Pull down or push up as required.

Opening Windshield
(If Equipped) Sun Visor
Low Profile Cab Visors
(If Equipped)
Two sun visors are available, roof and windshield:

DP96H290

Release catches, (one each side) and push the

bottom outward.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT open the windshield when DD97G208
using a front loader.
Windshield Visor (If Equipped) - Pull down or
push up as required.
Cab Rear Window

DD95M217 DD97G207
Ventilation - The lever in the slot (as shown).
Roof Visor (If Equipped) - Pull visor and attach
Emergency Exit - window fully open.
into retaining clips (1).

Page 58
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

Rear Wiper/Washer Radio (If Equipped)

(If Equipped)

DP96J357

DD95M219 DELUXE CAB LOCATION

INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
When looking at the switch:
Right side of switch = On/wash.
Left side of switch = Off.

Roof Hatch (If Equipped)

DP97K027
LOW PROFILE CAB LOCATION

For operation refer to the radio manufacturers

instructions.

DP96H288

Ventilation - Push the latch towards the front of the

tractor and then push the hatch up.
Emergency Exit - Push firmly upward to release the
support struts from the lower retainer clips.

Page 59
 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS

NOTES:

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

Page 60
 GENERAL OPERATION

GENERAL OPERATION

Before Starting The Engine Run In Procedure

● A gradual run-in of a new engine is not
WARNING: Before starting the engine, be necessary.
sure all operating controls are in neutral
and the park brake is engaged. This will ● Continuous operation at light loads during
! eliminate accidental movement of the the early life of the engine can cause
machine or start up of power driven lubricating oil to enter the exhaust system.
equipment. ● Maximum load can be applied to a new
engine as soon as the engine is put into
service and the coolant temperature has
WARNING: Never start the engine in a reached a minimum of 60°C (140°F).
! closed building. Proper ventilation is
required under all circumstances. ● The engine will benefit if the load is
applied as soon as possible after the
engine is put into service.
Do the following checks before starting the tractor
for the first time. ● DO NOT run the engine for long periods
at maximum load.
1. Make sure all persons that operate or do ● DO NOT run the engine for long periods
maintenance on the tractor understand that at high speed without a load. When not
clean fuel is important. operating the engine with a load, keep the
engine at the correct operating
2. Check all lubrication fittings. temperature.

GENERAL OPERATION
3. Check the oil levels in the engine crankcase
and transmission.

4. Check the water level in the batteries (if

battery is not maintenance - free).

5. Check that the fuel tank is filled with clean fuel

of the specifications given in this manual.
Clean around the fuel tank cap before you
remove the cap.

6. Check the fuel system, cooling system and

engine oil pan for leaks.

7. Check that the alternator and compressor

belts are adjusted correctly.

8. Remove any water or sediment from the fuel

primary filter.

9. Check the air pressure of the tyres.

10.If your tractor has a power takeoff, make sure

the safety guard is installed and in good
condition.

11. Check the coolant level in the coolant

recovery bottle and radiator. Add water and
ethylene glycol coolant as needed.

Page 61
 GENERAL OPERATION

Service Indicator Lamps First Service Required Before

And Gauges Regular Intervals
Services must be carried out at varying Engine
Hour intervals, depending on which comes first,
see below for example.

Every 10 Hours, or daily

Every 50 Hours, or weekly
Every 100 Hours, or every two weeks
Every 250 Hours, or monthly
Every 500 Hours, or six monthly
Every 1000 Hours, or annually
Every 2000 Hours, or bi-ennial
DS99G183

The condition of a monitored system is indicated by Some tasks must be carried out which are
the service indicator lamps and guages, (as outside the regular intervals. These tasks are
highlighted above). If the lamps illuminate when the listed below.
engine is running, a service or repair is required.
After any wheel/axle adjustments, the first 30
The operation of the indicator lamps and gauges is minutes of operation (then every 10 Hours of
described in the Instruments/Controls section of operation thereafter, until the torque has
this manual. stabilized):

When the keyswitch is turned to the ON position, - Check the torque of all wheel bolts/nuts.
the instrument cluster will do a self check of all - Check the torque of all front axle bolts/nuts.
monitored systems. Some of the indicator lamps,
gauges and the digital displays will energize for 3.5 After the first 20 Hours of front PTO operation
seconds. (then at 250 Hours and every 250 Hour of front
PTO operation thereafter):
Before starting the tractor, make sure all systems
are operating. - Front PTO oil change.

Service intervals can be programmed into the After the first 20 Engine Hours
Digital Instrument Cluster to remind you when (then at 500 Hours and every 500 Hours there
service is required, see page 38 for more after):
information. - Change the transmission/hydraulic oil filter.

After the first 50 Hours of operation (then at

250 Hours and every 250 Hours of operation
thereafter):
- Check tension of Drive belts.

After the first 250 Hours of operation

(then at 1000 Hours and every 1000 Hours of
operation thereafter):
- Change MFD Axle Differential Oil.
- Change MFD Axle Planetary Oil.

Page 62
 GENERAL OPERATION

STARTING PROCEDURE

Normal Starting Procedure STEP 3

WARNING: On electrically operated MFD

tractors, the MFD clutch is spring loaded
into engagement and relies on hydraulic
pressure for disengagement. A failure in
the MFD hydraulic system will therefore
automatically engage the MFD even
though the MFD switch is in the
disengaged position. This is a built in safety
! feature. DO NOT operate MFD tractor
transmissions with the rear wheels off the
ground or removed, UNLESS THE FRONT
WHEELS ARE ALSO JACKED UP CLEAR
DR98J150
OF THE GROUND OR THE FRONT AXLE
DRIVE SHAFT IS DISCONNECTED. XTRASHIFT TRACTOR SHOWN
Failure to do this can result in the tractor Put the Forward/Neutral/Reverse lever in the
being pulled off the rear supports by the NEUTRAL position.
front axle.
NOTE: On tractors equipped with a Synchro
Shuttle transmission you MUST depress the
WARNING: Operate controls only when clutch pedal before trying to move the
! seated in the Operators seat. Forward/Neutral/Reverse lever.

GENERAL OPERATION
NOTE: XtraShift Tractors are equipped with a
IMPORTANT: Operate the engine at idle speed Neutral Start Switch on the F/N/R circuit. If the
for a few minutes to make sure that enough Forward/Neutral/Reverse lever is not in the neutral
lubricant reaches the turbocharger bearings position the engine WILL NOT start.
and engine parts before operating the engine NOTE:
at rated speed.
STEP 4
STEP 1
Turn on the master disconnect switch, (If
equipped).

STEP 2

DD97C123

Check to make sure the Rear PTO clutch lever is in

the disengaged position.
NOTE: The Rear PTO clutch lever MUST be in
MD02H057 the disengaged position or the starter motor
will not operate.
Push the clutch pedal fully down. Put the range Continued ....
and speed levers in the NEUTRAL position.
NOTE: The Speed Lever MUST be in the
NEUTRAL position or the starter motor will not
operate.

Page 63
 GENERAL OPERATION

STEP 5 Cold Temperature Operation

Before you start the engine and operate your
tractor during cold ambient temperatures, check the
following items:

following items:
● BATTERIES - Must have a full charge.
● FUEL - Must be clean and contain no
water.
● ENGINE OIL - Must have the correct
viscosity for the ambient temperature
DP97F035
range.
Move the throttle lever to 1/4 open position.
● TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC FLUID -
STEP 6 Must have correct oil. Use McCormick
HTX transmission fluid.
● COOLING SYSTEM - Must have a
minimum of 33 percent and a maximum of
50 percent low silicate ethylene glycol
solution for protection. This ratio will vary
with different market requirements.
● TYRES - If there is liquid in the tyres, the
tyres must have protection against
freezing temperatures below 0°C. See
your dealer.
● STOPPING THE ENGINE - Permit the
DP96J332 engine temperature to decrease before
Turn the keyswitch to the START position until stopping.
the engine starts, but no more than 30 seconds, ● CONDENSATION IN FUEL TANK - To
then release the key. Run the engine for 2 prevent condensation in the fuel tank and
minutes. water entering the fuel system, fill the fuel
IMPORTANT: If the engine does not start and tank after each operating day.
an audible alarm sounds, make sure the ● FUEL FILTER - During cold ambient
speed lever is in the NEUTRAL position. temperatures, make sure you remove
IMPORTANT: If the engine starts and then stops water from the fuel filter each day or
wait for the starter motor to stop turning before damage will occur. Loosen the drain plug
you turn the key switch to the start position again. each day before starting the engine.
Tighten the drain plug after the water has
IMPORTANT: DO NOT use the starting motor for drained.
more than 30 seconds without stopping. Wait
three minutes between starts to allow the starter IMPORTANT: During cold ambient
motor to cool. temperatures never run the engine at low idle
speed for long periods of time. Never run the
STEP 7 engine for long periods of time when the
Check that all indicator lamps are giving normal coolant temperature is below normal.
indications and, when warm, that the coolant
temperature gauge is in the green area.
IMPORTANT: If the indicator lamps or gauge
does not give the correct indications, STOP THE
ENGINE IMMEDIATELY AND CHECK FOR THE
CAUSE.

Page 64
 GENERAL OPERATION

During cold ambient temperatures, the engine will Starting the Engine Using the
not heat to or keep the rated operating temperature
at slow engine speeds. Slow engine speeds in cold
Thermostart (If Equipped)
temperatures can cause damage to the engine.
Use the following procedures to warm the engine WARNING: DO NOT spray ether or gasoline
oil and transmission oil and to keep the correct into the air induction manifold of the tractor
operating temperatures. ! fitted with a thermostart system. To do so
could cause an explosion and injury.
1. WARMING THE ENGINE AND
TRANSMISSION. To start the diesel engine at cold ambient
A. Start the engine using the correct Cold temperatures of -7°C (20°F) or lower, use the
Temperature Starting procedure given in Thermostart cold start system according to the
this manual. following procedure:
B. To heat the transmission oil, run the engine
STEP 1
at 1500 rpm for approximately five minutes.
Turn on the master disconnect switch, (If
2. KEEP ENGINE AT CORRECT OPERATING equipped).
TEMPERATURE.
STEP 2
A. When the engine is operating in cold
ambient temperatures without a load, keep Push the clutch pedal fully down. Put the range
the engine warm as described below. and speed levers in the NEUTRAL position.

B. Run the engine at approximately 1500 rpm. STEP 3

C. Put a cover in front of the grille to control

GENERAL OPERATION
t he a m ou nt o f ai r go in g t hr o ug h th e
radiator.

3. STOPPING THE ENGINE.

A. Run the engine at slow speed for a short
period of time. This will permit the engine
temperature to decrease gradually before
stopping the engine.

DR98J150

XTRASHIFT TRACTOR SHOWN

Put the Forward/Neutral/Reverse lever in the

NEUTRAL position.
NOTE: On tractors equipped with a Synchro
Shuttle transmission you MUST depress the
clutch pedal before trying to move the
Forward/Neutral/Reverse lever.
NOTE: XtraShift Tractors are equipped with a
Neutral Start Switch on the F/N/R circuit. If the
Forward/Neutral/Reverse lever is not in the neutral
position the engine WILL NOT start.

Continued ....

Page 65
 GENERAL OPERATION

STEP 4 Engine Coolant Heat Maintainer

Check to make sure the Rear PTO clutch lever is in (If Equipped)
the disengaged position.
IMPORTANT: The Rear PTO clutch lever MUST The heater element is installed in the engine
be in the disengaged position or the starter block and will keep the engine coolant at a warm
motor will not operate. temperature for improved cold temperature
starting.
STEP 5
Move the throttle lever to the FULL open position. North American Tractors

STEP 6

MD02B020

Connect a mains supply to the connector plug

MD02E058 (1), located directly on the engine block.
Push the top of the thermostart switch (1) down for
10 to 15 seconds, then turn the keyswitch to the NOTE: Use a heavy duty three wire extension
start position. While cranking the engine hold the cord if required.
thermostart switch down for a maximum of 30
seconds. Once started, move the throttle to 1/3 Rest Of World Tractors
open and run the engine for 2 minutes.

NOTE: If the engine does not start and an

audible alarm sounds, make sure ALL controls
are in the NEUTRAL position.
If the engine runs erratically, press the
thermostart switch again while the engine is
running.
If the engine does not start in the first 15
seconds then repeat the procedure, but push 1
the thermostart button for only 10 seconds. If
the engine still does not start, DO NOT try to
start the engine again for 3 minutes.
DD98E254
STEP 7
Connect a mains supply to the connector plug
When the engine starts check that all indicator (1), located next to the RH step.
lamps and gauges are giving normal indications
and when the engine is warm the coolant NOTE: Use a heavy duty three wire extension
temperature indicator is in the correct area. cord if required.
IMPORTANT: If the indicator lamps or gauges
do not give the correct indications, STOP THE
ENGINE IMMEDIATELY AND CHECK FOR
THE CAUSE.

Page 66
 GENERAL OPERATION

PARKING THE TRACTOR

Stationary Tractor Operation Stopping The Engine
(Engine Running) ● Carry out steps 1 and 2 in opposite
Before doing any PTO and/or HYDRAULIC column.
operation do the following:
STEP 3
STEP 1

DD97C123

DR98J150
Disengage the PTO if in operation.
XTRASHIFT TRACTOR SHOWN
STEP 4
Stop the tractor and put the Forward/Neutral/

GENERAL OPERATION
Reverse lever in NEUTRAL position.
NOTE: On tractors equipped with a Synchro
Shuttle transmission you MUST depress the
clutch pedal before trying to move the
Forward/Neutral/Reverse lever.

STEP 2

dp97f035

Move the throttle lever fully rearward to the low

idle position.

STEP 5
Turn the keyswitch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
IMPORTANT: When stopping the engine after
MD02H057
operating under heavy load, run the engine at idle
Press the clutch pedal and put the Range and speed for a three to five minutes. This will allow the
Speed levers in the NEUTRAL position. temperature of the engine and turbocharger (if
equipped) to decrease gradually.

STEP 6
Turn off master disconnect switch (if equipped) and
remove the master switch key.

Page 67
 GENERAL OPERATION

Folding Wheel Wedge Master Disconnect Switch

(If Equipped) (If Equipped)
Use the master disconnect switch to disconnect the
battery power from the electrical systems on the
machine, when leaving the tractor or during
servicing to prevent accidental start up.
The key can be removed to prevent unauthorized
use or accidents.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT, unless in an

emergency, use the master disconnect switch
to stop the engine.

DP97B033
LOCATED ON REAR FENDERS

Use the wheel wedge, as shown below, in front of

or behind a rear wheel, depending on the direction
of the tractor, when parking the tractor on a slope.

DP99G157

OM1401

IMPORTANT: To prevent accidents do not park

the tractor with equipment raised.

Page 68
 GENERAL OPERATION

OPERATING THE TRANSMISSION

NOTE: In ambient temperatures of -10°C (14°F) or below, the transmission and controls could be difficult to
operate for the first few minutes after starting, until the transmission oil is warm.
IMPORTANT: While the tractor is moving the transmission must always be in drive, (except when changing
range, speed or direction). Failure to do so will result in the operator not having full control of the tractor and
may result in personal injury.

Your tractor is equipped with either:

1. XtraShift Transmission 3. Synchromesh (Mechanical) Transmission

● Forward/Reverse directions CAN be ● Forward/Reverse directions CAN NOT be
selected without using the clutch pedal. selected without using the clutch pedal.
● 3 SPEED POWERSHIFT. Powershift ● Range and Speed gear selection CAN
speeds CAN be selected without using the NOT be made without using the clutch
clutch pedal when the tractor is moving or pedal.
stationary.
● Range and Speed gear selection CAN
4. Creeper is also optional on ALL
NOT be made without using the clutch
transmission variants.
pedal.
● CREEPER speeds CANNOT be selected
NOTE: On XtraShift 30 km/h transmission
without using the clutch pedal, see page 99
tractors the transmission is electronically
for more information.

GENERAL OPERATION
governed and will not allow travel speeds to
exceed 30 km/h.

2. Two Speed Powershift Transmission

● Forward/Reverse directions CAN NOT be
selected without using the clutch pedal.
● Range and Speed gear selection CAN
NOT be made without using the clutch
pedal.
● 2 SPEED POWERSHIFT (Speed
Reduction) CAN be selected without using
the clutch pedal when the tractor is
moving or stationary.

Page 69
 GENERAL OPERATION

XtraShift Transmission Operation

If your transmission is also equipped with creeper STEP 3
speeds, see page 99 for operation.

Selecting Speeds with Tractor

Stationary
STEP 1

DR98J150

Select FORWARD or REVERSE.

IMPORTANT: The FORWARD/NEUTRAL/

REVERSE lever must only be moved with the
operator sitting on the seat. If the lever is
MD02H055
moved without the operator sitting on the seat
Move the powershift switch to position 1. the tractor will not move. The operator must
sit on the seat and move the lever back into
STEP 2 NEUTRAL and then into FORWARD to start
the tractor moving.

STEP 4
Disengage the park brake and release the clutch
pedal slowly. The tractor will start moving.

MD02H056

MD02H057

Push the clutch pedal fully down and select the

desired speed and range gears.
NOTE: On XtraShift 30 km/h transmission tractors
the transmission is electronically governed and will
not allow travel speeds to exceed 30 km/h.

Page 70
 GENERAL OPERATION

Selecting Speeds with Tractor Moving Changing Direction of Travel

To change to another Range press the clutch

pedal down and move the lever to the new
position (High or Low).

When a Speed change

is required either press
down the clutch pedal
or press and hold the
de-clutch button (1) (if
equipped) and move 1
the lever to the new
position.
For smooth changes,
move the speed lever DR98J150

through the speeds

Changing the direction of travel can be done with or
one at a time in the
without using the clutch pedal.
correct sequence 1, 2,
3, 4. MD02H062
Always slow the tractor speed to a minimum before
moving the FORWARD/NEUTRAL/REVERSE lever
The powershift switch can be shifted to any to the desired direction of travel.
position when the tractor is moving without
having to press the clutch pedal or de-clutch
button. For smooth speed changes, move the Transmission Diagnostics

GENERAL OPERATION
switch one speed at a time in sequence 1, 2, 3.
If equipped with a digital instrument cluster the If the transmission fails to function correctly the
powershift display (2) on the instrument cluster transmission controller will detect an error and
will indicate which powershift speed has been the operator will be alerted by either of the
selected. following:

1. FLASHING "SHIFT-TO-NEUTRAL" LAMP

Operational Error;
Example: An attempt has been
made to reverse the tractor with the
2 speed and/or range lever(s) in the
neutral position.
Shift the F/N/R lever to the Neutral
position and then repeat the
operation correctly.

2. FLASHING "SHIFT-TO-NEUTRAL" LAMP

DP96J384
AND AN ALARM
IMPORTANT: To prevent excessive
deceleration of the tractor ALWAYS downshift
one Speed at a time in sequence 4, 3, 2, 1.
Transmission malfunction.
NOTE: On XtraShift 30 km/h transmission tractors Contact your dealer immediately.
the transmission is electronically governed and will
not allow travel speeds to exceed 30 km/h.

Page 71
 GENERAL OPERATION

2 Speed Powershift Transmission Operation

If your transmission is also equipped with creeper STEP 2
speeds, see page 99 for operation.

Selecting Speeds with Tractor

Stationary

STEP 1

MD02G051

DP97F002

Select direct drive (hare) or speed reduction

(tortoise).

Use "direct drive" for normal operation (Hare

Symbol). If load increases or a slightly lower speed
is required, move the Powershift switch on the
speed lever down to the lower position identified by
MD02G052
the Tortoise symbol "speed reduction".
Push the clutch pedal fully down and select the
Speed will decrease and torque will increase. DO desired speed and range gears.
NOT select speed reduction to improve engine
braking. STEP 3

REMEMBER:

= “DIRECT DRIVE”, NORMAL OPERATION.

= SPEED REDUCTION, INCREASE TORQUE.

MD02G055

Keep the clutch pedal down and select

FORWARD or REVERSE.

STEP 4
Disengage the park brake and release the clutch
pedal slowly. The tractor will start moving.

Page 72
 GENERAL OPERATION

Selecting Speeds with Tractor Moving Changing Direction of Travel

To change to another range or speed, press the

clutch pedal down and move the levers to the
new position.

For smooth speed changes, move the speed

lever through the speeds one at a time in the
correct sequence 1, 2, 3, 4.

IMPORTANT: To prevent excessive

deceleration of the tractor ALWAYS downshift
one speed at a time in sequence, 4, 3, 2, 1.

MD02G055

When changing the direction of travel always

depress the clutch pedal and STOP the tractor
before moving the FORWARD/NEUTRAL/
REVERSE lever.

GENERAL OPERATION

Page 73
 GENERAL OPERATION

Synchromesh Transmission Operation

If your transmission is also equipped with creeper STEP 2
speeds, see page 99 for operation.

Selecting Speeds with Tractor

Stationary

STEP 1

MD02G055

Keep the clutch pedal down and select

FORWARD or REVERSE.

STEP 3

MD02K081
Disengage the park brake and release the clutch
pedal slowly. The tractor will start moving.

Selecting Speeds with Tractor Moving

To change to another range or speed, press the

clutch pedal down and move the levers to the
new position.

For smooth speed changes, move the speed

lever through the speeds one at a time in the
correct sequence 1, 2, 3, 4.

MD02K082
IMPORTANT: To prevent excessive
deceleration of the tractor ALWAYS downshift
Push the clutch pedal fully down and select the
one speed at a time in sequence, 4, 3, 2, 1.
desired speed and range gears.

Changing Direction of Travel

When changing the direction of travel always

depress the clutch pedal and STOP the tractor
before moving the FORWARD/NEUTRAL/
REVERSE lever.

Page 74
 GENERAL OPERATION

Clutch Pedal Operation

ALWAYS operate the clutch pedal when doing
the following:
● When selecting or changing RANGE and
SPEED, but not POWERSHIFT.
1 ● When engaging and disengaging creeper
(if equipped).
● When stopping the tractor.
● When changing direction of travel, if
equipped with a Synchro Shuttle
Transmission.

DP98E011 DO NOT ride the clutch pedal when the

transmission is under load. Release the clutch
The clutch pedal is used to temporarily disengage pedal completely within 5 seconds for
drive. improved clutch service life.

Use the clutch pedal when moving the tractor

short distances or when operating in confined
areas, connecting implements to the tractor, and
stopping the tractor.

GENERAL OPERATION
The operator should use the clutch pedal to start
the tractor moving from stationary. Gradually and
completely release the clutch pedal for a controlled
smooth start.

Page 75
 GENERAL OPERATION

CAB ENVIRONMENT
Low Profile Cab

1
2

4 4
DP97E257

LOW PROFILE CAB WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING

1
3

4 4
DR00N032

LOW PROFILE CAB WITH AIR CONDITIONING

Page 76
 GENERAL OPERATION

5 1. TEMPERATURE CONTROL
2. BLOWER CONTROL
3. AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL
(IF EQUIPPED)
4. DISCHARGE VENTS
5. DEFROST VENTS

5
DP99G059

Quick Reference

CAB ENVIRONMENT CONTROL SETTINGS

Type Condition Required Blower Discharge Defroster Tempera- Recirculatio Air
Speed Con- Vents Vents ture Control n Vent Conditionin
trol g

Cool Adjust as Open Adjust as OFF Open ON/MAX

(With Air Conditioning) Required Required

GENERAL OPERATION
Cool Adjust as Open Adjust as OFF Closed Not
(Without Air Conditioning) Required Required Applicable

Heat HIGH (II) or Adjust as Open Adjust as Open OFF

LOW (I) Required Required

Pressurize MAX (III) Open Open ON or OFF Closed ON or OFF

Inside Window Moisture MAX (III) Open * Open ON/MAX Open ** ON/MED
Removal

* Open or Close if Moisture is on Windshield.

** Open or Close if not Humid Outside.

NOTE: Use the maximum (III) settings for fast NOTE: Under certain conditions the heater fan
cooling, fast heat or for fast defrost. Use the high can run at maximum speed when the control is
(II) or minimum (I) settings for optimum operator in the 2nd, 1st or OFF position. This is
comfort. because of heat build up in a temperature
controlled override switch, after a long period
of operation, and is a safety feature designed
to prevent overheating of resistors in the
circuit.

Page 77
 GENERAL OPERATION

Deluxe Cab

1 2 3

DP96J356

5 5

6
RD96N065

1. TEMPERATURE CONTROL 5. DISCHARGE VENTS

2. BLOWER CONTROL 6. DEFROST VENTS
3. AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) 7. RECIRCULATION VENTS
4. AIR CONDITIONER PRESSURE INDICATOR

Quick Reference

CAB ENVIRONMENT CONTROL SETTINGS

Type Condition Required Blower Discharge Defroster Tempera- Recirculatio Air
Speed Con- Vents Vents ture Control n Vent Conditionin
trol g

Cool Adjust as Open Adjust as OFF Open ON/MAX

(With Air Conditioning) Required Required

Cool Adjust as Open Adjust as OFF Closed Not

(Without Air Conditioning) Required Required Applicable

Heat HIGH (II) or Adjust as Open Adjust as Open OFF

LOW (I) Required Required

Pressurize MAX (III) Open Open ON or OFF Closed ON or OFF

Inside Window Moisture MAX (III) Open * Open ON/MAX Open ** ON/MED
Removal

* Open or Close if Moisture is on Windshield.

** Open or Close if not Humid Outside.

NOTE: Use the maximum (III) settings for fast NOTE: Under certain conditions the heater fan can
cooling, fast heat or for fast defrost. Use the high run at maximum speed when the control is in the
(II) or minimum (I) settings for optimum operator 2nd, 1st or OFF position. This is because of heat
comfort. build up in a temperature controlled override
switch, after a long period of operation, and is a
safety feature designed to prevent overheating of
resistors in the circuit.

Page 78
 GENERAL OPERATION

CAB ENVIRONMENT ADJUSTMENTS

Cab Cooling Pressurized Cab

● Set Blower control as required, (I) for (high wind or dust conditions)
minimum cooling or (III) for maximum
cooling. WARNING: Cab air filters remove dust in
● Open all air discharge vents. the air, but are not capable of removing
chemicals used in spraying crops or in
● Open defroster vents and adjust as weed control. Many chemicals used for
required. these purposes are toxic when improperly
● Set temperature control to OFF. used, and can be hazardous to operators
! and others in the area. Follow the
● Close the recirculation vent, (if equipped). instructions of manufacturers of both the
Closing the recirculation vent minimizes equipment and the chemicals regarding
inside air recirculation and maximizes prohibitions against inhalation of dust or
outside air intake. spray, personal hygiene practices, and
NOTE: With the recirculation vent set in any other precautions noted by the
position outside air will still be pulled into the cab. manufacturers.

● If equipped with air conditioning, turn ● Set Blower control to maximum (III).
control to ON and adjust as required,
page 80. ● Open all air discharge vents.
● Open defroster vents and adjust as

GENERAL OPERATION
required.
Cab Heating
● Set temperature control as required.
For maximum cab heat operation, run the tractor
engine until operating temperature is reached then ● Close recirculation vent, (if equipped).
do the following: Closing the recirculation vent minimizes
inside air recirculation and maximizes
● Set Blower control as required, (I) for outside air intake.
minimum heated air flow or (III) for
maximum heated air flow. With the blower NOTE: With the recirculation vent set in any
control set at (I), air flow and air speed is position outside air will still be pulled into the cab.
decreased. This causes the heated air ● If equipped with air conditioning, adjust as
temperature to be higher than the blower required, page 80.
speed set at (III).
● Adjust air discharge vents as required.
● Open defroster vents and adjust as Window Demisting/Defrosting
required. ● Set Blower control to maximum (III).
● Set temperature control as required, fully ● Open all air discharge vents.
clockwise for maximum heat and fully
counterclockwise for OFF. ● Open defroster vents and adjust towards
● Open the recirculation vent, (if equipped). windshield/windows.
Closing the recirculation vent minimizes
● Turn temperature control to maximum (III).
inside air recirculation and maximizes
outside air intake. ● Close the recirculation vent, (if equipped).
● If equipped with air conditioning, set ● If equipped with air conditioning, turn
control to OFF, page 80. control to ON and adjust as required,
page 80.

Page 79
 GENERAL OPERATION

Air Conditioner Operation (If Equipped)

RD96N065
DELUXE CAB

1. AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL

2. AIR CONDITIONER PRESSURE
INDICATOR
(Lamp in Switch on LP Cab)

To operate the air conditioner, the blower must be 2

on. The blower speed, temperature control and all
1
vents must be adjusted to obtain the best cooling
for the ambient temperature and dust conditions.
Under normal operating conditions, and with the
windows and doors closed, temperatures in the cab
of 6°C to 15°C (10°F to 25°F) less than the DD99J036
ambient temperature will occur. When operating the
LOW PROFILE CAB
air conditioner system, the moisture level is
decreased. NOTE: The Air Conditioning system is
equipped with an environmentally safe
NOTE: During cold weather, with ambient refrigerant, HFC-R134a. Never recharge the
temperature above 0°C (-32°F), operate the air conditioning system with refrigerant other
air conditioner at least once per month, for a than HFC-R134a as this will result in loss of
period of 10 to 15 minutes. This will lubricate cooling and permanent damage to all air
the seals to prevent them becoming brittle and conditioning components.
help prevent the loss of refrigerant from the
system.

When the pressure indicator lamp on a Deluxe Cab

illuminates or the lamp in the Air Conditioning
Switch on a LP Cab flashes, the air conditioning
system has turned off due to refrigerant pressures
that are too high or too low. This can indicate that
the system needs service or that the ambient
temperature is too cool for air conditioning
operation. To start the air conditioner again, turn the
control to the OFF position and then back to the ON
position.

NOTE: The air conditioner system has two

safety switches for protection of the system
for low refrigerant level and high restrictions.
If, during tractor operation, the air conditioner
stops working, See System Check on
Page 208 of this manual.

Page 80
 GENERAL OPERATION

DRAWBAR
The drawbar can be set in various positions, fore/aft and offset.

Fore/Aft Position Left/Right Offset Position

NOTE: For non PTO work the drawbar can be

set in either of the two front holes depending
on maximum vertical load required.

1
DP97D174

DP97D138

Remove the pivot pin retainer bolt (1) and the

GENERAL OPERATION
pivot pin (2) at the front of the drawbar.

DP97D176

Remove the retaining pin (3).

Slide the drawbar left or right as required and
install the retaining pin.
B A When using the offset positions raise the lower
DH97B036
links to full height. With the lower links in this
position the hitch will not interfere with the side
Slide the drawbar backward or forward to the movement of the swinging drawbar.
required drawbar position A or B as indicated on
the implement or in the implement operators
IMPORTANT: The drawbar must be locked in the
manual.
centre lateral position when doing any of the
following operations:
When the correct position of the drawbar has been
set, install the pivot pin (2) and the retainer bolt (1). A. Towing implements at transport speed (15
km/h (10 mph) or more) in the field.
B. Towing an implement or trailer on the highway
at all speeds.
C. Operating a drawbar pulled, PTO driven
implement.
D. Moving the tractor in reverse with an
implement attached.

Page 81
 GENERAL OPERATION

IMPORTANT: Make sure local regulations are Drawbar Positions for PTO
followed when towing implements/trailers.
Operation
WARNING: Rear upset can result if pulling
When using power takeoff driven equipment
from wrong location on tractor. Hitch only to
(which would normally require an equal angle
! the drawbar. Use 3 point hitch only with the
hitch drawbar extension) the drawbar can be
implements designed for its use, not as a
installed in two different fore/aft positions (‘A’ for
drawbar.
1000rpm or ‘B’ for 540rpm). This position will
depend upon which PTO option is fitted to your
WARNING: Try to balance the load tractor.
primarily on the implement wheels as in
loading a machine with harvest crops. See the illustration and charts opposite for the
Avoid overloading the drawbar. Add front drawbar positions and the vertical loads
end weights for improved stability. Engage permitted in those positions. Also refer to the
the clutch smoothly, avoid jerking and use implement operators manual before making any
the brakes cautiously to avoid jack- knifing. adjustments.
!
In certain markets pulling trailers on public NOTE: For non PTO work the drawbar can be
roads is not permitted unless a special set in either of the two front holes depending
approval note has been supplied with the on maximum vertical load required.
machine documents. Always make sure
you have the relevant approval before
pulling trailers on public roads.

Page 82
 GENERAL OPERATION

Drawbar Position for Single or Dual Shaft PTO Operation

B A
2
DH97B037

Drawbar Position for Shiftable PTO Operation

GENERAL OPERATION
1

A
2
DH97B036

1. SINGLE SHAFT OR DUAL SHAFT PTO: 1. SHIFTABLE PTO: 2. IMPLEMENT ATTACHMENT PIN HOLE
DISTANCE OF 394 mm (15.5 inch) DISTANCE OF 410 mm (16 inch) FROM 3. FRONT OF TRACTOR
FROM END OF SHAFT TO CENTER OF END OF PTO SHAFT TO CENTER OF
IMPLEMENT ATTACHMENT PIN HOLE IMPLEMENT ATTACHMENT PIN HOLE

SINGLE/DUAL SHAFT PTO SHIFTABLE PTO

DRAWBAR POSITIONS AND PTO
SPEED “A”
“A” “B”
540/1000 RPM
1000 RPM 540 RPM
540/750 RPM

MAXIMUM VERTICAL LOAD

794 kg (1750 lb) 880 kg (1940 lb) 794 kg (1750 lb)
STANDARD DRAWBAR

MAXIMUM VERTICAL LOAD HEAVY

1070 kg (2359 lb) 1240 kg (2734 lb) 1070 kg (2359 lb)
DUTY DRAWBAR

Page 83
 GENERAL OPERATION

Connecting Implement to Drawbar

When connecting an implement, 5. When working with the drawbar, raise the
always: lower links as high as possible to prevent
interference between the lower links and the
1. Connect pull behind implements to the implement.
drawbar only.
6. When working with PTO equipment, Lock the
2. Use the hardened steel hitch pin supplied to drawbar in the center position on the drawbar
connect the implement to the drawbar. Make support with the drawbar retaining pin.
sure the pin is held securely in place with a Also see page 83 for correct fore/aft drawbar
lock pin. position.

3. If both the tractor and the implement are 7. The clevis (if equipped) must be removed
equipped with a drawbar clevis, remove the f r om th e dr a wb ar o r m ou n te d u n de r th e
clevis from the tractor OR implement. DO drawbar (See example B), to prevent possible
NOT PUT A LONG HITCH PIN THROUGH in ter fer enc e betwe en the cl ev is an d the
BOTH THE IMPLEMENT CLEVIS AND THE implement driveline.
DRAWBAR CLEVIS.
See examples A and B below for correct IMPORTANT: Only use a 50 mm inner diameter
methods of using a clevis type hitch. towing eye, See IMPLEMENT/TRAILER
DRAWBAR DIMENSIONS on Page 92 of this
EXAMPLE A manual.

1 2

EXAMPLE B

1 2

PM023

1. TRACTOR DRAWBAR
2. IMPLEMENT DRAWBAR

NOTE: For non-PTO work, the drawbar can

be set in any of the three fore/aft positions,
depending on maximum vertical load required.

4. Adjust the drawbar so that the centre line of

the pulling force of the tractor will be aligned
with the centre line of the implement.

Page 84
 GENERAL OPERATION

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE TRAILER HITCHES

(If Equipped)
These hitches can be adjusted up or down to match IMPORTANT: Check that the locking pins (4) have
the implement hitch height and to give clearance for fully engaged in the holes in the side support
the top link or for PTO operation. (locking pins level with the outer surface).
IMPORTANT: Make sure local regulations are
IMPORTANT: Use only implement towing eyes with
followed when towing implements/trailers.
40 or 50 mm inner diameter, see page 92.
NOTE: For ALL trailer hitches the trailer clevis
hole diameter and the hitch pin diameter must IMPORTANT: The connecting pin (No.3 in lower
not have excessive clearance (page 92). left hand photograph) engages automatically as the
implement towing eye contacts the release
IMPORTANT: Maximum vertical load capacity
mechanism inside the hitch coupling or it can be
is 1500 kg (3307 lb) depending upon the
engaged manually by striking the operating lever
capacity of the rear tyres fitted. Where
(2) downwards (away from the tractor) to the
applicable refer to your approval
horizontal position.
documentation.

Automatic Type (according to

89/173/EEC, DIN 11029)

WARNING: DO NOT touch the inside of

the hitch coupling assembly when the

GENERAL OPERATION
! release mechanism is under tension,
(operating lever (1) in the vertical position). 2
Serious injury can result.

This hitch connects automatically when the

implement towing eye contacts the release
mechanism (3) inside the hitch coupling. Before DP97K019
connecting an implement make sure the operating
Continued ....
lever (2) is in the vertical position.

1
2

3
4
DP97K020

To adjust the height, support the weight of the hitch

coupling assembly with one hand and with the
other hand pull the quick release lever (1) to the
right.
Move the hitch coupling assembly to the required
position. Push the quick release lever (1) to the left
to lock the coupling assembly in position.

Page 85
 GENERAL OPERATION

IMPORTANT: Before moving the tractor make sure: Manual Type "Option A"
A. The indicator pin (5) is fully in.
B. The operating lever (2) is in the horizontal
(according to 89/173/EEC,
position. DIN 11029)
C. The connecting pin (3) is fully in the hole of the
pin guidance bushing (fully engaged). Do not
tow or move if the pin is not fully engaged.
3
2 1
5

3
3
DP97K020
DP97K023
IMPORTANT: When the automatic hitch is not being
used, make sure the hitch connecting pin (3) is down This type of coupling has to be connected manually
and the operating lever (2) is horizontal. by hand.
IMPORTANT: Keep the hitch clean and protect all
moving parts of the hitch from corrosion, (including To adjust the height, support the weight of the hitch
the inner slide rails), by cleaning and greasing at coupling assembly with one hand and with the
regular intervals. other hand pull the release lever (1) to the right.
All moving parts should be checked for free
movement and correct operation. Move the hitch coupling assembly to the required
position. Push the release lever to the left and
Refer to Lubrication/Maintenance Section, page 186
down to lock in position.
for further information.
IMPORTANT: Check that the locking pins have
Internal Hitch Release (If Equipped) fully engaged in the holes in the side support
(locking pins level with the outer surface).

To remove the hitch pin (2), pull the release latch

sleeve (3) up. Make sure the latch sleeve is fully
engaged after installing the hitch pin.

IMPORTANT: Keep the hitch clean and protect

all moving parts of the hitch from corrosion,
(including the inner slide rails), by cleaning
and greasing at regular intervals.
6 All moving parts should be checked for free
DP98J218
movement and correct operation.
This control enables the operator to disconnect the Refer to Lubrication/Maintenance Section,
implement towing eye without leaving the tractor. page 186 for further information.
To operate, pull the lever to unlock and then rotate
the lever 180 degrees. The implement connecting
pin (3) will disengage and the coupling operating
lever (2) will be vertical. The hitch release lever must
return automatically to the locked position.
IMPORTANT: If the release lever does not return
automatically and lock, adjust the nut (6) until it
does.

Page 86
 GENERAL OPERATION

Manual Type "Option B" IMPORTANT: Keep the hitch clean and protect
all moving parts of the hitch from corrosion,
(according to 89/173/EEC, (including the inner slide rails), by cleaning and
DIN 11029) greasing at regular intervals.
All moving parts should be checked for free
This type of coupling has to be connected manually movement and correct operation.
by hand.
Refer to Lubrication/Maintenance Section,
page 186 for further information.
2

Piton- Fixe (If Equipped)

1 (according to NFU-026)

2 1
3

3
MI01F067

To adjust the height, pull the release knob (1) out.

Raise the handle (2) and while supporting the

GENERAL OPERATION
weight of the coupling assembly with the other
hand, raise or lower the assembly to the required DP97G082

position.
To connect an implement/trailer, Remove the spring
Lower the handle (2), the release knob (1) will clip and pin (1) and lift the retaining hook (2).
spring back to lock hitch coupler assembly into
position. Install the implement towing eye over the towing pin
(3) and lower the retaining hook (2).
IMPORTANT: Check that the locking pins (3)
have fully engaged in the holes in the side Install the pin and spring clip (1).
support.
IMPORTANT: The implement towing eye must
have an internal diameter of 50 mm, see
page 92.
5

4
MI01F066

To connect an implement/trailer, Remove the spring

clip (4) and hitch pin (5).
Enter the implement/trailer towing eye into the
clevis, install the hitch pin (5) to secure the
implement/trailer. Install the spring clip (4).

Page 87
 GENERAL OPERATION

AUTO HITCH (If Equipped)

(according to 89/173/EEC, ISO 6489)

Connecting an Implement STEP 3

(For Tractors Equipped With Ride Control ONLY)
WARNING: The maximum load capacity of
the auto hitch is 2250 kg (4960 lb) for the
hook and 1500 kg (3307 lb) for the
drawbar.
EEC Approved [Council directive 89/173/
EEC Annex IV, appendix 2 (dynamic test
method)]
These figures depend upon restrictions
! due to the capacity of the rear tires fitted.
Operating with loads above the given
maximum will result in damage to the auto
hitch and the linkage. This will also
decrease front end stability. DR99E106
Local legal requirements may require an
official Auto Hitch Approval Note for use on Press and hold the top of the Ride Control switch
public roads. fully down until the hitch stops upward
movement.

STEP 1 STEP 4

DP96N112 DP98D178

Turn the Upper Limit Control Knob (1) to the While holding the Ride Control switch down, if
maximum setting (Setting 11). applicable, pull the auto hitch release control to
unlock the locking latches.
STEP 2
Raise the auto hitch to maximum height (by Release the Ride Control switch, if applicable, to
either turning the three point linkage Position allow the hitch to lower to the upper limit setting.
Control Knob fully clockwise to position 10 or
setting the UP/DOWN switch into the UP STEP 5
position). Lower the auto hitch (by either turning the three
point linkage Position Control Knob
IMPORTANT: Turn the LOAD CONTROL knob fully counterclockwise or setting the UP/DOWN switch
clockwise to the (0) off position, this will prevent into the DOWN position).
unwanted hitch movement when the tractor is
moving at more than 0.8 km/h (0.5 mph).

Page 88
 GENERAL OPERATION

STEP 6 STEP 10
(For Tractors Equipped With Ride Control ONLY)

DP97E207

Reverse the tractor until the hook is aligned under DR99E106

the implement/trailer towing eye.
Press and hold the Ride Control switch fully
forward to the hitch override position until the
Optional Hitch Mirror Only:
hitch stops upward movement and the locking
latches are latched.
Release the Ride Control switch. The hitch will
lower to the upper limit setting.

STEP 11

GENERAL OPERATION
DP98D179

Open the rear window and use the hitch mirror (If
Equipped) to assist you when connecting the
implement/trailer.

STEP 7
DP97D104
Raise the auto hitch until the hook is engaged in the
implement towing eye. Lower the hitch onto the locking latches to take the
weight off the hydraulic system.
STEP 9
Raise the auto hitch to maximum height. IMPORTANT: The hitch must always be
supported on the locking latches and NOT by
the hydraulic system.
If the locking latches do not lock, adjust the lift
rods. If after adjustment the locking latches
still do not lock see your dealer.

NOTE: Implement/Trailer removed for photographic

purposes.

Page 89
 GENERAL OPERATION

Hook/Clevis Change Over STEP 3

IMPORTANT: DO NOT use the extended drawbar

position for any weight carrying applications, (eg.
single or twin axle weight transfer trailers, spreaders,
tankers etc.)

STEP 1

DP96F137

Remove the clevis drawbar and install the hook.

Insert the 2 lock pins and “R” clips.

STEP 4

DP96F136

Lower the auto hitch half way.

IMPORTANT: After lowering and extending the
auto hitch, stop the engine, put all
transmission levers in neutral and engage the
parking brake before leaving the tractor.

STEP 2

MD01K054

Insert clevis drawbar in the storage position.

DP96F139

Remove the two “R” clips (1) and the 2 lock pins.

Page 90
 GENERAL OPERATION

Auto Hitch Clevis Positions

Position for Power Takeoff Operations Position for Pulling Operations

DP96J406 DP97E210

Install the drawbar in the fully extended rearward For pulling operations, install the drawbar in the
with one hole (1) in the drawbar showing. fully forward position.
The MAXIMUM drawbar load in this position is The MAXIMUM drawbar load in this position is
1500 kg (3307 lb). Also observe tyre capacity 1500 kg (3307 lb).
and local legal requirements.
The MAXIMUM hook load in this position is
IMPORTANT: DO NOT use the extended drawbar 2250 kg (4960 lb).

GENERAL OPERATION
position for any weight carrying applications, (eg.
Also observe tyre capacity and local legal
single or twin axle weight transfer, trailers,
requirements
spreaders, tankers etc.)
NOTE: Pulling trailers on public roads may not
Position for Power Takeoff Operations - be permitted unless a special approval note
Offset Positions has been supplied with the machine
documents.

DP97E186

The drawbar can also be installed at an angle in the

PTO position.

Page 91
 GENERAL OPERATION

IMPLEMENT/TRAILER DRAWBAR DIMENSIONS

A) For Piton-Fixe, Auto Hitch (B.S.2) C) Automatic Clevis Type Trailer Hitch
and Swinging Drawbar (with Special Coupling) -
(GERMAN CLEVIS)

X
30 mm
X

50 mm Y
120× ×°
120× ×°

110 mm
Z

OM0881
OM0881
When using a Piton-Fixe, Auto Hitch or swinging When using this type of trailer hitch, ONLY use a
Drawbar, the trailer/implement drawbar must be to trailer/implement drawbar to DIN 74054, DIN 11043
ISO 5692 standard dimensions. If any other and DIN 11026 standard dimensions. This will
drawbar is used, damage to your tractor can/will improve connection between hitch and trailer/
occur.
implement drawbar. If any other drawbar is used,
B) Manual and Automatic Clevis Type damage to your tractor can/will occur.
Trailer Hitches - (EURO Clevis)
X (mm) Y (mm) Z (mm)
DIN 74054 30 40 100
DIN 11026 42 40 100
DIN 11043 32 40 100
X
If this type of trailer hitch is fitted a decal will be
Y positioned near the hitch clevis.

120× ×°

OM0881

When using a manual or automatic clevis type

trailer hitch, the trailer/implement drawbar must be
to DIN 74054, DIN 74053, DIN 11043, DIN 11026 or
ISO 5692 standard dimensions. If any other
drawbar is used, damage to your tractor can/will
occur.

X (mm) Y (mm) Z (mm)

DIN 74053 45 50 115
DIN 74054 30 40 100
DIN 11026 42 40 100
DIN 11043 32 40 100
ISO 5692 30 50 110

Page 92
 GENERAL OPERATION

TRAILER BRAKE COUPLINGS (If Equipped)

Pneumatic Trailer Brakes - Combined Single and Dual Line System

1
3

DP98C310

1. YELLOW COUPLING - BRAKE SERVICE LINE (DUAL LINE SYSTEM)

2. BLACK COUPLING - BRAKE FEED AND RETURN (SINGLE LINE SYSTEM)
3. RED COUPLING - BRAKE EMERGENCY LINE (DUAL LINE SYSTEM)
4. DUST COVER

GENERAL OPERATION
WARNING: Make sure the system is at
working pressure before operating the
! brakes with a trailer(s) fitted. Failure to do
this can result in injury or death.

WARNING: DO NOT park an unattended

tractor/trailer(s) combination using air
pressure to apply the brakes (Dual Line
! Pneumatic Braking System). The
mechanical park brake on both the tractor
and trailer(s) MUST be applied. 5
DP98C306

5. WATER DRAIN PLUNGER (PUSH UP)

The air reservoirs store air under pressure to
operate the trailer brakes.
Maximum Pressure .................................... 12.5 bar 6
(181 lb in2)
Maximum Operating Pressure ........................ 8 bar
(116 lb in2)
Capacity ..............................................10 (x2) litres
(908 (x2) in3)
Drain Reservoirs ................ Every 10 hours or Daily

DH98C308

6. REAR (CONTROLLED) AIR LINE CONNECTOR TO

INFLATE TIRES (IF EQUIPPED)

Page 93
 GENERAL OPERATION

Hydraulic Trailer Brakes

(If Equipped)
The hydraulic trailer brake coupling is mounted to
the left of the remote hydraulic couplings.
8
To connect or disconnect:

Slide the sleeve back on the trailer brake coupler

and push on or pull off, then release the sleeve.

DP98D004

IMPORTANT: An uncontrolled air supply is available

from a port (7) on the unloader valve. If this port is
used a regulator and air pressure gauge MUST be
fitted.

DP97D117

DP98J099

8. AIR PRESSURE GAUGE

Page 94
 GENERAL OPERATION

AUXILIARY ELECTRICAL POWER SOCKETS

Seven Terminal Electrical Socket

The seven terminal electrical outlet socket is Pin number 4 and 7 are controlled through the
fitted to all tractors to supply power to operate key switch. These circuits are protected with a 30
the electrical systems of implements, trailer ampere fuse. See Electrical System Circuit
lighting, warning lamps, and field lights. The Protection in this manual.
correct plug to fit the socket can be obtained from
your dealer. Rest Of World Tractors
Observe local legal requirements.

NOTE: If the warning lamp, implement or

trailer connector plug is not a seven terminal
type, the plug must be changed.

North American Tractors

DP97F007

The small socket (1) to the right of the seven

GENERAL OPERATION
terminal electrical outlet is used for connecting
accessories on to an implement or trailer, e.g.
rotating beacon. Power to the socket will only be
available at the socket when the Rotating Beacon
Switch (If Equipped) is in the ON position.
DP97F102
NOTE: The correct plug to fit the small socket
Terminal Positions and Circuits can be obtained from your dealer.

Terminal Positions and Circuits

1
6
2
5

7
3 4
102B
510125

TERMINAL No. CIRCUIT (CABLE COLOR)

TERMINAL No. TERMINAL USE
1 ................................................................... GROUND (WHITE)
1/L .................................................................... LH INDICATORS
2 ...........................................................FIELD LIGHTS (BLACK)
2/54g ............................................................ REAR FOG LAMPS
3 ..............................................LEFT TURN SIGNAL (YELLOW) 3/31 .............................................................. EARTH (GROUND)
4 .......................................................AUXILIARY POWER (RED) 4/R....................................................................RH INDICATORS
5 ............................................. RIGHT TURN SIGNAL (GREEN) 5/58R..................................................... RH REAR/SIDE LAMPS
6 ............................................................ TAIL LAMPS (BROWN) 6/54 ....................................................................... STOP LAMPS
7 .................................................... AUXILIARY POWER (BLUE) 7/58L ......................................................LH REAR/SIDE LAMPS

Page 95
 GENERAL OPERATION

Three Terminal Electrical Sockets

NOTE: The correct 3 pin plug to fit the sockets
can be obtained from your dealer.

1 1
2

A B

DP97A096A
3 2 3
LOCATED ON RIGHT SIDE
OF INSTRUMENT PANEL FRONT VIEW

A. NORTH AMERICA B. REST OF WORLD

1. POWER - THROUGH KEY SWITCH (134 RED CABLE)

2. POWER - DIRECT (164 RED CABLE)
3. GROUND (BROWN CABLE)

DP97C143

LOCATED ON RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE

TO REAR OF SEAT

Two auxiliary electrical power sockets are

provided inside the operators compartment for
connecting monitors, implement controllers, C.B.
radios, and other 12 volt equipment.

Page 96
 GENERAL OPERATION

IMPLEMENT CABLE ACCESS

Access is provided for implement cables in the To fit cables:
right hand corner of the rear window.
STEP 1

Open the rear window and remove the rubber

grommet by pulling upward.
1
STEP 2

Cut the grommet down (1) into the centre of the

circle area and then cut out the centre (2) to fit
the cable(s).
2
STEP 3

Fit the grommet over the cable(s) and install the

grommet and cable(s) into the slots in the cab.
DP97E391

STEP 4

Close the rear window.

There are also tapped holes provided in the cab

A, B and C posts, behind the plastic trim, for

GENERAL OPERATION
mounting an implement monitor.

For full installation instructions and replacement

grommets see you dealer.

Page 97
 GENERAL OPERATION

HOW TO TRANSPORT THE TRACTOR

Towing The Tractor B. Engine not Running

● On MFD tractors, remove the drive shaft
WARNING: Make sure that the weight of a to the front axle.
trailed vehicle that is not equipped with ● Add 15 litres (4 US gallons) of McCormick
brakes NEVER EXCEEDS the weight of HTX Transmission/Hydraulic oil to the
the tractor that is towing the vehicle or any transmission. After towing the tractor, drain
! national weight limitations which may excess fluid to bring the level in the
apply. Stopping distance increases with transmission to the FULL mark on the
increasing speed as the weight of the dipstick.
towed load increases, especially on hills
and slopes. M114B
IMPORTANT: When the engine is not running,
there is no power assistance to the steering.
STEP 1 Use extreme caution when towing with the
engine stopped.
Make sure all controls are in the neutral position
and the park brake is disengaged.
The tractor can be towed a maximum of 20 km (12
miles) at a maximum speed of 10 km/h (6 mph) if
STEP 2
the tractor has been operating within the past 48
Use a rigid tow bar and safety chains to pull the hours.
tractor. Attach the tow bar and safety chains to
the tractor side channels or the front support. IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the tractor,
IMPORTANT: Because of pressure lubrication follow the above procedures carefully when
requirements, special rules apply when the towing the tractor.
tractor engine is running or not running. Use
the following procedures as applicable. Transport by Truck or Rail
A. Engine Running When you transport the tractor by truck or rail, do
the following:
● Do not pull the tractor faster than 20 km/h
(12 mph). ● Put all the transmission control levers in
the NEUTRAL position.
● Disengage the mechanical front drive
(MFD) (if equipped). ● Engage the PARK brake.
● Disengage the differential lock. ● Tie the tractor down around the front and
rear axles with safety chains having a
● Make sure the range and speed levers
rating greater than the gross load of the
are in the neutral position.
tractor (refer to tractor P.l.N. plate).
NOTE: The engine must be running at 1200 rpm
IMPORTANT: DO NOT TIE CHAINS AROUND
or more. Check brake operation.
THE FRONT BALLAST WEIGHT SUPPORT
BRACKET TO HOLD THE TRACTOR DOWN.
● Install blocks/wedges to prevent the
wheels rolling.

Page 98
 FIELD OPERATION

TRANSMISSION CREEPER OPERATION

(If Equipped)

Transmission creeper speeds can be used for STEP 3

PTO type harvesting operations or other
applications where slower ground speeds are Move the speed lever and powershift switch, if
desired. applicable, to correct position to obtain required
speed,
IMPORTANT: Do not use creeper for operations
which require high drawbar pull. Select FORWARD or REVERSE.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT engage creeper while in 4th STEP 4

range, damage will occur to the transmission.
Disengage the park brake and slowly release the
To operate in creeper use the following clutch pedal. The tractor will start moving.
procedure.
Adjust engine speed to obtain the required travel
STEP 1 speed.

Using the correct starting procedure on page 63 STEP 5

start the engine.
Press and hold the clutch pedal down and then Change transmission gear/speed as required.
carry out Steps 2, 3. IMPORTANT: DO NOT engage creeper while in 4th
range, damage will occur to the transmission.
STEP 2
To disengage creeper:

STEP 6
Reduce the engine speed to low idle.
Press the clutch pedal fully down and move the
RANGE and Speed levers to the neutral position.

STEP 7
Move the Forward/Neutral/Reverse lever to the
neutral position.

FIELD OPERATION
Engage the park brake.

MD02H057

L
Engage creeper (snail symbol) using the RANGE
lever.

Page 99
 FIELD OPERATION

WHEEL SLIP INDICATOR

To read wheel slip the tractor must be equipped Wheel Slip Display
with a digital instrument cluster and a True
Ground Speed Sensor.

True Ground Speed Sensor

(If Equipped)
1

2 3
DS98K096
1
There are two methods of reading the wheel slip.
DP99J069

METHOD 1:
NOTE: Sensor manufacturer/type may vary to
that shown in photograph above.
The wheel slip bar graph (1) will indicate wheel slip
The sensor (1) will accurately determine the true anytime the tractor is in motion. The wheel slip bar
ground speed of the tractor. graph contains 15 segments. Each segment
represents 2 percent slip.
Precise application of chemicals and planting
inputs can be achieved with the Ground Speed The range of the bar graph is from zero percent (all
Sensor. This will reduce your input costs for segments OFF) to 30 percent (all segments ON).
planting, fertilizing and chemical application for
weed and pest control. METHOD 2:

You can also use the Ground Speed Sensor to To read wheel slip on the main digital display, press
determine the actual percentage of rear wheel both the DISTANCE FUNCTION SWITCH (2) and
slip under all operating conditions. This will allow the AREA FUNCTION SWITCH (3) at the same
you to maintain the recommended amount of time, for 2 seconds.
wheel slip for maximum productivity and
operating efficiency. The upper display will show the percentage of
wheel slip and the letter “P” for percent. The
WARNING: Do not look directly into the lower display will show the word “SLIP”.
face of the sensor. Micro-wave signals
! emitted by the sensor can cause eye To return to the normal RPM display, press and
damage. release the RPM switch .

NOTE: To provide accurate ground speed and

wheel slip, the correct tyre size radius must be
programmed into the instrument cluster.

IMPORTANT: Keep the face of the sensor clean.

Scrape mud off with a plastic scraper. DO NOT use
a metal scraper. Wash the face of the sensor with
soap and water or steam clean. DO NOT
disconnect the harness while cleaning.

Page 100
 FIELD OPERATION

Operating with Wheel Slip

DS99J086 DS99J087

The ideal wheel slip is between nine and sixteen Do not try to reduce wheel slippage to zero. Stay
percent. Inadequate traction and excessive wheel within the nine to sixteen percent wheel slip.
slip can waste up to thirty percent of the tractors
horsepower. If you add weight to the tractor to reduce wheel
slip to less than nine percent, the added weight
will consume more engine power due to the
increased rolling resistance caused by the tyres
sinking into the soil.

Add ballast weight only as necessary to maintain

the correct tractor weight distribution and the
recommended amount of wheel slip.

Wasted energy, increased fuel consumption,

decreased tyre life and loss of productivity are all
principle ingredients that can increase operating
cost.

See page 159 for more information on wheel slip

and correct ballasting etc.

FIELD OPERATION

Page 101
 FIELD OPERATION

REAR POWER TAKEOFF

See the Specifications Section in this manual for general specifications for the power takeoff on your
tractor.

When using power takeoff operated equipment the following rules MUST be followed:

1. On a tractor with a three point hitch, both lift links must be set as specified in the EQUIPMENT
OPERATORS MANUAL.

2. The check chains or stabilizers (as equipped) must be in the RIGID position to limit the lateral
movement of the equipment.

3. The Upper Limit for the hitch maximum lift must be set correctly, see page 116 for instruction on how
to adjust the lift height.

4. Always stop the engine before connecting an implement to the PTO shaft. This releases the tractor
PTO brake and allows the PTO shaft to be turned by hand so that the splines of the tractor and
implement PTO shafts can be aligned.

5. This tractor is equipped with a PTO brake which may be damaged by the continued rotation of high
inertia implements. To prevent damge to the PTO brake, only use implements with an Over-Run
mechanism to make sure that no implement rotation continues against the PTO brake when the PTO
has been switched OFF.

WARNING: This tractor is equipped with a 540, 750 or 1000 rpm PTO. Be sure the implements are
! matched to the tractor PTO SPEEDS. Lock the swinging drawbar in the centre position when using
the PTO.

WARNING: PTO driven implements may fail if operated over the rated speeds. Avoid injury. Limit rpm
! to 600 or less for 540 rpm PTO speed, 800 or less for 750 rpm PTO speed and 1100 or less for 1000
rpm PTO speed.

Page 102
 FIELD OPERATION

PTO Options 3. Shiftable PTO

A choice of PTO outputs are available to suit

market requirements. The options are:

1. Single Shaft PTO

DP97C039

There are 2 options for shiftable PTO:

A 6 spline lower shaft which rotates at either 540
rpm or 750 rpm.
DP97C041 OR
This PTO option has a 6 spline upper shaft only, A 6 spline lower shaft which rotates at either 540
which rotates at 540 rpm. rpm or 1000 rpm.
NOTE: PTO Safety Guard has been removed from
2. Dual Shaft PTO the previous photographs for photographic
purposes only.
DO NOT operate tractor PTO with PTO Safety
Guard removed.

Changing the PTO Speed on a

Shiftable Type PTO

NOTE: Make sure the drawbar is set in the correct

position if operating a drawbar pulled, PTO driven
implement; see page 83 for more information.

FIELD OPERATION
The shiftable PTO option has a lever (1) for
DP97C040
changing the speed on the right hand side
console. Move the lever to the right for 540 rpm
There are 2 options for Dual Shaft PTO:
or to the left for 750/1000 rpm as equipped.
A 6 spline upper shaft which rotates at 540 rpm
and a 21 spline lowershaft which rotates at 1000
rpm. 1
OR
Two 6 spline shafts. The upper shaft rotates at
540 rpm and the lowershaft rotates at 1000 rpm.

DD97C127
1. SHIFTABLE PTO LEVER

Page 103
 FIELD OPERATION

Operating the Electronic PTO STEP 2

System
The PTO is engaged by the clutch lever, located on
the right side console. The PTO is independent of
the transmission and can be operated anytime the
engine is operating. The tractor motion can be
started or stopped in any of the forward or reverse
speeds without affecting the speed of the power
takeoff shaft. Also, the power takeoff shaft can be
started or stopped without affecting the speed of
the tractor. To increase the service life of the PTO
clutch and brake, drive lines and PTO driven DI98K050
implements, use the following procedure to operate
If equipped with a digital display cluster do the
the PTO. The PTO clutch lever lets the operator
following. Push the ENGINE/PTO rpm button once
regulate the speed of clutch engagement so that a
to display the 540 rpm PTO speed. Push the button
smooth engagement can be obtained under all
again to display 1000 rpm speed.
conditions.
STEP 3
NOTE: The upper limit control should always be
used, see page 116 (item 8), when using the PTO. Adjust the engine rpm to obtain the desired PTO
speed. To display engine rpm, press the
ENGINE/PTO rpm button.
Engage the PTO as follows:

STEP 1 Disengage PTO as follows:

STEP 1
Reduce the engine rpm. Move the PTO clutch lever
fully rearward past the slot to the disengaged
position.
IMPORTANT: High-inertia implements do not
become stationary immediately when PTO is
disengaged. Allow sufficient time for implement to
“run down” to a halt before cleaning or adjusting.

STEP 2

DD97C124

Reduce the engine rpm.

Move the PTO clutch lever forward to the offset in
the slot for 3 seconds then fully forward to engage.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT hold the PTO clutch

lever in the intermediate position, the PTO
clutch will slip, overheat and will be damaged.
IMPORTANT: With the PTO engaged, if the engine
is stopped the PTO will disengage, but the lever will
remain in the ENGAGE position. The engine will DP97D178
NOT start until the lever is put in the DISENGAGE
When the PTO is not in use install the tubular
position which will activate the safety start switch.
shaft guard.

IMPORTANT: Do not operate without drive line

shields fitted. Make sure the tachometer is working.
Read the Operators Manual supplied with PTO
driven equipment.

Page 104
 FIELD OPERATION

PTO Operating Safety PTO Safety Guard

All tractors with a power take off have a large safety
WARNING: PTO driven machinery can guard (1) and a small tube type guard (2) for the
cause serious injury. Before working on or splined output shaft. To prevent injury to the
near the PTO shaft, or servicing or clearing operator, the tractor power take off safety guard
! the driven machine, put the PTO lever in and the shields for the telescopic shaft assembly
the DISENGAGE position and STOP the must be used. When possible raise the guard when
engine. connecting an implement and lower the guard to
horizontal when using the 3 point hitch and a non
driven PTO implement.
WARNING: When doing stationary PTO
work and dismounting from the tractor with
! the PTO running, keep clear of all moving
parts as they are a potential safety hazard.

For the safe operation of the PTO, follow these safe

1
operating practices.

● Hold the drawbar in the centre location on

the rear support with the retaining pins.
2
● The drawbar clevis (if equipped) must be
removed or mounted under the drawbar, to
prevent possible interference between the
clevis and the implement driveline.
DR98K082

● Connect the implement hitch to the drawbar TRACTOR EQUIPPED WITH DRAWBAR USED FOR
with a hardened steel pin. Make sure the pin ILLUSTRATION PURPOSES ONLY
is securely held in place with a cotter pin or
lock pin and does not make contact with the WARNING: Do not exceed the
implement driveline. recommended speeds of the driven
machine. Do not operate the PTO unless
● Connect the implement hitch to the tractor
the shaft and drive line shields are in
drawbar before connecting the implement
driveline to the power takeoff. ! position and the tachometer is working

FIELD OPERATION
correctly. Read and learn to understand
● Connect the implement driveline to the the Operators Manuals supplied with any
tractor. Check the driveline for correct PTO driven equipment which may be
length and for free telescopic movement. attached to the machine.
The correct length is important to prevent
the driveline from hitting bottom or from
separating in any tractor or implement WARNING: Whenever a PTO driven
operating position. machine is in operation, the PTO guards
must be in place for most operations to
● When working with the drawbar raise the 3 prevent injury to the operator or
Point Hitch as high as possible to prevent bystanders. Where attachments, such as
possible interference between the lower pumps, are installed on the PTO shaft
links and the implement. ! (especially if the tractor PTO guard is
moved upward or removed), extended
IMPORTANT: Follow the implement shielding equivalent to the PTO guard must
manufacturers recommendations in adjusting be installed with the attachment. Install the
and aligning the implement and the implement PTO guard to its original position
driveline with the tractor. immediately when the attachment is
removed.

Page 105
 FIELD OPERATION

FRONT POWER TAKEOFF OPERATION

(If Equipped)
The front power takeoff has a 6 spline output shaft STEP 3
which rotates at 1000 rpm. Engagement is actuated An indicator lamp in the switch will illuminate when
by a three position rocker switch (OFF, ON and the front power takeoff is engaged.
ENGAGED) situated on the RH side console. The
PTO shaft rotates counterclockwise, from front of IMPORTANT: PTO will not engage if engine is
tractor. started with the switch in the engage position.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT attach implements to the Move switch to disengage and then engage.
front PTO which need more than 90 kW (120 hp) to
operate. IMPORTANT: Never try to release dead locked
implements by repeated clutch engagement
IMPORTANT: When using implements which cause and disengagement. The front power takeoff
shock loads, ALWAYS have a slip clutch fitted clutch will slip and become damaged.
between the implement and the tractor PTO drive
shaft. Before using the implement check the slip Disengage The Front PTO As Follows:
clutch is working correctly and the implement is free
to run. STEP 1

IMPORTANT: When using implements which have Reduce the engine rpm.
fast moving parts eg. mowers, corn choppers or
STEP 2
snow blowers, ALWAYS install an Over-Run
mechanism to the implement drive shaft to prevent Push the bottom of the switch (1) down to the off
PTO failure. position, the indicator lamp in the switch will go out
when the front power takeoff is disengaged.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the PTO shaft on the
implement is not too long or the PTO will be STEP 3
damaged if the front hitch is raised to full
height. When the engine is switched off the front power
takeoff is automatically disengaged. The indicator
Engage The Front PTO As Follows: lamp in the switch will go out to indicate the front
PTO is disengaged.
STEP 1 STEP 4
Reduce the engine rpm.

STEP 2

MD01K006

2 HYDRAC PTO SHOWN

DP97C138
Always install the PTO shaft guard when the PTO
is not being used.
Press the front of the switch (1) down, push the
switch lock (2) (on the rear of the switch) forward IMPORTANT: High-inertia implements do not
and at the same time press the switch down again become stationary immediately when PTO is
and release. disengaged. Allow sufficient time for implement to
“run down” to a halt before cleaning or adjusting.

Page 106
 FIELD OPERATION

REAR THREE POINT HITCH PREPARATION

The three point hitch system gives position and draft control of soil engaging implements.

This tractor is fitted with Category ll links. The hitch can be converted to Category I with 3 reducer
bushings, one for each lower link and one for the top link, which are available from your dealer.

All tractors are equipped with either outside stabilizers or check chains and fixed or telescopic lower
links, depending upon market region.

IMPORTANT: Your tractor is equipped with a hitch that will accept all mounted Cat II implements conforming to
the following SAE-ASAE standard dimensions:

IMPLEMENT IDENTIFICATION DIMENSIONS

Category I Implement Category II Implement
Diameter of hitch pins 22.3 mm ( 7/8 in) 28.6 mm (1 1/8 in)
(OPTIONAL BUSHINGS) (FACTORY FIT)
Distance between shoulders of
682.6 mm (26 7/8 in) 819 mm (26 7/8 in)
hitch pin
Gap in top of implement mast 44.5 mm (1 3/4 in) 52.4 mm (2 1/16 in)
Diameter of holes in top of
19 mm ( 3/4 in) 25.4 mm (1 in)
implement mast

WARNING: Extreme care must be exercised when adjusting and checking

the hitch and control linkage when the engine is running and when linkage
! is under hydraulic or mechanical load. Study the linkage and hitch travel,
keep hands, arms, legs and feet out of the travel arc of the hitch and
linkage. Make sure that no persons are in the danger area.

NOTE: When using the three point hitch ensure there is sufficient clearance between the rear tyres
and the lower links by adjusting the stabilizers and/or tread positions, see page 108, 155 and 157
for more information.

FIELD OPERATION

Page 107
 FIELD OPERATION

Top and Lower Links Adjustment

The top and lower links must be adjusted NOTE: Be sure to place the turnbuckle locks in
correctly so that the implement can work at the their locked position after adjusting the lower links.
required depth and that the lower links are free to
move up and down with the shape of the ground.
Top Link Adjustment
NOTE: Make sure tyre pressures, wheel
equipment and blasting are correct before Make sure that the length of the top link is
making hitch adjustments. See TYRE adjusted correctly. See the implement Operators
PRESSURES AND LOAD CAPACITIES on Manual for the correct length.
Page 139 of this manual. and See TRACTOR IMPORTANT: Top link sensing will not operate
BALLAST on Page 159 of this manual. correctly if the top link is connected to the slotted
IMPORTANT: After making any adjustments, hole on an implement.
carefully raise the implement to make sure
there is clearance between the tractor and
implement.

Lower Link Adjustment

STEP 1
Put the tractor on a hard level surface and lower
the hitch to the lowest position.
STEP 2

DP98D180

1 To adjust the length of the top link, Use the

adjusting handle to adjust the length of the top link.
Turn the handle counterclockwise to shorten the
link or clockwise to lengthen the link. As seen
from behind the tractor looking forward.
NOTE: To obtain maximum length adjustment
and strength, the thread length on the ends of
the turnbuckle must be equal.
DP97E197

Lift the turnbuckle lock (1) , approximately 30 mm IMPORTANT: After making final adjustments,
(or 1 in) to release. carefully raise the implement to make sure there is
clearance between the tractor and implement.
STEP 3

DP98D181
DP97E198

Turn the turnbuckle lock clockwise to lower and When the top link is not being used, store the link
counterclockwise to raise. in the retaining clip (1) provided.

Page 108
 FIELD OPERATION

Top Link Installation

Top Mounting Hole Bottom Mounting Hole
The top mounting hole is designed for dedicated
Cat II top links which are provided on equipment
such as hedge cutters and post hole borers.

DP99J055
2
The bottom mounting hole (5) is designed for the
special swivel type top link supplied with the
DP99J055 tractor. Top link sensing is active through the
To install the dedicated top link remove the ‘R’ bottom mounting hole.
clip (1) from the top link pin (2). Remove the link
IMPORTANT: Top link sensing will not operate
pin (2) and the existing top link from the tractor.
correctly if the top link is connected to the
slotted hole on an implement.

FIELD OPERATION
DP99J054

The yoke (3) will remain installed onto the lower

pin.
Install the dedicated top link into the top
mounting hole (4).
IMPORTANT: Top link sensing will not operate
when the dedicated top link is installed in the
top mounting hole

Page 109
 FIELD OPERATION

Stabilizer Operation (If Equipped)

Stabilizers are all steel telescoping channels Sway Operation
which are provided to prevent the lower links
from contacting the tires. The stabilizers are set
to a nominal length during manufacture but may
require adjustment to accommodate certain types
of equipment and tread position.

Rigid Operation
B
A

1
DP97D107
2 Position the stabilizers in the lower hole (B) of the
mounting bracket. This will provide 127 mm (5
inches) of sway with the hitch lowered and rigid
when the hitch is raised.
3
After adjustment, operate the three point hitch,
DP97D108 ensuring that maximum lift is not restricted by the
STEP 1 stabilizers.
Position the stabilizers in the upper hole (A) of the
mounting bracket. Remove the sway limiter pin (1) WARNING: When adjusting the stabilizers
and attach the implement to the hitch. with an implement attached, keep all body
! parts out of the area between the three
point linkage and rear tires. Failure to do so
STEP 2
may result in serious injury.
Adjust the stabilizer turnbuckle (2) so that the sway
limiter pin hole in the stabilizer rod (3) aligns with
the rear end of the slot in the turnbuckle (2). This
hole will be vertical.

IMPORTANT: The stabilizer is fitted with a stop pin

to prevent the turnbuckle being adjusted too far. If
the turnbuckle becomes tight to adjust and is forced
past the stop pin, the threads will de damaged.
Keep the threads clean and make sure that the
turnbuckle turns easily.

STEP 3
Install the sway limiter pin (1) through the
turnbuckle and stabilizer rod.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT operate the tractor with the

sway limiter pin removed. If the tractor is operated
with the sway limiter pin removed damage to the
tractor could result.

After adjustment, operate the three point hitch,

ensuring that maximum lift is not restricted by the
stabilizers.

Page 110
 FIELD OPERATION

Check Chains (If Equipped)

Check Chains are provided to prevent the lower STEP 4
links from contacting the tires. Operate the three point hitch, ensuring that
The check chains are set to a nominal length maximum lift is not restricted by the check
during manufacture but may require adjustment chains.
to accommodate certain types of equipment and
tread position.
If chain lengths have been temporarily changed, Rigid and Sway Operation
adjust them as follows: The check chain front mounting brackets are
bolted to the axle cases and have 4 holes.
STEP 1
The check chain front bracket MUST ONLY be
fastened to the lower 2 holes.
Which holes are used depends if rigid or lateral
sway is needed for work. If RIGID operation is
required through the whole lift range attach the
check chain front bracket into hole 1. If SWAY
operation is required with the lift arms lowered
attach the check chain front bracket into hole 2.
After adjustment, operate the three point hitch,
ensuring that maximum lift is not restricted by the
check chains.

DP97E415

Install a plow cross-shaft or three point linkage

drawbar between the lower links.

STEP 2

1
2

FIELD OPERATION
1
2
OM1418A

1. LOWER HITCH POINT - RIGID

2. LOWER HITCH POINT - SWAY

IMPORTANT: When using position 2 adjust the

DP97C108 check chains to eliminate sway when the
Looking forward from the rear of the tractor, turn implement is fully raised. Incorrect adjustment
the adjusting handle (1) counterclockwise to can result in breakage of the check chains or
lengthen the chain. Turn the adjusting handle brackets when the lift arms are raised.
clockwise to shorten.

STEP 3
After adjustment tighten the locknut (2) to
prevent any change in the setting.

Page 111
 FIELD OPERATION

Claw End Lower Links Telescoping Lower Links

(If Equipped) (If Equipped)

DP97D106 D12803

Connecting an Implement Pull the latch handle up and pull the end of the
lower link out.
Reverse the tractor until the claw ends of the
lower links are aligned under the connecting Connect the extended lower links to the
points of the implement. implement.

Raise the lower links until the claws engage and The lower links will retract and lock in place when
the latches (1) lock. the tractor is moved rearward.

The spring spacer between the lower links will IMPORTANT: Make sure that the lower links
give the Cat III width setting. are fully retracted and locked in place before
operating the tractor.
Disconnecting an Implement

Lower the implement to the ground. Pull the

remote release rope (if equipped) to release the
claw end latches and lower the lower links until
clear of the implement.

Lift the top link off the implement upper

connecting point and store in the bracket
provided.

Move the tractor forward away from the

implement.

Page 112
 FIELD OPERATION

Lower Link Flotation

IMPORTANT: Check the implement Operators
Manual to see if mechanical flotation can be
used.

One or both lower links can be set to float

approximately 38 mm (1.5 in). Float is used
when operating in variable field surface
conditions allowing the implement to follow the
surface conditions.

Float is also used when the mounted implement

width is more than the wheel track of the tractor.

DP97D106

For FLOAT operation, the heads of the pins and

the washers must be aligned with the lift rods as
shown.

DP97D105

For RIDGID operation with no up or down

movement, the heads of the pins and the
washers must be across the lift rods as shown.

FIELD OPERATION

Page 113
 FIELD OPERATION

REAR THREE POINT HITCH OPERATION

Electronic Hitch System

The electronic hitch system consists of the operators control panel, the control module, two load pin sensors,
the hitch hydraulic control valve, the hitch position feedback sensor and wiring harnesses.

The Electronic Hitch System can be operated in one of two modes: 1) POSITION CONTROL and 2) LOAD
CONTROL. In position control the hitch moves with the rotation of the position control knob. In load control the
Electronic Hitch System moves the hitch to maintain a constant implement load on the tractor in changing soil
conditions and terrain.
The operator controls for the Electronic Hitch Control system consists of an amber indicator lamp, rocker
switch, diagnostic display and 6 control knobs.

1. INDICATOR LAMP 2. UP/DOWN SWITCH

MD02E057 MD02E056

This lamp is used to indicate the condition of the This switch is used to fully raise or lower the hitch.
ELECTRONIC HITCH SYSTEM. It will stay ON It has 3 working positions: UP, DOWN, and
for 2 seconds after the engine has started for a MOMENTARY.
bulb check. The indicator has 2 functions: UP - The back or left of the switch pushed down.
A. FLASHING - The hitch needs to be enabled. This fully raises the hitch from the working posi-
The actual position of the hitch is not the tion to the transport position (controlled by the
same as the s etting of the UP/DO WN UPPER LIMIT STOP). The speed is not adjusta-
SWITCH or the POSITION CONTROL knob. ble.
DOWN - The switch is in the centre position.
To enable the hitch system: Set the UP/ This lowers the hitch from the transport position
DOWN switch to DOWN. Rotate the to full down (working position) or the position
POSITION CONTROL knob until the set with the Position Control Knob. The speed
control and the actual position of the hitch is controlled by the DROP SPEED CONTROL.
are the same. When the indicator lamp
stops flashing the hitch system is enabled. MOMENTARY - Double click and hold the switch
The hitch will follow the movement of the by pushing the front or right of the switch into the
POSITION CONTROL knob, when the hitch MOMENTARY position. This will by-pass the
UP/DOWN switch is in the DOWN position. DROP SPEED CONTROL setting allowing the
hitch to drop at maximum speed. As long as the
B. CONTINUOUSLY ON - Look for the momentary switch is held, the hitch will continue to
diagnostic code showing in the Diagnostic drop and will by-pass the “Bottom” setting. When
Di s pl ay, u nde r the c o v er on t he r i gh t the momentary switch is released, the hitch will
console. See Electronic Hitch Diagnostic automatically return to the “Bottom” setting. This
Codes page 121 in this manual for how to function is only active when the position control is
proceed. set in the bottom half of its range.

Page 114
 FIELD OPERATION

3. POSITION CONTROL 4. LOAD CONTROL

3
4

MD02E056 DD97C118

The control consists of an inner knob and an This knob is used to set the load on the tractor or
outer ring. This control is used to; implement depth. Turn the knob clockwise to
increase the load and implement depth. Turn the
A. Enable the Hitch System,
knob counter-clockwise to reduce the load and
B. Set a “Bottom” limit, implement depth.
C. Give precise control of the position of the
hitch, IMPORTANT: The knob MUST be turned fully
D. Provide Hitch transport lock clockwise to the (O) off position to set the
Electronic Hitch System in the POSITION
OUTER RING - This is an adjustable mechanical CONTROL MODE.
stop for the inner knob. The setting can be The (O) position is used to prevent unwanted
bypassed with the push-button on the inner knob. hitch movement at light load or no hitch load,
when the tractor is moving at more than 0.8
INNER KNOB - Used to precisely control the km/h (0.5 mph).
position of the hitch. Turning the knob clockwise
will raise the hitch or counterclockwise will lower IMPORTANT: The tractor must be moving in
the hitch. order for the LOAD CONTROL to be
Press the PUSH-BUTTON in on the side of the functional. Adjusting the LOAD CONTROL
knob, to bypass the “Bottom” limit without knob to the lighter load settings of 1 to 5

FIELD OPERATION
changing the setting on the Outer Ring. The while the tractor is stationary, may result in
PUSH -BUTTON is also used when the knob is significant hitch movement when the
turned fully clockwise to lock the knob in the tractor moves again.
TRANSPORT position.

Page 115
 FIELD OPERATION

6 7 8

MP01C050

5. HITCH RESPONSE CONTROL KNOB (If 8. UPPER LIMIT CONTROL

Equipped) - This knob is used to set the speed This knob is used to adjust the maximum trans-
at which the hitch is allowed to raise and lower port height of the hitch. It limits the transport
while in LOAD control. Turn the knob clockwise height when using either the UP/DOWN
to increase the speed at which the hitch will SWITCH or POSITION CONTROL knob. A set-
move in response to a change in load. Turn the ting of “1” allows the hitch to raise only half the
knob counterclockwise to reduce the speed at way, while a setting of “11” allows full transport
which the hitch will move in response to a height to be reached. This control can be used to
change in load. limit hitch height with fully-mounted PTO driven
implements where the angle of the Implement In-
NOTE: Too slow a setting may limit the ability put Driveline (IID) joints need to be limited to pre-
of the hitch to follow the contours of the soil. vent noise, chatter and damage due to
excessive angles. Turning the knob clockwise in-
6. DROP SPEED CONTROL creases the transport height. Turning the knob
This knob is used to adjust the lowering speed of counterclockwise decreases the transport
the hitch when using either the UP/DOWN height.
SWITCH or the POSITION CONTROL knob. Set
IMPORTANT: When using the Automatic Hitch the
the DROP SPEED to fast (fully clockwise) for
UPPER LIMIT STOP MUST ALWAYS be rotated
light weight implements, and slow (fully
fully clockwise to the stop position (position “11”).
counterclockwise) for heavy implements such as
ploughs. This control can be over-ridden by
double clicking and holding the UP/DOWN
SWITCH in the MOMENTARY position.

7. TRAVEL CONTROL
This knob is used to adjust the amount of hitch
movement (depth variation) allowed in the LOAD
CONTROL MODE. Turning the knob clockwise
will increase the hitch movement. This allows
closer control of the load on the tractor and ena-
bles the hitch to follow soil contours better. Turn-
ing the knob counterclockwise will decrease the
amount of hitch movement. Set the control in the
lower range when using semi-mounted imple-
ments or on flat terrain where the amount of hitch
movement can be restricted without affecting
performance.

Page 116
 FIELD OPERATION

Operation of External Hitch When the switches are released, the hitch will
stop at the selected position until the hitch
Switches (If Equipped) controls on the right hand side console are used.
The hitch will have to be enabled with the
The external switches for the 3 point hitch can be position control knob after each use of the
used to raise or lower the hitch from outside the remote switches. To enable the hitch, see
tractor. Operator controls on page 114.
If both switches are pressed together the hitch
This can be useful for making small adjustments will stop. When the switches are released, the
when connecting implements to the 3 point hitch. system will reset in approximately one (1)
second. The hitch switches can be used in the
Always operate the remote switches according to normal manner.
the following procedure:

STEP 1 WARNING: Watch for possible pinch

! points between the implement and tractor
when the hitch is moved.

WARNING: Stand well clear of the linkage

or implement when operating the external
! controls or injury can result from contact
with moving parts.

DR98J150
XTRASHIFT TRACTOR SHOWN

Keeping the engine running, Move the FORWARD/

NEUTRAL/REVERSE lever to the NEUTRAL
position. Engage the park brake.

STEP 2

FIELD OPERATION
1

MD01K002

Press the top switch (1) to raise the hitch. Press the
bottom switch (2) to lower the hitch.

Page 117
 FIELD OPERATION

Operating in Position Control STEP 3

The tractor and implement must be operated in

the field to select the correct position of the hitch.
Do the following steps: 4
STEP 1

DP97C141

Set the UP/DOWN switch (3) in the DOWN

position. If the enable or reset lamp (4) on the
switch flashes, move the hitch POSITION
CONTROL KNOB to match the actual hitch
position.
DD97C119

Before moving the tractor, set the POSITION STEP 4

CONTROL KNOB to the transport lock position,
fully clockwise and turn the load control knob fully
clockwise to the (O) off position.

STEP 2 2

1 2

DP96N112

Adjust the UPPER LIMIT CONTROL (2) to set the

desired hitch raised position. A setting of “11”
corresponds to the hitch being fully up.

DP96N112 STEP 5

Set the DROP SPEED CONTROL (1) to setting 6.

Set the UPPER LIMIT CONTROL (2) to setting 1.

DP96N112

Adjust the DROP SPEED CONTROL (1) until the

implement lowers at the speed desired.

Page 118
 FIELD OPERATION

STEP 6 STEP 7

DD97C119 DP97C141

Operate the tractor and implement in the field. Use the UP position to temporarily raise the
Set the implement depth with the POSITION implement without changing any of the hitch
CONTROL KNOB. The rate of hitch movement is position adjustments.
determined by the amount the knob is moved. If Use the DOWN position to return the implement
the knob is moved slowly a precision control to its original position.
mode is provided to move the hitch slowly to
match the knob. IMPORTANT: Always use the Hitch position
control knob to raise the hitch for road
IMPORTANT: Turn the LOAD CONTROL knob transport with three point linkage mounted
fully clockwise to the (0) OFF position, this will equipment. Put the control knob in the
prevent unwanted hitch movement when the transport lock position and the up/down switch
tractor is moving at more than 0.8 km/h (0.5 in the up position.
mph).
If the position control knob is moved quickly the
hitch will lower at the set drop rate. Move the
outer ring to set “Bottom“ or lowest hitch position
desired. This will provide a reference point for
returning the knob to the original implement
height position each time the knob is moved and
also to maintain the same height.

FIELD OPERATION

Page 119
 FIELD OPERATION

Operating in Load Control STEP 2

The electronic hitch system will automatically

adjust the hitch position to maintain a constant
implement load on the tractor as the implement
travels through varying soil conditions and 3
terrain. If an implement travels through heavy soil
the increased load is sensed at the lower link and
the hitch will raise the implement in small
increments to maintain a constant load on the
tractor. As the implement travels through lighter
soil conditions the lower link will sense the load
decrease and lower the implement in small
increments while maintaining a constant load on
the tractor. DP97C145

IMPORTANT: The tractor must be moving at a Turn the TRAVEL CONTROL knob (3)
speed of more than 0.8 km/h (0.5 mph) for the load counterclockwise to reduce and clockwise to
controls to function. Adjusting the LOAD increase the changes in working depth with
CONTROL knob to the lighter load settings of changing loads.
1 to 5 while the tractor is stationary, may
NOTE: A typical operation for a fully mounted
result in significant hitch movement when the
implement is a setting of “7” to “10” and a
tractor moves again.
setting of “3” to “5” for a semi-mounted
NOTE: If the implement has gauge wheels, implement.
move the Hitch Position Control Knob fully
counterclockwise before carrying out the STEP 3
following procedure.

STEP 1
4

2 DP97C145

Use the HITCH RESPONSE SPEED CONTROL

(If Equipped) to adjust the speed at which the
DP97C141 hitch will move in response to changing soil and
load conditions. Turn the control knob (4)
Turn the LOAD CONTROL Knob (1) counterclockwise to slow the hitch speed. Turn
counterclockwise to decrease the load setting the control knob clockwise to speed up the hitch
until the hitch begins to raise. speed.
NOTE: The load control is OFF at the (0)
position and the hitch will operate in the NOTE: If the hitch response speed control
position control mode. setting is adjusted too fast, it will cause rapid
changes in implement operating depth and
Move the hitch POSITON CONTROL knob (2) rapidly changing loads on the tractor. If the
fully counterclockwise. setting is too slow, the implement may not
NOTE: In fields with intermittent hard and soft follow the terrain properly.
soil conditions, a “Bottom” depth may be set by
moving the Hitch Position Control knob to the
desired maximum implement operating depth.

Page 120
 FIELD OPERATION

Rear Three Point Hitch Diagnostic If the hitch fails to function properly check the
diagnostic code and then report the error code
Display and your hitch malfunction to your dealer.

In all cases, before attempting to repair an error,

restart the tractor and observe if the error code is
repeated. The error code may have been caused
1 by the way the tractor was operated and the error
code will be cleared upon start-up.

The above UPPER LIMIT error

code, (as shown opposite)
occurs when starting the
tractor and the actual hitch
position is above the UPPER
LIMIT setting. This error code
DP97C145 DI96N139
can be cleared by the operator
by doing one of the following:
The Hitch Diagnostic display
(1) tells the operator the A. Press and hold MOMENTARY position on
condition of the electronic load the hitch UP/DOWN switch until the UPPER
control system by a diagnostic LIMIT setting is reached.
code.
B. Adjust the UPPER LIMIT control knob
DI95K036 clockwise until the hitch position is
matched.
When power is applied to the electronic load
control system, the figure “8” is displayed for 1 to C. Press and hold the LOWER position on the
2 seconds for a display check. If any segment of Hitch Remote switch until the UPPER LIMIT
the display is not illuminated, see your dealer. setting is reached.

Make sure the UPPER LIMIT is set to the desired

position after the error code is cleared.
Hitch Diagnostic Codes
The “0” code indicates
Hitch Control Bypass

FIELD OPERATION
SYSTEMS NORMAL

SYSTEMS NORMAL means If the hitch should fail to operate properly and
that the electrical and there is a need to raise or lower the hitch in order
electronic parts of the hitch to travel home, the hitch controls can be
system are functioning overridden by the UP/DOWN SWITCH.
DI95K037
normally.
To lower the hitch, move the UP/DOWN SWITCH
to the “Momentary” position and hold. Hitch will
This display does not tell the operator if the drop for 1.5 seconds. Repeat the sequence until
controls are not adjusted correctly or if there is the hitch is in the required position.
an hydraulic problem. If the display code is “0”
and the hitch performance is reduced from what To raise the hitch, start with the UP/DOWN
it had been, contact your dealer. SWITCH in the “Down” position, then move the
switch to the “Up” and then to the “Down”
NOTE: The DOT after the zero indicates that
position. The hitch will move up for 1.5 seconds.
the tractor is not moving. When the tractor
Repeat the sequence until the hitch is in the
moves a minimum of 0.8 km/h (0.5 mph) the
required position.
DOT should disappear. If the Dot does not
disappear, contact your dealer.
NOTE: If your tractor is equipped with rear
fender mounted remote hitch switches. They
can also be used to raise and lower the hitch.

Page 121
 FIELD OPERATION

RIDE CONTROL (If Equipped)

Ride control improves the tractor ride quality when Ride Control ON
carrying fully mounted hitch implements. It reduces
the fore/aft pitch motion introduced to the tractor by STEP 1
the free hanging mounted implement at high travel
speeds and reduces front tyre bounce introduced to
the tractor by bumps or pot holes in the field as well
as on the road.

DS98K260
1
Push the Ride Control switch to the ON position.

STEP 2

Push the hitch UP/DOWN switch (2) into the UP

position. As soon as the tractor travel speed
exceeds 0.8 km/h (0.5 mph) the implement
automatically will be lowered slightly (to a
‘neutral’ position) and Ride Control is enabled.
DR99D002
The hitch will automatically raise or lower in
IMPORTANT: After attaching an implement to the response to a bump and then return to its
three point hitch and before using the Ride Control ‘neutral’ position, to maintain optimum ride
feature there MUST be a minimum clearance of control performance at all times.
380 mm (15 in) between the lowest point of the
implement and the ground. The measurement has
to be taken with the tractor stationary and the Upper Limit Setting Override
implement at the maximum height. If the ground
clearance is less than 380 mm (15 in) Ride Control This position can be used to raise the hitch above
MUST be DISABLED by pushing the Ride Control the upper limit setting until the hitch stops upward
Switch (1) into the OFF position. movement.

NOTE: If the Ride Control feature is not wanted, it Tractors equipped with Auto Hitch:
can be disabled by your dealer. The Ride Control switch in this position will take
the load off the hitch locking latches thus
improving the latching/unlatching of the auto
Ride Control OFF hitch.

DS98K261
DS98K259
Ride Control will be disabled if:
Press and hold the Ride Control Switch in the
A. The switch is in the OFF position.
fully forward position until the hitch stops upward
B. The hitch UP/DOWN switch is in the down movement. See page 88 for full Auto Hitch
position. operating instructions.
C. The travel speed is below 0.8 km/h (0.5
mph).

Page 122
 FIELD OPERATION

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL

Your tractor is equipped with a differential lock that
will make both rear wheels turn at the same speed. WARNING: Do not drive on roads, or at
high speed anywhere, with the differential
The differential lock prevents loss of motion when lock engaged. Difficult steering will occur,
the traction to the rear wheels is not equal. It also ! and can result in an accident. In field
operation, use the differential lock for
provides a straight line steering aid when opening
up the field and to control implement overlap. The traction improvement, but release for
differential lock can ONLY be engaged manually. turning at row ends.

It also provides a straight line steering aid when

To Disengage The Differential Lock:
opening up the field and to control implement
overlap. Push the bottom of the switch fully down.
The differential lock will disengage if one or both
When the traction of one rear wheel decreases,
brake pedals are pushed.
or any time you need more traction, engage the
differential lock. Before engaging the differential
IMPORTANT: When you engage or disengage
lock always make sure the tractor is stationary.
the differential lock, the front wheels must be
in the straight forward position. Disengage the
To Engage The Differential Lock: differential lock before turning the tractor.

FIELD OPERATION
MD02E056

Push the top of the switch (1) fully down.

DI96F063

The differential lock indicator light (2) on the

instrument cluster will illuminate any time the
differential lock is engaged.

Page 123
 FIELD OPERATION

MECHANICAL FRONT DRIVE (MFD) OPERATION

The MFD can be engaged while the tractor is Manual Mode
moving or stopped. The MFD provides additional
traction and pulling power when engaged.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT leave the MFD engaged

when travelling faster than 16 km/h (10 mph)
(except when in the field) as this can cause
damage to the MFD and other transmission
components as well as premature tyre wear.

WARNING: On electrically operated MFD

tractors, the MFD clutch is spring loaded
into engagement and relies on hydraulic DS98K259

pressure for disengagement. A failure in

the MFD hydraulic system will therefore To engage MFD, push the top of the MFD switch
automatically engage the MFD even to the ON (I) position.
though the MFD switch is in the
disengaged position. This is a built in
! safety feature. DO NOT operate MFD 2
tractor transmissions with the rear wheels
off the ground or removed, UNLESS THE
FRONT WHEELS ARE ALSO JACKED UP
CLEAR OF THE GROUND OR THE
FRONT AXLE DRIVE SHAFT IS
DISCONNECTED. Failure to do this can
result in the tractor being pulled off the rear
supports by the front axle.
DI96F063

The MFD indicator light (2) on the instrument

cluster will illuminate.

MD02E056 DS98K260

The MFD switch (1) has three positions: To disengage MFD push the MFD switch to the
center position OFF (O), (as shown).
I = ON, MANUAL
The indicator light in on the instrument cluster will
O = OFF go off.
AUTO = AUTOMATIC MODE

Page 124
 FIELD OPERATION

Automatic Mode MFD Assisted Stops

The Automatic MFD engagement or
disengagement is determined by the brake MFD will engage whenever both brake pedals
application. are applied together, no matter what position the
MFD switch is in giving 4 wheel braking. This
feature allows a safer and controlled stop.

DS98K261

When the MFD switch is in the Automatic (AUTO)

position (press the bottom of the MFD switch
down) and the automatic function is active the DD98D211

indicator light on the instrument cluster will

illuminate. When both brake pedals are applied together the
MFD indicator lamp on the instrument cluster will
Operation in automatic mode illuminate.

The MFD will disengage when the brake pedals

are unlocked and one of the brake pedals is
applied and held down. The MFD will reengage
when the brake pedal is released.

FIELD OPERATION

Page 125
 FIELD OPERATION

FRONT HITCH (If Equipped)

Two alternative Front Hitch may be fitted on the CX Series Tractors - Kitchin or Hydrac. Each option is
fitted depending upon market. The following pages explain the correct operation of both hitches. Refer to
the left-hand photograph directly below the "Hitch System" heading to establish which hitch is fitted to
your tractor.

Hitch Preparation (Option A - Kitchin Hitch)

Hitch System Top Link Stored Position

DH97N004

When not being used store the top link as shown in

DH97N053 the photograph.
The front hitch system is operated through a
(single acting) first remote hydraulic valve circuit. Lower Links Stored Position

NOTE: The linkage is power lifted and weight

lowered. The linkage is free to float upward on
partial stroke.

The hitch is designed for Category II implements

only. Lower links are rigidly mounted with no
1
lateral movement.
The lower links have claw ends and the top link a
1
ball end. The top link can be adjusted for length
and has a rigid or float position.

Lift Capacity .................................2359 kg (5200 lb)

DH97N053

When the front hitch is not being used, store the

lower links as shown in the photograph. Insert the
storage retaining pins (1) and linch pins
accordingly.

Page 126
 FIELD OPERATION

Lower Link Adjustments Top Link Adjustments

DH97N054 DH97N058
RIGID POSITION RIGID POSITION

For operation with no vertical movement (Float), Put the locking pin in the rear hole (1).
install the storage retaining pins in the front hole
(1).
4

2
3
2

DH97N059
FLOAT POSITION
DH97N055
Put the locking pin in the front hole (2).

FIELD OPERATION
FLOAT POSITION
For fine adjustment of length, turn the locking
For operation with vertical float, install the
plate (3) counterclockwise to release, then turn
storage retaining pins in the rear hole (2).
link body (4) to lengthen or shorten the link. Turn
the locking plate clockwise to lock.

Page 127
 FIELD OPERATION

Hitch Preparation (Option B - Hydrac Hitch)

Hitch System Top Link Stored Position

MD01K012 MD01J033

The front hitch system is operated through a When not being used store the top link as shown in
(double acting) first remote hydraulic valve the photograph.
circuit.
Lower Links Stored Position
NOTE: The linkage is power lifted and power
lowered. The linkage is free to float upward on When the front hitch is not being used, store the
partial stroke. lower links.

The hitch is designed for Category II implements

only. Lower links are rigidly mounted with no
lateral movement.
The lower links have claw ends and the top link a
ball end. The top link can be adjusted for length
and has a rigid or float position.

Lift Capacity .................................3000 kg (6614 lb)

MD01K053

Insert the storage retaining pins (1) and ’R’ clips as

shown.

Page 128
 FIELD OPERATION

Lower Link Adjustments Hitch Operation

(Both Hitch Options)
STEP 1

1
MD01K010
RIGID POSITION

For operation with no vertical movement (float),

install the storage retaining pins in the front hole (1). MD01K010

Lower the lower links and set for Rigid or Float

application, as required.

STEP 2

MD01K009
FLOAT POSITION

For operation with vertical float, install the

storage retaining pins in the rear hole (2).

FIELD OPERATION
DD97C117
Top Link Adjustments
Move the number 1 remote lever rearward to raise
the linkage or forward to lower.
3

MD01K008

For fine adjustment of length, turn the locking

plate (3) counterclockwise to release, then turn
link body using adjustment handle (4) to lengthen
or shorten the top link as required. Turn the
locking plate clockwise to lock.

Page 129
 FIELD OPERATION

REMOTE HYDRAULIC VALVES

The remote hydraulic control levers operate the Connecting Remote Hoses
corresponding remote, e.g.; lever 1 controls
remote valve 1, lever 2 controls remote valve 2
etc.

DP98D182

The tractor remote valve couplers are Numbered

1 1, 2 and 3 (as equipped) from the bottom upward,
and are operated by the corresponding remote
MD02E055 control levers/switch on the right hand console.
IMPORTANT: If your tractor is operated with a To connect do the following:
loader, tipping trailer or other equipment using a
hydraulic supply from the tractor, it MAY be STEP 1
necessary to add upto a further 20 litres of
McCormick HTX to the transmission to maintain an
effective oil flow in the hydraulic system. Always
check the transmission fluid level after charging
cylinders of implements and attachments. Top up
as required to ensure correct transmission oil level.
Never operate the tractor under load if the fluid
level is low.
The addition of extra oil may cause the
transmission to run at a higher temperature,
especially if the tractor is involved in road
work at maximum speed.

DP98D183

Remove the dust cap. Clean the implement male

coupler before connecting. Connect the
implement to the remote couplers so that the
implement lowers when the control lever is
pushed forward and raises when the control lever
is pulled rearward.

The couplers on the left are to raise the

implement, the couplers on the right are to lower
the implement, as seen looking at the rear of the
tractor. Change the hoses over if the implement
works in the opposite way.

The implement couplers can be connected or

disconnected with the tractor or implement
hydraulic system under pressure.

Page 130
 FIELD OPERATION

STEP 2
To connect the hose to the remote coupler, Push
the male coupler into the female coupler.
IMPORTANT: All implements must be fitted with
shrouded couplers, which are available from your
dealer. If an implement is not fitted with shrouded
couplers there will be restricted oil flow through the
couplers resulting in inefficient machine operation,
especially where high flow rates are required.
2
STEP 3
To equalize the pressure in the hydraulic lines DP98D184
move the control lever on the side console
forward and rearward. Drain the reservoir (2) at regular intervals.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT pour the reservoir contents
IMPORTANT: When connecting the implement back into the hydraulic system. Dispose of contents
hose to the tractor, make sure there is enough in accordance with local regulations. DO NOT drain
hydraulic hose to permit the tractor to turn in both the contents on the ground or into a drain. Be
directions. responsible for the environment.

Disconnecting Hoses and Hose Couplers

Implements The tractor is equipped with ISO 5675 Standard
Female couplings. These couplings will fit
To reduce the possibility of oil leakage when standard male hose couplers made to ASAE
disconnecting the couplers run the engine and S366, SAE J1036 or ISO Standard 5675.Your
move the remote lever fully forward to the float dealer can supply the correct male coupler or
position. Leaving the lever in the float position hose fittings or adapters to connect different
stop the engine and disconnect the hoses from combinations of implements to the standard male
the couplers. coupler.

To disconnect the coupler, just pull. Clean the

coupler dust cap and install. PART NUMBER 1272399C2
(7/8-14 INCH UNF THREADS)

FIELD OPERATION
OR
Remote Couplers Spillage Collector PART NUMBER 1272770C2
(1/2-14 INCH NPTF THREADS)
(If Equipped)
OR
PART NUMBER 1285718C2
(3/4-16 INCH UNF THREADS)

WARNING: Hydraulic fluid escaping under

1 pressure can have enough force to penetrate
the skin. Hydraulic fluid may also infect a minor
cut or opening in the skin. If injured by
escaping fluid, see a doctor at once.
Serious infection or reaction can result if
medical treatment is not given immediately.
! Make sure all connections are tight and that
hoses and lines are in good condition before
DP97D111 applying pressure to the system. Release all
pressure before disconnecting the lines or
The spillage collectors (1) allow the couplers to performing other work on the hydraulic system.
be connected or disconnected and any spillage To find a leak under pressure use a small piece
and deposits are collected into the spillage of cardboard or wood. Never use hands.
reservoir (2).

Page 131
 FIELD OPERATION

REMOTE HYDRAULICS OPERATION

There can be up to three remote control levers, NOTE: If there is too much restriction in the
each having four positions: implement cylinders or other attachments, the
restriction can cause a back pressure in the
remote valve which will cause the remote
lever on the console to return to neutral before
the cylinder has reached full stroke. If the
FLOAT RETRACT NEUTRAL EXTEND condition occurs, it will be necessary to
manually hold the lever in position until the
OM1075
cylinder has reached full stroke. Continual
use of the remote valve in this condition
Operation will cause the hydraulic oil to over heat and
possible damage to the hydraulic system. If
The speed of movement of auxiliary equipment is the condition occurs at regular intervals the
determined by the distance the lever is moved implement restriction should be corrected. It is
from neutral. normal for the control lever to return to neutral
when the cylinders reach full stroke.

Neutral Lock

DD97C117

If the lever is moved fully rearward from neutral, 1

the equipment hydraulic cylinder(s) will extend
DR99G120
quickly. If the lever is moved rearward a short
distance from neutral, the equipment hydraulic The remote hydraulic control levers can be locked
cylinder(s) will extend slowly. in the neutral position (1) to prevent accidental
operation of the remote valves. This can be done
If the lever is moved fully forward from neutral by moving the valve control levers to the neutral
(when float is locked out) the equipment position and turning the lock control fully clockwise.
hydraulic cylinder(s) will retract quickly. If the
lever is moved a short distance forward from
neutral the equipment hydraulic cylinder(s) will
retract slowly.

DI96N023

When used with equipment in the raised position,

the neutral lock provides a positive means of
preventing the accidental movement of the valve
control levers.

Page 132
 FIELD OPERATION

Float Operation Using Single Acting

Remote Hydraulic Cylinders
When using single acting hydraulic cylinders
move the control lever to the float position to
retract the cylinder.

IMPORTANT: Single acting remote circuits cannot

be used for continuous oil supply applications.

WARNING: When remote cylinders are

connected to the hydraulic system, cycle
2 the control lever about three times to

DD97C115
! remove air from the cylinder and hoses.
With air in the system raised equipment
To operate the remote hydraulics in a float can drop accidentally and cause personal
condition, turn the lock control (2) fully injury or machine damage.
counterclockwise.
NOTE: If the equipment attached has single
acting cylinders, always use the float position
when lowering. Continual use of the “retract”
position will cause over-heating and possible
damage to the hydraulic system.
DI96N025

This will allow the control lever to go completely

forward into the float position.

The remote hydraulic control levers can be locked

out of the float position. When using equipment for
work where the float position is not wanted, turn the
lock control one position clockwise so that the
control lever cannot be moved into the float
position.

FIELD OPERATION
DI96N024

NOTE: Single action cylinders can be operated in a

float or no float position at the same time that the
hitch is operated.

Page 133
 FIELD OPERATION

Operating Hydraulic Motors Hydraulic Motor Return Circuit

(If Equipped)

DD97C116

Stop the engine. Move remote control lever DR99J088

forward to the float position.
The hydraulic motor return circuit can be used to
Turn the lock control (1) fully counterclockwise reduce restriction in the remote hydraulic motor
(three positions from neutral) to restrict the control return line. This will result in more efficient
lever movement to the retract and float positions. hydraulic motor operation.

To use the hydraulic motor return circuit, connect

the return line from the hydraulic motor or
implement to the connector (1).

DI96N026

This will provide two operating positions for the

control lever for the hydraulic motor application
only.

To engage the hydraulic motor, start the engine

and move the control lever rearward from the
float position until against the lever lock. The
hydraulic motor will now operate.

To disengage the hydraulic motor, move the

control lever forward to the float position. This will
allow the hydraulic motor to slowly come to a
stop.

DO NOT DISENGAGE THE LEVER LOCK.

Allowing the control lever to return to the neutral
position during motor application will cause the
motor to stop immediately. This will cause
damage to the hydraulic motor, hoses and
equipment.

To change the direction of rotation of the

hydraulic motor, change the hoses over on
number 1 remote coupler.

IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the

tractors hydraulic pumps the return hydraulic
oil from all implements must be returned
through the hydraulic motor return circuit.

Page 134
 FIELD OPERATION

FOLDABLE ROPS FRAME (If Equipped)

WARNING: DO NOT modify the ROPS in any manner. Unauthorized

modifications such as welding, drilling, cutting or adding attachments can
! weaken the structure and reduce your protection. Replace the ROPS if
subjected to roll-over or damage. Do not attempt to repair.

DI97A081

For LOW CLEARANCE OPERATION, such as

operating in buildings, orchards or vineyards, the
ROPS can be lowered and secured in the down
position. NO ROPS PROTECTION IS PROVIDED
IN THE LOWERED POSITION.

DI97A080 WARNING: When improperly operated,

For NORMAL OPERATION, including this tractor can roll over or upset. For low
transportation, always use the foldable Roll Over clearance use only, the ROPS can be
lowered. No protection is provided in this

FIELD OPERATION
Protective Structure (ROPS) in the secured
upright position with the seat belt (if equipped) ! position. For all other uses and transport,
secure ROPS in upright position and fasten
fastened for full ROPS protection.
seat belt. Use of ROPS and seat belt
minimize the possibility of injury or death if
roll over or upset occurs.

IMPORTANT: When the ROPS frame is in the

lowered position, make sure there is clearance
between the frame and hitch mounted equipment.
Slowly raise the hitch to maximum height to check
the necessary clearance. For drawbar attached
and/or PTO driven equipment, check for clearance
including turning corners.

IMPORTANT: Loads must not be carried on the

rops frame when lowered or upright.

Page 135
 FIELD OPERATION

Changing the ROPS Position

STEP 1

Remove the retaining clips from the locking pins

(1) on each side of the frame.
1
Remove the locking pins. DO NOT REMOVE
THE PIVOT PINS (2).

STEP 2

Lower or raise the upper part of the ROPS frame.

STEP 3

Install the locking pins (1) and pin retaining clips

DP98J136
to secure the upper part of the ROPS frame in
LOCKING PIN POSITION WITH FRAME RAISED
the desired position, up or down.

DP98J137
LOCKING PIN POSITION WITH FRAME LOWERED

Page 136
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

TYRE INFLATION SPECIFICATIONS

For maximum tractor performance, always adjust Tyre pressure can also be adjusted as required to
the tyre pressure within the minimum/maximum satisfy the following requirements.
range, to conform with the actual load on the
tyres. Under normal conditions use the minimum A. Severe Service. Tyre pressure can be
pressure rating for general drawbar work. Use increased 28 kPa, 0.27 bar, (4 psi) more than
the higher pressure rating, up to the maximum, the maximum pressure for tyres used in
for heavy three point hitch mounted equipment. severe service. Severe service includes the
furrow tyre in normal ploughing operations,
and in hillside operations.

B. Tyres With Liquid Ballast. Inflate the tyres

MAXIMUM 14 kPa, 0.14 bar, (2 psi) more than the
INFLATION normal operating pressure required for your
PRESSURE
MINIMUM LOAD operation. This will compensate for aeration
that occurs when the tyres are in motion.

WARNING: A tyre can explode during

EXAMPLE “A” inflation and cause serious injury or death.
479 Never increase air pressure beyond 241
kPa, 2.4 bar to seat the bead on the rim.
Example ‘A’ shows the cross section of a tyre Replace a tyre if it has a defect. Replace a
inflated for maximum load but with a minimum wheel rim which has cracks, wear or
load on the tyre. The tyre tread is not making full ! severe rust. Make sure that all the air is
contact with the ground which will give poor removed from a tyre before removing the
performance. tyre from the rim. Never use force on an
inflated or partially inflated tyre, make
sure the tyre is correctly seated before
inflating.

INFLATION
PRESSURE See Tyre and Wheel Service on page 141 for
ADJUSTED TO instructions on safe tyre inflation procedure,
TRACTOR
WEIGHT recommended tyre maintenance and tyre/rim
repair.

TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST
IMPORTANT: During transportation, by rail or
EXAMPLE “B” road, tractor tyres are inflated to higher than
479 normal operating pressures. Before using your
tractor check the air pressure in the tyres to
Example ‘B’ shows the cross section of a tyre make sure that the air pressures are correct.
with the inflated pressure correctly adjusted to
the load on the tyre. The tyre tread is making full
contact with the ground which will give maximum
performance.

Page 137
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

Air Pressure Check Tyre Inflation Procedure

Check the tyre inflation pressure every 50 hours DO NOT inflate a tyre that has had a complete
of operation or once per week. loss of air. If the tyre has lost all air pressure,
have a qualified tyre mechanic service the tyre.
NOTE: For best tyre life check tyre pressures as
regular intervals. Too low a pressure causes early
tyre wall failure. Too high a pressure causes higher
tread wear or damage.

Check the condition of the tyres and wheels for

wear or damage. Keep the tyres inflated to the
recommended pressures.

NOTE: Cross ply tyres can have the pressure

reduced to increase traction in field work. For
speeds below 16 km/h (10 mph), loads can be
increased by 20%.
DS97D088

NOTE: Never use radial ply tyres below 1.2 bar IMPORTANT: If the tyre wheel assembly has
(17 psi). It is not necessary to reduce the been removed from the tractor always use a
pressure in radial tyres to get better traction in restraining device (tyre inflation cage) when
the field. inflating a tyre.

IMPORTANT: Before leaving the factory the tyre To ADD air to a partly inflated tyre, use the
pressures are increased. Check and adjust the following procedure:
pressures before operating the tractor.
STEP 1
For tyres equipped with liquid ballast, check the
air pressure as follows: Use a SAFETY TYPE air hose with a remote
shutoff valve and a self-locking air chuck.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Use an air-water gauge. The valve must be at the
bottom of the tyre to get an accurate reading. Stand behind the tread of the tyre and make sure
all persons are away from the side of the tyre
STEP 2 before you start to add air.

Use a standard air gauge as follows: STEP 3

A. The valve must be at the top of the tyre.
Inflate the tyre to the recommended air pressure.
B. Measure the wheel diameter. DO NOT INFLATE THE TYRE MORE THAN THE
C. Add 3.5 kPa, 0.04 bar (0.5 psi) for each RECOMMENDED PRESSURE.
305 mm (12 inch) of rim diameter to the
standard gauge reading.

Page 138
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

TYRE PRESSURES AND LOAD CAPACITIES

Tyres can be marked in two ways, as shown in the examples below:

CROSSPLY - Example

DI96J476

12.4-24 8PR
12.4 = Nominal tyre width in inches
-= Crossply structure
24 = Internal diameter
8PR = 8 ply rating

For correct tyre pressures/load capacities for CROSSPLY tyres see your dealer or tyre manufacturer.

RADIAL - Example

LOAD AT 40 km/h
MA X REPLAC
E S
8 10P
142 A 26 50 kg at 1.6 Bar R

TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST
DI96J475

18.4R38 142 A8
18.4 = Nominal tyre width in inches
R= Radial structure
38 = Internal diameter
142 = Load index number, see chart 1
A8 = Speed code for 40 km/h at
1,6 bar pressure, see chart 2

The performance of a Radial tyre is determined by the Load Index and Speed Code which have replaced
the Ply rating found on Crossply tyres.

The maximum load which can be carried by a tyre is dependant upon the Load Index quoted on the tyre
wall. Charts 1 and 2, on the following page, give a guide to the maximum load a tyre can carry and a
percentage (%) variation depending upon the speed code or travel speed.

Page 139
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

IMPORTANT: The charts below are only a guide. Loads may vary slightly with makes of tyre. For correct
loads see your dealer or tyre manufacturer.

Chart 1 - Load Index Codes and Loads per Tyre

INDEX kg INDEX kg INDEX kg INDEX kg INDEX kg INDEX kg

95 690 109 1030 123 1550 137 2300 151 3450 165 5150

96 710 110 1060 124 1600 138 2360 152 3550 166 5300

97 730 111 1090 125 1650 139 2430 153 3650 167 5450

98 750 112 1120 126 1700 140 2500 154 3750 168 5600

99 775 113 1150 127 1750 141 2575 155 3875 169 5800

100 800 114 1180 128 1800 142 2650 156 4000 170 6000

101 825 115 1215 129 1850 143 2725 157 4125 171 6150

102 850 116 1250 130 1900 144 2800 158 4250 172 6300

103 875 117 1285 131 1950 145 2900 159 4375 173 6500

104 900 118 1320 132 2000 146 3000 160 4500 174 6700

105 925 119 1360 133 2060 147 3075 161 4625 175 6900

106 950 120 1400 134 2120 148 3150 162 4750 176 7100

107 975 121 1450 135 2180 149 3250 163 4875 177 7300

108 1000 122 1500 136 2240 150 3350 164 5000 178 7500

Chart 2 - Speed Codes

SPEED CODE km/h mph % VARIATION

FACTOR (*) FOR
DIFFERENT
SPEEDS

A2 10 6 + 67%

A3 15 9 + 50%

A4 20 12 + 39%

A5 25 15 + 28%

A6 30 19 + 11%

A7 35 22 + 4%

A8 40 25 0

(*) The % variation factors are based on

recommendations by the European Tyre And Rim
Technical Organization (ETRTO).

Page 140
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

Tyre And Wheel Service Tyre Installation

To get the correct traction and cleaning action of
WARNING: Do not remove, install or make the lugs, the tyres must be installed on the
repairs to tyres or rims. Take the tyre and wheels so the tread pattern is turning as shown.
rim to a tyre specialist where persons with DO NOT try to remove, repair or install a tractor
special training and special safety tools are tyre on a wheel.
available. If the tyre is not correctly
! positioned on the rim, or if over inflated, the
tyre bead can loosen on one side and
cause air to leak at high force and can
thrust the tyre in any direction. Explosive
separation of the tyre can cause serious
injury.

WARNING: DO NOT weld to wheel or rim

when a tyre is installed. Welding will cause
an explosive air/gas mixture that will be
ignited with high temperatures. This can
! happen to tyres inflated or deflated.
Removing air or breaking bead is not
adequate. The tyre MUST be completely
removed from the rim prior to welding.
t11800

WARNING: Explosive separation of the

tyre and/or rim parts can cause injury or
! death. When tyre service is necessary,
have a qualified tyre mechanic service the
tyre.

Always have a qualified tyre mechanic service

the tyres and wheels on this machine. If the tyre
has lost all air pressure, take the tyre and wheel
to a tyre specialist for service. The use of correct
equipment and correct service/repair procedures

TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST
will prevent accidents.

Page 141
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PROGRAMMING FOR

DIFFERENT TYRE SIZES
Both the Standard (Analog) and the Digital STEP 3
instrument clusters MUST be programmed
according to the rear tyre size your tractor is
equipped with. Program the clusters as follows:

Digital Cluster
See PROGRAMMING THE DIGITAL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER on Page 34 of this
manual for the correct procedure.

Standard (Analog) Instrument

Cluster DP98C393

TACHOMETER CALIBRATION - While using the

STEP 1
chart below, set the switches accordingly.

CALIBRATION SWITCH POSITIONS

1 2 3
ON

ON

OFF
DR99G125

Remove the instrument cluster, but DO NOT STEP 4

DISCONNECT THE HARNESS.

STEP 2

DP98C393

SPEEDOMETER CALIBRATION - Set the

switches in the positions as shown in calibration
DR98J154
chart opposite.

Remove the cover (1) on the back to gain access

to the switches.

Page 142
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

STEP 5

When the calibration has been completed install

the indicator lamp cover, the cluster and the four
retaining screws.

Speedometer Calibration Chart

ON

OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

EXAMPLE OF SWITCH POSITIONS FOR CALIBRATION OF SPEEDOMETER FOR A 13.6 R 36 TYRE

Set the switches as shown in the chart below to the rear tyre size.

CALIBRATION SWITCH POSITIONS

REAR TYRE SIZE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13.6R28/13.6-28 ON ON ON ON ON ON
14.9R28/14.9-28 ON ON ON
16.9-28 or 16.9 R28 ON ON ON
16.9-28 (IND) ON ON ON
14.9R30/14.9-30 ON ON ON
16.9R30/16.9-30 ON ON ON ON ON
18.4R30/18.4-30 ON ON ON ON
18.4-30 (IND) ON ON ON ON ON
480/70R30 ON ON ON ON ON
12.4R32/12.4-32 ON ON ON
16.9R34/16.9-34 ON ON
18.4R34/18.4-34 ON ON ON

TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST
480/70R34 ON ON
520/70R34 ON ON ON
540/70R34 ON ON ON
540/65R34
12.4R36/12.4-36 ON ON ON ON ON
13.6R36/13.6-36 ON ON ON ON ON
13.6R38/13.6-38 ON ON ON
15.5-38 ON ON

NOTE: Only the most common tyre options are listed in the table above.
If other tyre sizes are fitted which are not shown in the table above
see your dealer for the correct calibration.

Page 143
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

SETTING THE FRONT WHEEL TOE-IN

FRONT

REAR
343L9R

STEP 1 Adjustments
Park the tractor on hard level ground, engage the STEP 4
park brake and stop the engine.
Measure the distance between the rim edges at
STEP 2 the front (dimension A in the diagram).

Raise the front of the tractor so that both front STEP 5

wheels are off the ground and the steering is free
to turn through the full range LEFT AND RIGHT. Rotate each wheel 180 degrees so that the
marks are at the rear, at the same height as the
STEP 3 centre of the hub.

2 Wheel Drive ONLY STEP 6

Measure the distance between the marks at the
rear (dimension B in the diagram).

STEP 7
Subtract the front dimension (A) from the rear
dimension (B), this is the toe-in measurement.
2WD - The toe-in must be 0 to 5 mm.
MFD - The toe-in must be 0 to 2 mm.

If the toe-in is less, increase the length of the tie

rods. If the toe-in is more, decrease the length of
DP98H145
the tie rods.
Turn the steering to line up the chisel marks (1)
and (2) one on steering knuckle and one on
sleeve.
If the marks on the other steering knuckle are in
line the toe-in is correct.

Page 144
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

To change the length of the tie rods do the Mechanical Front Drive
following:

Two Wheel Drive

STEP 1
2
2

3
1
MD02J005

1 STEP 1
Loosen the lock nuts (1), one each side to free
DP98H144 the tie rod tubes (2).
Bend back the locking tabs (1) and loosen the
lock nuts (2). STEP 2
Turn the adjusting rods (3), at each side, an
STEP 2 equal amount to increase or decrease the length.

STEP 3
Tighten the lock nuts and check the toe-in.
NOTE: Make sure the tie rod ball joints are
central.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the correct toe-in has
been achieved.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the tyres do not
contact the steering cylinder when on full lock.
4
3
DP98H141

TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST
Loosen locking nuts and locking bolts (3) to free
the tie rod tubes (4).

STEP 3
Turn each tube an equal amount to increase or
decrease the length. Make sure the steering
cylinder arm remains central.

STEP 4
Tighten the locking bolts, make sure they locate
in the tie rod dimples, and check the toe-in.
Repeat the adjustment if necessary.

STEP 5
Once the correct toe-in has been achieved,
tighten the locking bolts to 81 Nm. Tighten the
lock nuts and bend over the locking tabs.

IMPORTANT: Make sure the tyres do not

contact the steering cylinder when on full lock.

Page 145
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

AXLE - STEERING AND OSCILLATION STOPS

Steering Stops Oscillation Stops (If Equipped)

The steering stops are used to give the required
steering clearance between the front tyres and
tractor frame.
The stops are located on the rear of each swivel
housing.

D24912

1 STOP IN USE (7° OF TILT)

D24904
STEP 1
Loosen the lock nuts (1).
STEP 2
Adjust the steering stop bolts (2) to achieve
correct steering angle. Tighten the lock nuts.
The angles you can set the stops to depends
upon:
1. The size of front tyres fitted. D24914
STOP STORED (12° OF TILT)
2. The tread width setting.
3. If front fenders are fitted. With the Oscillation stops installed in the storage
4. If Oscillation Stops are fitted. position, or not fitted, the maximum tilt of axle is
12°. When the stops are fitted, the maximum tilt
5. If a downswept exhaust is fitted.
is reduced to 7°.
IMPORTANT: After adjustment,
IMPORTANT: When repositioning the Oscillation
1. Raise the front of the tractor so the axle can be
stops be aware that this result in readjustment of
moved into maximum oscillation.
the steering stops.
2. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel to
full lock in both directions.
3. Check to make sure the tyres or fenders (If
Equipped) DO NOT touch the tractor frame.

IMPORTANT: When installing a front loader check

the manufacturers recommendations for axle
steering and oscillation stops.

Page 146
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

TWO WHEEL DRIVE FRONT AXLE TREAD ADJUSTMENT

This axle is adjustable in 50 mm stages each STEP 5
side. The extra width settings are available by To keep the correct toe-in as the axle extensions
turning the wheel concaves out. are moved in or out, there are detents in the tie
rods spaced at 50 mm (2 inch) to correspond with
STEP 1 the holes in the axle extensions.
Put blocks in front of and behind the rear wheels.
EXAMPLE: If the axle outer locating bolt is in the
Lift the front of the tractor and install axle
fourth hole from the outer end of the axle
supports.
extension then the tie rod retaining bolt must be
in the fourth hole from the outer end of the tie
STEP 2
rod.

STEP 6
Tighten the screws (2) and lock nuts (1) on the tie
rod.
NOTE: If these procedures are not followed, the
turning angle will be changed.
IMPORTANT: After adjustment tighten the axle and
1 wheel nuts to the correct torque. Check wheel nut
2 torque after the first 30 minutes of operation and
then every 10 hours of operation until torques
stabilize.
DP98H141

Loosen the lock nuts (1) and screws (2).

STEP 3

TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST
3
4

DP98D238

Remove the locating bolts and nuts (3) from the

axle extensions (4).
NOTE: Utility Axle shown.

STEP 4
Slide the axle extensions (4) to the required tread
position setting and install the locating bolts and
nuts (3), tighten to a torque of 508 to 576 Nm
(375 to 425 lb ft).

Page 147
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

Two Wheel Drive (2WD) Front Wheel Tread Widths

1
DP97C024

1. TREAD WIDTH 2. 6 SETTINGS

Due to market requirements numerous 2WD axle variants are available for the CX Series tractors:

Utility with Straight Axle .................................................................................. 1321 to 1956 mm (52 to 77 in)

Row Crop with Straight Axle ........................................................................... 1321 to 2083 mm (52 to 82 in)
Row Crop with Tobacco Axle.......................................................................... 2235 to 2438 mm (88 to 96 in)
Low Profile...................................................................................................1321(*) to 1956 mm (52 to 77 in)

NOTE: All tread figures are at ground level. The NOTE: After adjustment tighten the axle and
maximum and minimum tread width varies slightly wheel nuts to the correct torque. Check wheel
with different tyre sizes. nut torque after the first 30 minutes of
operation and then every 10 hours of
(*) NOTE: The narrowest Low Profile setting of operation until torques stabilize.
1321 mm (52 in) cannot be used with 7.50-18
tyres fitted. The extra width settings are
available by turning the wheel concaves out.

Page 148
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

MFD FRONT WHEEL TREAD WIDTHS

The MFD front wheel tread widths (measured
between tyre centres at ground level) can be
adjusted to eight different positions as needed for CENTRE OF TRACTOR
your operation.
IMPORTANT: The steering stops on the axle
must be installed in the correct position for the
tread width and tyre size being used. A
The tread width can be adjusted by turning the
wheel discs and/or the wheel rims in or out. The
wheel disc can also be installed on either side of
the mounting lugs on the rim. Install the wheel
discs and rims in the positions shown for the
wheel tread needed. B
Two Piece Wheels

TREAD WIDTHS W7 x 24
RIM IN RIM IN
DISC IN DISC OUT
A LUG IN E LUG IN
C
1383 mm 1683 mm
(54.4 in) (66.2 in)
RIM IN RIM IN
DISC IN DISC OUT
B LUG OUT F LUG OUT
1415 mm 1715 mm
(55.7 in) (67.5 in)
RIM OUT RIM OUT D
DISC IN DISC OUT
C LUG IN G LUG IN
1478 mm 1778 mm
(58.2 in) (70.0 in)
RIM OUT RIM OUT
DISC IN DISC OUT
D LUG OUT H LUG OUT
1510 mm 1810 mm
E
(59.4 in) (71.2 in)

TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST
TREAD WIDTHS W10/W12 x 24
RIM IN RIM IN
DISC IN DISC OUT
LUG IN LUG IN F
A E
1299 mm 1599 mm
(51.1 in) (62.9 in)
RIM IN RIM IN
DISC IN DISC OUT
B LUG OUT F LUG OUT
1394 mm 1694 mm
(54.9 in) (66.7 in) G
RIM OUT RIM OUT
DISC IN DISC OUT
C LUG IN G LUG IN
1499 mm 1799 mm
(59.0 in) (70.8 in)
RIM OUT RIM OUT
DISC IN DISC OUT
D LUG OUT H LUG OUT H
1594 mm 1894 mm
(62.7 in) (74.6 in)

Page 149
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

One Piece Wheels FRONT WHEEL BOLT TORQUES

Two Wheel Drive (2WD)
CENTRE OF TRACTOR

OM1066A

RIM OFFSET IN
W9.00 x 18 - 1512 mm (59.5 in)
W11 x18 - 1544 mm (60.8 in) 342L9

W9 x 20 - 1512 mm (59.5 in)

Tighten the wheel to hub mounting bolts (1) to a
W11 x 20 - 1544 mm (60.8 in)
torque of 108 to 136 Nm (80 to 100 lb ft).

CENTRE OF TRACTOR
Mechanical Front Drive (MFD)

7
1 1 4

5
1
8 6
3 4
5 7
2
OM1066
6
RIM OFFSET OUT
3 2
W9.00 x 18 - 1716 mm (67.5 in)
W11 x18 - 1684 mm (66.3 in) 8
2
W9 x 20 - 1716 mm (67.5 in)
W11 x 20 - 1684 mm (66.3 in) 5100166

1. Tighten the disc to rim bolts to a torque of 280

to 340 Nm (205 to 250 lb ft) according to the
torque sequence shown.

2. Tighten the disc to the front axle hub nuts to a

torque of 300 to 350 Nm (221 to 258 lb ft)
according to the torque sequence shown.

The disc must sit flush to the rim lugs/clamps

when assembled.

Page 150
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

FRONT TO REAR TYRE SIZE COMBINATIONS

Tractors equipped with Mechanical Front Drive IMPORTANT: The tyre size combinations are
must use front and rear tyre combinations that specified to provide matched ground speeds of the
are correctly matched. The use of recommended front and rear tyres. Mixing worn and new tyres or
tyre combinations will give maximum tractor tyres of different diameters, manufacturers, or
performance, extended tyre life and reduced loaded radii can give incorrect ground speed
wear on drive train components. match. When replacing tyres refer to the tables on
the following pages. If the tyres required are not
The LEAD/LAG (How fast the front tyre rotates listed or you are in any doubt consult your dealer.
compared to the rear tyre) should be between 0
and 5 percent lead, with +1 to +3 percent being
ideal. To calculate the LEAD/LAG, use the
following formula:

(RCF xIR) - RCR x 100 = lead

RC
R

RCF = Rolling Circumference of Front Tyre (Refer

to the Tyre Manufacturers Hand book).
RCR = Rolling Circumference of Rear Tyre (Refer
to the Tyre Manufactures Hand book).
IR = Inter Axle Ratio.

IMPORTANT: To minimize tyre wear, MFD

tractors must have MFD disengaged if the
tractor is going to be run at high speeds and
low loads (roading). This procedure will also
reduce power loss, increase fuel economy and
ride stability.

IMPORTANT: NEVER exceed the load capacity

or the inflation pressure for a particular tyre.
Refer to the TYRE LOAD AND INFLATION
CHART in this manual.

TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

Page 151
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

North American Tractors

REAR TYRES FRONT TYRES

Blas TYRES DT710 Radial 14-17.5 8.3-24 8.3-24 9.5-24 320/75R24 11.2-24 12.4-24 13.6-24
1*,R1
Size Size 8PR,R4 6PR,R1 4PR,R3 6PR,R1 (DT710) 6PR,R1 6PR,R1 8PR,R1

14.9-24,6PR,R1 14.9R24,1*,R1 ●
16.9-24,6PR,R1 ●
18.4-26,6PR,R1 ● ●
13.6-28,6PR,R1 13.6R28,1*,R1 ●
13.6-28,6PR,R3 ● ●
14.9-28,6PR,R1 14.9R28,1*,R1 ● ●
16.9-28,6PR,R1 16.9R28,1*,R1 ● ●
16.9-30,6PR,R1 16.9R30,1*,R1 ● ●
18.4-30,6PR,R1 ● ●
18.4R30,1*,R1 ● ● ●
16.9-34,6PR,R1 ● ●
18.4-34,6PR,R1 ●
18.4R34,1*,R1 ● ●
13.6-38,6PR,R1 ● ● ●
15.5-38,6PR,R1 15.5R38,1*,R1 ● ●
12.4-42,6PR,R1 ● ●
● = Correct tyre size combination.
* NOTE: Some of these acceptable combinations MAY not be released for every model of the CX Series Tractors.
For tyre combinations not listed or any other information, see your dealer.

Page 152
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

Rest Of World Tractors

Combinations for Standard 1:407 Ratio MFD Axle

CROSS PLY (BIAS) REAR TYRES

FRONT TYRES 14.9-28 16.9-30 18.4-30 R1 18.4-30 R2 12.4-32 13.6-36 16.9-34 13.6-38 18.4-26 R3 18.4-34

11.2R20 ● ●
8.3-24 ● ●
9.5-24 ● ●
11.2-24 ● ● ● ● ●
12.4-24 ● ● ● ●
14.5/80-18 ●
13.6R24 ●
10.5-18 ● AVAILABLE FOR OPTIONAL 1:564 RATIO MFD AXLE ONLY

RADIAL REAR TYRES

FRONT TYRES 13.6R28 14.9R28 14.9R30 16.9R30 16.9R30 ‘G’ 18.4R30 480/70R30 12.4R32 16.9R34 ‘G’ 12.4R36 13.6R36

11.2R20 ● ● ●
12.4R20 ● ● ● ●
14.9R20 ● ● ● ● ●
335/80R20 ●
375/75R20 ● ● ● ● ●
405/70R20 ● ●
8.3R24 ● ● ●
9.5R24 ● ● ● ● ● ●
10.5-18 ● AVAILABLE FOR OPTIONAL 1:564 RATIO MFD AXLE ONLY

RADIAL REAR TYRES

FRONT TYRES 16.4R30 16.4R30‘G’ 18.4R30 480/70R30 16.9R34 16.9R34 ‘G’ 18.4R34 18.4R34 ‘G’ 480/70R34 540/65R34

11.2R24 ● ● ● ● ●
12.4R24 ● ● ● ● ● ●
13.6R24 ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●

TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST
13.6R24 ‘G’

360/70R24 ● ● ● ● ●
380/70R24 ●
400/70R24 ●

RADIAL REAR TYRES

FRONT TYRES 500/70R34 520/70R34 12,.4R36 13.6R36 13.6R38

11.2R24 ● ● ●
12.4R24 ● ● ●
13.6R24 ●
13.6R24 ‘G’ ●
360/70R24 ● ●
380/70R24 ●
400/70R24 ●
420/70R24 ●
● = Correct tyre size combination.
NOTE: Some of these acceptable combinations MAY not be released for every model of the CX Series Tractors.
For tyre combinations not listed or any other information, see your dealer.

Page 153
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

FRONT WHEEL FENDERS (If Equipped)

Front wheel fenders are available for all tractor Vertical Adjustment
variants. On MFD models the fenders are fully
adjustable to ensure the tyre is covered at all Loosen the support brace mounting bolts (1) and
tread widths. slide the support brace (2) up or down to the
correct position. Tighten the mounting bolts to a
NOTE: To provide the necessary clearance torque of 50 Nm.
between the fender and other tractor
components, the fender mounting position NOTE: The distance between tyre and support
must be adjusted for the tread width and tyre brace must be 50-100 mm (2 - 4 inch).
size being used.

The front fenders provide greater safety and 2

keep the tractor cleaner, therefore improving
operation and durability.

DS99G185

Horizontal Adjustment

Loosen the fender bracket mounting bolts (3) and

slide the fender bracket left or right until the
fender is central over the tyre. Tighten the
mounting bolts.

DS99G185

Page 154
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

REAR WHEEL TREAD ADJUSTMENT

Important information for EEC Flanged Type Axle Tread Widths
Member States:
The rear wheels are disc wheels with removable
● Overall widths above 3000 mm (10 ft) WILL rims. The illustrations on the following pages show
require local authorization for use on the the rim and disc positions for the various tread
highway. An overall width of 2550 mm to widths. When the rims are reversed to change the
tread width, install the right hand tyre and rim on the
3000 mm (8 to 10 ft) MAY require local
left disc and the left tyre and rim on the right disc to
authorization for use on the highway, check
make sure that the tread pattern is in the correct
before operation.
direction for maximum traction as shown by the
arrow on the tyre.
● It is a legal requirement, when travelling on
the highway, to make sure the distance from
When adjusting to the minimum tread position, make
the tyre outer edge and the rear stop lamp
sure that there is a clearance of at least 50 mm (2 in)
lens does not exceed 400 mm (16 in),
between the tyres and components of the fenders.
dimension ‘A’.
IMPORTANT: Before making any adjustment make
sure that the tractor is correctly supported. Apply
the park brake and put blocks in front of and behind
A both front wheels and the other rear wheel. Check
torques after the first 30 minutes of operation and
then every 10 hours of operation until torques
stabilize. This tightening and checking procedure is
necessary after any wheel repositioning operation,
see “REAR WHEEL BOLT TORQUES” on
page 158 for correct torques and tightening
sequence.

TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST
DR00N001

Page 155
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

NOTE: Dimensions given are for a 13.6-36

tyre. CENTRE OF TRACTOR

TREAD WIDTHS
RIM OUT RIM IN
DISC IN DISC OUT
LUG IN LUG OUT A
A D
1424 mm 1725 mm
(56 in) (68 in)
RIM OUT RIM OUT
DISC IN DISC OUT
LUG OUT LUG IN
B E
1524 mm 1824 mm
(60 in) (72 in)
B
RIM IN RIM OUT
DISC OUT DISC OUT
LUG IN LUG OUT
C F
1625 mm 1924 mm
(64 in) (76 in)

Page 156
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

Bar Axle Adjustment Use the following procedure to change the tread
setting:

STEP 1
Clean the area on the axle shafts where the hubs
are to be located. Loosen the four clamping bolts
and adjust the wheels to the new tread setting.
Apply anti-seize compound Loctite 8150 to the
hub bolt heads and washers.

STEP 2

DH97D165A

MAXIMUM TREAD - HUB FLANGE OUT 2 1

The maximum tread position of 2430 mm (96 in) is
obtained with the hubs at the end of the axle shafts 4 3
and the hub flanges, wheel rims and discs turned out.

TSM0063A

Tighten the clamping bolts to a torque of 135 Nm

in sequence 1 to 4.
Make sure the gap at both sides of the hub is
equal.
Apply anti-seize compound Loctite 8150 to the
axle shafts.
DH97D166A
STEP 3
MINIMUM TREAD - HUB FLANGE IN Tighten the clamping bolts again in the sequence
1 to 4, to a torque of 529Nm (390 lb ft).

TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST
The minimum tread position of 1370 mm (54 in) is
obtained with the hub flanges, wheel rims and discs After 30 minutes of operation torque all bolts
turned in. Position the hubs on the axle shafts so that again and then every 10 hours of operation until
there is a clearance of at least 50 mm (2 in) between torques stabilize.
the tyres and components of the fenders. See next
NOTE: This tightening and checking procedure
page for correct wheel offset change.
is necessary after any wheel repositioning
operation.
IMPORTANT: Before making any adjustment make
sure that the tractor is correctly supported. Apply
the park brake and put blocks in front of and behind
Wheel Offset Direction Change
both front wheels and the other rear wheel. Check If you need to change the direction of the wheel
torques after the first 30 minutes of operation and offset (in or out), remove the tyre and wheel from
then every 10 hours of operation until torques one side of the tractor and mount on the other
stabilize. This tightening and checking procedure is side of tractor. The tyre pattern must face the
necessary after any wheel repositioning operation, same direction.
see “REAR WHEEL BOLT TORQUES” on
page 158 for correct torques and tightening
sequence.

Page 157
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

REAR WHEEL BOLT TORQUES

IMPORTANT: Check torques after the first 30 Bar Axle
minutes of operation and then every 10 hours of
operation until torques stabilize. This tightening
and checking procedure is necessary after
any wheel repositioning operation.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT lubricate the threads.

1
Flanged Axle
2

7
1 1 4

5
1
8 6
3 4
5 7
2
6
DI97G009

3 2
8 7
2
1 4
340L9D
5
TIGHTENING SEQUENCES 1
8 6
1. After assembly, tighten the WHEEL DISC TO 3 4
WHEEL RIM NUTS to 280 to 340 Nm (205 to 5 7
2
250 lb ft) in the sequence shown above. 6

3 2
2. Install the wheel on the axle and tighten the
WHEEL TO AXLE FLANGE NUTS (2) to a 8
torque of 278 to 298 Nm (205 to 220 lb ft) in
340L9D
the sequence shown above.
1. Tighten the WHEEL DISC TO WHEEL RIM
DO NOT LUBRICATE AXLE STUD THREADS. NUTS to 280 to 340 Nm (205 to 250 lb ft) in
the sequence shown above.

OM795

2. Tighten the WHEEL TO HUB BOLTS to a

torque of 278 to 298 Nm (205 to 220 lb ft) in
the sequence shown above.

Page 158
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

TRACTOR BALLAST

Loads Matched to Tractor Tractor Weight Distribution

The life of the tractor will be increased by The optimum static weight distribution for
operating in the highest possible gear without mechanical front drive (MFD) tractors is shown
labouring the engine. Match the implement to the below. The correct static weight distribution and the
tractor to get the best forward speed. Operating correct amount of wheel slip will give maximum
at 8 km/h (5 mph) or above is best for long life of tractive efficiency, maximum productivity and
main components. Too much ballast and extended service life for the tractor components.
excessive loads decrease tyre life, wastes fuel
The amount and type of front and rear mounted
and often reduces output.
equipment being used will affect the weight
distribution to the front and rear tyres. Add or
● The best traction occurs when wheel slip is
remove ballast as necessary, to your fully equipped
between nine and sixteen percent.
tractor, to achieve the recommended static weight
● Remove the ballast when not needed for distribution. When the weight distribution is correct,
lighter loads. add ballast as necessary to achieve the
recommended amount of wheel slip.
● Pull lighter loads at a little faster speed to do
more work and increase efficiency. Do not IMPORTANT: Whatever the state of loading of the
over weight the tractor to pull very heavy tractor, the weight transmitted to the road by the
loads. wheels of the front axle must not be less than 20
percent of the unladen weight of the tractor.
Operating a tractor with too much weight can
cause: IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with all
equipment and ballast weight must never be more
A. A decrease in horsepower available at the than the maximum recommended operating weight.
implement and then, a decrease in amount See Maximum Permitted Operating Weights on
of field worked. Page 249 of this manual Observe tyre capacities
and any possible legal limitations.
B. An increase in amount of fuel used.
See the following examples for the recommended
C. A decrease in tyre life.
static weight distribution for your tractor.
D. The soil to be compacted.
E. Too much force on the power train which Two Wheel Drive (2WD) Tractors
will decrease the life of the power train and
cause high operating cost. IMPLEMENT TYPE % FRONT % REAR

TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST
Towed - Drawbar 25% 75%
The most important item in field operations is the
amount of horsepower available at the hitch or Semi - Mounted 30% 70%
drawbar. Power needed to move a tractor that Fully - Mounted 35% 65%
has too much weight will decrease the power that
is available to pull the implement.
The weight distribution ratios are based upon the
total weight of a fully equipped tractor (including
IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with all
ballast).
equipment and ballast weight must never be more
than the maximum recommended operating weight.
See Maximum Permitted Operating Weights on Mechanical Front Drive (MFD) Tractors
Page 249 of this manual Observe tyre capacities
and any possible legal limitations. % FRONT % REAR

40% 60%

The weight distribution ratios are based upon the

total weight of a fully equipped tractor (including
ballast).

Page 159
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

Front end weights, rear wheel weights and liquid Measuring Wheel Slip
ballast in the tyres can be used to ballast your
tractor. Local operating conditions will determine For tractors equipped with True Ground Speed
the amount of ballast needed for maximum Sensor, see Wheel Slip Indicator on page 100 for
operating efficiency and tractor field instructions. If your tractor is not equipped with a
performance. Inadequate traction and excessive True Ground Speed Sensor, measure the amount
wheel slip can waste up to thirty percent of of wheel slip as follows with the assistance of a
tractor horsepower. second person:

STEP 1

Put a reference mark on the side of the tractor

rear tyre.

STEP 2

DS99J086 Operate the tractor with the implement IN THE

IDEAL WHEEL SLIP 9 -16% GROUND.

A good ballast weight for your tractor is the STEP 3

weight needed to maintain 9 to 16 percent wheel
slip. While the tractor is moving put a marker on the
ground, outside the implement width, where the
Determine the amount of wheel slip as follows:
reference mark on the tyre comes down to the
ground.

STEP 4

Continue to walk along with the tractor and count

ten wheel revolutions. Put a second marker on
the ground outside the implement width, where
the reference mark on the tyre comes down to
the ground for the TENTH time.

STEP 5
1
Lift the implement out of the ground. Put the
tractor in position with the rear tyre next to the
DP98J225 first ground marker and put a new reference mark
NOTE: Sensor manufacturer/type may vary to on the rear tyre aligned with the first ground
that shown in photograph above. marker.

A. With True Ground Speed Sensor (1) - See STEP 6

Wheel Slip Indicator on page 100 for more
information. Operate the tractor, with the implement RAISED,
from the first ground marker to the second
B. Without True Ground Speed Sensor - See ground marker. Count the number of wheel
Measuring Wheel Slip on next page for more revolutions between the two ground markers.
information.
Do not add more weight than is necessary to
achieve the correct tractor static weight
distribution and the correct amount of wheel slip.
IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with all
equipment and ballast weight must never be
more than the maximum recommended
operating weight, see page 249. Observe tyre
load capacities and any possible legal
limitations.

Page 160
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

STEP 7 Front End Weights (If Equipped)

Find the percent of slip as follows:
Front end weights can be mounted on the front of
Revolutions of the tractor with a weight frame. The weights and
wheel with weight frame are available from your Dealer.
implement raised. Slip (%)
The weight frame is equipped with up to 9
9-1/2 ...................................................................... 5
weights or 6 weights and a clevis weight. Each
9 .......................................................................... 10
weight weighs 45 kg (100 lb), the clevis weight
8-1/2 .................................................................... 15
weighs 100 kg (220 lb).
8 .......................................................................... 20
7-1/2 .................................................................... 25
Use front end weights as needed to provide
7 .......................................................................... 30
effective steering control and front end stability and
NOTE: When you have too much ballast to achieve maximum operating efficiency and
installed on the tractor, you will see the clear tractor field performance. See Tractor Weight
shape of the tyre tread in the ground which is Distribution on Page 159 of this manual, for
an indication of no slippage. With too little recommendations on ballasting procedures.
ballast, the tyre tread marks will not show
because of the tyre slippage. IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with all
equipment and ballast weight must never be more
than the maximum recommended operating weight.
NO SLIP CORRECT SLIP TOO MUCH SLIP
See Maximum Permitted Operating Weights on
Page 249 of this manual Observe tyre capacities
and any possible legal limitations.

Continued ....

TOO MUCH BALLAST CORRECT BALLAST TOO LITTLE BALLAST

479A

TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

Page 161
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

Installing Front End Weights STEP 5

Repeat STEP 4 and install second weight onto
STEP 1 the other side of the clevis weight (2) or tab
Park the tractor on hard level ground. STOP the (D) on the weight frame.
engine and apply the park brake. Remove the key.
IMPORTANT: If a clevis weight (2) is NOT to be
STEP 2 installed, the minimum number of weights (4)
that can be installed is TWO, one either side
If a clevis weight (2) is to be installed, install the clevis
of tab (D) on the weight frame (1). The tab on
weight and clevis pin (3). Make sure the clevis pin
one weight (4) must locate into the recess (C)
retainer (A) locates correctly into the top hole (B) of the
in the weight previously installed in STEP 4.
clevis pin (3).
STEP 6
STEP 3

1
MD01L003
MD01L003

Continue to install weights (4) equally to each

Hook one weight (4) over the top lip of the weight
side until the required weight pack is installed.
frame (1) towards its outer edge, (as shown in
The tab (F) on each weight will interlock into the
photo above).
previous installed weight.
STEP 4
STEP 7
Install the retaining stud (5) through the holes in
E the weight pack and install the threaded plate (6).
Make sure the threads are fully installed into the
plate and the plate is correctly located into the
recess in the outer weight (4). Install the washer
(7) and nut (8) to the opposite end of the stud (5).
1 Tighten the nut.

MD01L004

Slide the weight (4) towards the centre of the frame

(1), next to the clevis weight (2), (if equipped), or
until it is against tab (D) on the weight frame (1).
The bottom of the weight (4) will interlock behind
tab (E) at the centre of the weight frame (1).

Page 162
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

STEP 8 STEP 9

If a small number of weights are to be installed,

install and tighten a suitable bolt through the
5 5 weights into the threaded plate, make sure the
threaded plate locates into the recess in the
weight.

6 6

RH96H005

If using shorter studs (6), install a stud from each

side and use 2 plates (5) as shown.

A
5 3

2
4 B
4

TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST
D

7
8

DI99G103
1

1. WEIGHT FRAME - 107 kg (236 lb) 5. THREADED PLATE

2. CLEVIS WEIGHT - 100 kg (220 lb) 6. BOLT
3. CLEVIS PIN 7. WASHER
4. WEIGHT 45 kg (100 lb) 8. NUT

Page 163
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

Rear Wheel Weights IMPORTANT: Lift the rear wheel above the
ground and turn the wheel 180 degrees for
Rear wheel weights, depending upon market are each weight installed, changing the position of
available from your dealer. Two weight types can each weight to get correct balance alignment.
be fitted to the CX Series. These are the HALF A maximum of 3 weights per wheel can be
TYPE 34 kg (75 Ib) per pair or the SOLID TYPE used. The 3 weights can be installed on the
54.5 kg (120 lb) and can be fitted to wheels up to 42 inside or outside of the wheels.
inch.
IMPORTANT: Weights can only be mounted on
inside or outside, not both. Inside weights
must not extend over axle housing casting.

IMPORTANT: Wheel weights CAN NOT be

used when dual wheels are installed. Liquid
weight can only be added to the inner wheel
and front end weights can also be installed.

IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with all

equipment and ballast weight must never be
more than the maximum recommended
operating weight See Maximum Permitted
Operating Weights on Page 249 of this manual
Observe tyre capacities and any possible
PM019
legal limitations.
HALF TYPE WEIGHT

PM020
SOLID TYPE WEIGHT

Use the wheel weights as required to provide

safe and efficient tractor operation. Do not add
more weight to the rear wheels of your tractor
than is required to achieve the correct tractor
static weight distribution and the correct amount
of wheel slip.

See Tractor Weight Distribution on Page 159 of

this manual for recommendations on ballasting
procedures.

Page 164
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

Tyre Liquid Ballast

Use tyre liquid ballast as needed to provide safe When liquid ballast is used, inflate the tyres 0.14
and efficient tractor operation. See Tractor Weight bar (2 psi) more than the recommended
Distribution on Page 159 of this manual for pressure. This will compensate for aeration that
recommendations. The chart shows the liquid occurs when the tyre is in motion.
weight each tyre will hold when 75 percent filled
(filled to Valve Level), with water or calcium chloride When dual wheels are installed, use liquid ballast
and water solution. in the inside tyres only.

Calcium chloride (CaCl2) keeps the water from IMPORTANT: The total tractor weight with all
freezing. Water will start to freeze at 0°C (32°F). equipment and ballast weight must never be
more than the maximum recommend operating
weight. See Maximum Permitted Operating
Weights on Page 249 of this manual Observe
tyre capacities and any possible legal
limitations.

LIQUID BALLAST PER TYRE - LITRES AND KILOGRAMS

1 kg CaCl2 per 4.5 1.6 kg CaCl2 per 2.3 kg CaCl2 per
WATER ONLY
Litres of water 4.5 Litres of water 4.5 Litres of water
TYRE SIZE
LITRES TOTAL LITRES TOTAL LITRES TOTAL LITRES TOTAL
WATER WT kg WATER WT kg WATER WT kg WATER WT kg
11.2-24 91 91 83 103 76 107 72 115
12.4-24 113 113 106 132 98 140 95 151
13.6-24 144 144 129 160 121 172 113 181
18.4-26 299 299 276 342 257 365 242 387
14.9R28/14.9-28 182 182 163 205 154 216 145 232
14.9R30/14.9-30 189 189 163 205 154 216 145 232
16.9R30/16.9-30 277 277 254 315 236 339 227 357
18.4R30/18.4-30 336 336 309 384 290 414 272 436
12.4R32/12.4-32 131 131 122 154 118 165 113 181

TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST
16.9R34/16.9-34 309 309 281 352 263 376 250 402
18.4R34/18.4-34 378 378 344 427 322 456 306 490
12.4-36 140 140 122 154 118 165 113 181
13.6R36/13.6-36 182 182 163 205 154 216 145 232
13.6R38/13.6-38 213 213 195 244 186 264 172 280

1.Water will freeze at 0°C (32°F).

2.A solution of 0.91 kg (2 Ib) calcium chloride solution per 4.5 litres (1.2 US gal) of
water will give protection to -8°C (+13°F) and will freeze at -31 °C (-23°F).
3.A solution of 1.59 kg (3.5 Ib) calcium chloride solution per 4.5 litres (1.2 US gal) of
water will give protection to -26°C (-12°F) and will freeze at -47°C
(-52°F).
4.A solution of 2.27 kg (5 Ib) calcium chloride solution per 4.5 litres (1.2 US gal) of
water will give protection to -47°C (-52°F) and will freeze at -54°C (-62°F).
5.4.5 litres (1.2 US gal) of water weighs 4.5 kg (10 Ib).

NOTE: DO NOT use radiator type Anti-freeze in tyres.

Page 165
 TYRES/WHEELS/BALLAST

Filling Procedure

STEP 1 (Mixing The Solution)

Add the correct amount of calcium chloride

(CaCl2) into the correct amount of water, see
previous charts for the required degree of 1
protection from freezing.

WARNING: SLOWLY add calcium chloride

to water, stirring continuously. NEVER
ADD WATER TO CALCIUM CHLORIDE.
To do so will cause a violent reaction.
! When correctly mixed, the solution will
increase in temperature. Allow the solution
to cool before adding to the tyre. See your
authorized dealer for details.

STEP 2
2
Raise one side of the tractor and turn the wheel
so that the valve is at the top, see illustration
opposite.
3
STEP 3

Remove the valve core and connect the hand

pump.

STEP 4

Measure the amount of solution added to the tyre 5

and use the figures in the previous charts to 4
calculate the weight added.
DH97M216
STEP 5
1. AIR
2. WATER ENTERING TYRE
When sufficient weight has been added, remove
3. WATER SUPPLY
the pump. Install the valve core. Inflate the tyre to 4. AIR SUPPLY
the correct pressure. 5. AIR VENT

NOTE: When liquid ballast is used, inflate the tyres

0.14 bar (2 psi) more than the recommended
pressure. This will compensate for aeration that
occurs when the tyre is in motion.

Page 166
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
RECOMMENDATIONS BEFORE YOU SERVICE
Put a warning tag, as shown below, on or near the
WARNING: Before servicing, carefully key switch before carrying out servicing or repairs
read the instructions in this section. There to the tractor. Warning tags (publication number 2-
is a risk of injury or death if servicing is not 1000) are available from your dealer.
carried out or if the following instructions
are not followed correctly. If you do not
understand a service or adjustment REASON/RAISON

procedure see your dealer.

!
VERNUNFT/RAZON

! Before any adjustments are made carry

out the following:
1. Park the tractor on hard level ground
DO NOT OPERATE
and apply the parking brake. NE PAS UTILISER
2. Stop the engine and remove the key. NICHT BETREIBEN
NO UTILIZAR
3. Put blocks in front of and behind the
front and rear wheels.

WARNING: When handling lubricants (oil,

grease etc.) and other chemical products,
always follow instructions for their proper 2-1000

use. Use proper containers to collect fluid.

! Dispose of fluids and filters responsibly
and in accordance with the law. DO NOT
smoke or use an open flame during the Environment
service procedure. Use eye protection.
Before you service this machine and before you
Read the safety decals and information decals on dispose of the old fluids, lubricants and filters
this tractor. Read the operators manual. always consider the environment.
Understand the operation of the tractor before you
start servicing. DO NOT pour oil or fluids in the ground, down
drains or into containers that can leak.

Dispose of all old fluids, lubricants and filters in

accordance with local regulations.
Check with your local environmental recycling
center or your dealer for correct information.

B770996R
Plastic And Resin Parts
Use the correct safety clothing and safety Avoid using petrol, paraffin, paint thinner, etc.,
equipment. If you wear clothing that is too loose when cleaning plastic, e.g.; console, instrument
or do not use the correct safety equipment for cluster, monitors and gauges etc.
your job, you can be injured. Always wear
clothing that will not catch on objects. Extra Use ONLY water, mild soap and a soft cloth when
safety equipment that can be required includes you clean these parts.
hard hat, safety shoes, ear protection, eye or
face protection, heavy gloves and reflector Using petrol, paraffin, paint thinner etc., will
clothing. cause cracking or deformation of the part being
cleaned.
Establish where your nearest first aid kit and fire
extinguisher are located. Undertake suitable
training to make sure you know how the fire
extinguisher works.

Page 167
 ROUTINE SERVICING

SERVICE/HOURMETER

Engine Hourmeter
Use the engine hourmeter, along with the Service
Charts on the following pages, to service your
machine at the correct intervals.

With the key switch in the ON position, the engine

hourmeter (1) shows the actual hours the engine
has run the number after the decimal point is tenths
of an hour.

When the key switch is turned to the ACCESSORY

position, counterclockwise from off, the main digital
display (2) shows the next service interval at the top
and the time in hours elapsed at the bottom, the
MP01H051 engine hourmeter (1) will also show the actual
hours the engine has run.
All tractors continued value, operation and
reliability depend to a large extent on regular
servicing. McCormick tractors have been
designed to provide easy daily and routine
access.
2
When servicing your tractor use ONLY original
McCormick service parts, oils, lubricants,
coolants, filters etc. which are released by
McCormick or are McCormick Approved, to
avoid affecting the working life of this tractor.

Services must be carried out at varying Engine

1
Hour intervals, depending on which comes first,
see below for example.

Every 10 Hours, or daily

DS99G182
Every 50 Hours, or weekly NOTE: Prior to commencing any servicing
Every 100 Hours, or every two weeks procedures on the tractor, make sure the engine is
not running and the keyswitch is in the OFF
Every 250 Hours, or monthly position.
Every 500 Hours, or six monthly
Every 1000 Hours, or annually
Every 2000 Hours, or bi-ennial

Page 168
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
SERVICE ACCESS

STEP 1 Tool Box (If Equipped)

Park the tractor on hard, level ground and apply
the park brake. The tool box is located behind the cab steps on the
right hand side.
STEP 2

MD01K055 DP97E430

Pull the hood release lever. NOTE: Steps have been removed for
photographic purposes only.
STEP 3
To remove the tool box, do the following:

MD01K056
DP97E209
Push the front of the hood upward. The gas strut
will hold the hood in the upright position. Open the lid. Remove the retaining pin (1),
located in the center, back of the tool box.
IMPORTANT: When opening the hood in windy
conditions, put the front of the tractor towards Lift the tool box from the bottom outwards and
the wind. upwards.

WARNING: Replace all covers or guards

removed after servicing or cleaning the
! machine. NEVER operate the machine
with the covers or guards removed.

Page 169
 ROUTINE SERVICING

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

Engine
Oil Type.....................................................................................................McCormick Engine Oil, SAE 15W-40
Oil Capacity............................................................................................................... 7.3 Litres (2.0 US gallons)

Engine Oil Selection

Engine oils must meet the following minimum API

performance grades; CH-4 .

NOTE: Do not put Performance Additives or

other oil additive products in the engine oil. The
oil change intervals given in this manual are
according to tests with McCormick authorized
lubricants.

RB97F100

Oil Viscosities and Ambient Temperature Ranges

TROPIC SAE 20W-50

ALL SAE 15W-40

SAE 10W-30 WINTER

SAE 5W-30 ARCTIC

-40 -30 -20 -10 0 +10 +20 +30 +40 +50

(-40) (-22) (-4) (14) (+32) (+50) (+68) (+86) (104) (122)

TEMPERATURE RANGES IN DEGREES °C (°F)

NOTE: This lighter area indicates that the use of an engine oil pan
heater or an engine coolant heater is required when operating in

Cooling System
Coolant Mix .................................................. McCormick Universal Anti-Freeze, 33% to 50% Ethylene Glycol,
(depending on the market requirement)
Capacity .................................................................................................................. 17.5 Litres (4.6 US gallons)

Page 170
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
Fuel Tank
Fuel Type ................................................................................................................................. No.2 Diesel Fuel
Fuel Tank Capacity................................................................................................. 155 Litres (41.0 US gallons)

Transmission/Hydraulic System
Oil Type .................................................................................................................................... McCormick HTX
Refill Capacity -
XtraShift Transmissions
2WD................................................................................................................. 49.5 Litres (13.0 US gallons)
MFD ................................................................................................................ 52.0 Litres (13.7 US gallons)
Refill Capacity -
2 Speed Powershift and Synchromesh (Mechanical) Transmissions
2WD................................................................................................................... 34.5 Litres (9.1 US gallons)
MFD .................................................................................................................. 37.0 Litres (9.7 US gallons)

MFD Axle (If Equipped)

Oil Type ...................................................................................................... McCormick Multi-Purpose Gear Oil,
SAE 85W - 140 EP Gear Oil to API GL-5
or MIL-L-2105D Specification
Axle Differential Capacity ............................................................................................5.0 Litres (5.3 US quarts)
Axle Planetary Capacity (EACH)...............................................................................0.6 Litres (0.62 US quarts)

Front PTO (If Equipped)

Kitchin Front PTO
Oil Type................................................................................................................................ McCormick HTX
Capacity ..............................................................................................................0.65 Litres (0.69 US quarts)

Hydrac Front PTO

Oil Type....................................................................................... McCormick Super Universal, SAE 10W-30
Capacity ................................................................................................................0.75 Litres (0.8 US quarts)

Page 171
 ROUTINE SERVICING

SERVICE INTERVALS
S SERVICE REQUIRED
E
R
V
I
C S
E E
E G C
R D C C H
H
O P E R H L A
U A A A E E N
R G S I C A G
S E E N K N E
SERVICE POINTS
Front Wheel Nuts 150 X

Rear Wheel Nuts 158 X

Fuel Level 209 X

Engine Oil Level 175 X

10 Transmission/Hydraulic Oil Level 174 X

Pneumatic Trailer Brake Reservoir 176 X

Coolant Recovery Reservoir Level 175 X

Front PTO Oil Level - (See Note 6) 176 X

General Tractor Inspection - (See Note 1) - X

Air Pressure in Tyres 139 X

Fuel Water Trap - Fuel Filter 179 X

2WD Front Axle Grease Points - (See Notes 6 and 8) 177 X

50 MFD Front Axle Grease Points(See Notes 6 and 8) 177 X

Engine Air Filter Dust Valve - (See Notes 4 and 6) 179 X

(Must be changed every 1000 hours)

Radiator and Coolers 178 X

Cab Air Recirculation Filter 179 X

Rear Three Point Linkage - (See Note 8) 180 X

100 Front Three Point Linkage - (See Note 8) 180 X

Cab Air Intake Filter 181 X

Front PTO Oil - (See Notes 5, 6 and 7) 185 X

Auto Hitch Locking Latches - (See Notes 2 and 6) 185 X

MFD Axle Diff. and Planetary Oil - (See Note 6) 186 X

(Change at FIRST 250 Hours)

Compressor Belt 188 X

(Check Tension at FIRST 50 Hours)
250
Fan and Alternator Belt - (See Note 6) 188 X
(Check Tension at FIRST 50 Hours)

Battery(s) 187 X

Trailer Hitch, Bolt Torques - (See Notes 6) 187 X

Trailer Hitch, Moving parts - (See Notes 2, 6 and 8) 186 X

Drawbar Bolt Torques - (See Note 6) 186 X

Engine Oil and Oil Filter, Early Production Tractors - 189 X

(See Note 10)

Page 172
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
S SERVICE REQUIRED
E
R
V
I S
C E
E E
G C
H P R D C C H
O A E R H L A
U G A A E E N
R E S I C A G
S E N K N E
SERVICE POINTS
Engine Oil and Oil Filter, Later Production Tractors - 189 X
(See Note 10)

Engine Fuel Filter 191 X

500
Transmission/Hydraulic Oil Filter 190 X
(Change at FIRST 20 Hours)

Operators Presence Switch 193 X

(3 Speed Powershift Tractors ONLY)

Auto Hitch Lift Rod Adjustment - (See Notes 2 and 6) 194 X

2WD Front Wheel Bearing - (See Note 6) 195 X

MFD Drive Coupling - (See Note 6) 196 X

Engine Air Intake System 197 X

Engine Primary Air Filter - (See Notes 2 and 4) 197 X

Engine Secondary Air Filter 197 X

1000 Engine Air Filter Dust Valve 199 X

Transmission/Hydraulic Oil 200 X

In-Line Fuel Filter 201 X

MFD Axle Planetaries and Differential Oil - (See Note 6) 202 X

(Change at FIRST 250 Hours)

Fuel Injectors 205 X

Cab Intake Air Filter - (See Note 3) 203 X

Cooling System Anti-Freeze (yearly before winter) 207 X

Door Locks and Hinges - X

Engine Valve Clearances 196 X

2000 Coolant 206 X

NOTE 1: Check the tractor for leaks, rubbing hoses, loose bolts and trash build up.
Repair all leaks, hoses and tighten loose bolts before operation.
NOTE 2: Check for wear and function.
NOTE 3: In dusty conditions the cab filter will require more frequent cleaning.
NOTE 4: Also clean the filter element whenever the service monitor illuminates.
NOTE 5: Change at first 20 PTO operating hours.
NOTE 6: If equipped.
NOTE 7: After 250 PTO operating hours.
NOTE 8: In severe operating conditions, grease daily.
NOTE 9: After any wheel adjustment, check after 30 minutes, then every 10 hours until torques
stabilize.
NOTE 10: On early production tractors (with engine serial numbers starting AQ or AS) the engine oil
and filter change interval is 250 hours. HOWEVER on later production tractors (with
engine serial numbers starting RE or RG) the service interval increases to 500 hours.

Page 173
 ROUTINE SERVICING

10 HOURS OR DAILY SERVICE

Check Fuel Level

WARNING: Hydraulic oil or diesel fuel
leaking under pressure can penetrate the
skin and cause infection or other injury. To
prevent injury: release all pressure, before
disconnecting fluid lines. Before applying
pressure, make sure all connections are
! tight and components are in good
condition. Never use your hand to check for
suspected leaks under pressure. Use a
piece of cardboard or wood for this
purpose. If injured by leaking fluid, see your
doctor immediately.

DK98A017
Check Transmission/Hydraulic
Fill the fuel tank at the end of each day after work Oil Level
has been completed to prevent condensation in
the fuel tank. To check the transmission oil level, put the tractor
on level ground.
Diesel Fuel
Use a high grade diesel fuel. The use of a low IMPORTANT: It is recommended to check the
grade fuel will result in loss of engine power and oil level prior to starting the engine,
high fuel consumption. (transmission oil cold, prior to first daily use).
If the tractor has been running the
transmission oil MUST be allowed to settle
Fuel storage
(the time will vary depending upon how long
If you keep fuel in storage for a period of time, the tractor has been running).
you can get foreign material or water in the fuel
storage tank. Many engine problems are caused Make sure the dipstick (1) is pushed completely
by water in the fuel. in before checking the level.
Keep the fuel storage tank outside and keep the
fuel as cool as possible. Remove water from the
fuel storage tank at regular intervals. 2

IMPORTANT: Different grades of diesel fuel are

required for summer and winter operations.
See your fuel supplier for winter fuel
requirements in your area. 1

WARNING: Never refuel the machine

! when the engine is hot or running. Never
smoke while refueling.
DP98D185

If the oil level is below the FULL mark on the

WARNING: Engine fuel is flammable and dipstick, add the recommended oil in through the
can cause a fire or an explosion. DO NOT fill tube (2) located at the rear of the
! fill the fuel tank or service the fuel system transmission.
near an naked flame, welding, burning
cigars, cigarettes etc.

Page 174
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
10 HOURS OR DAILY SERVICE

Check Engine Oil Level Check Coolant Level

1 1

MD03K002 DP98A010

To check the engine oil level, put the tractor on Check the coolant level when the coolant is cold
level ground and stop the engine. and with the engine stopped. DO NOT REMOVE
THE RADIATOR CAP.
Wait for 15 minutes for the oil to settle before
checking the oil level.
The coolant level must be within the normal cold
Make sure the dipstick (1) is pushed completely range marks (1) on the reservoir. If the level is
down before checking the oil level. below the ADD mark, fill the reservoir to the top
mark with correct coolant mixture (this will
If the oil level is below the ADD mark, add oil,
depend upon market requirements).
through the filler tube (2), to raise the oil level to
the FULL mark. DO NOT raise the oil level above
the FULL mark. WARNING: Hot coolant can spray out if the
coolant recovery reservoir cap or radiator
cap is removed while system is still hot. DO
NOT REMOVE RADIATOR CAP. To
! remove the coolant recovery reservoir cap
or radiator cap, let system cool, turn cap to
first notch, then wait until pressure is
released. Scalding can result from fast
removal of radiator cap.

Page 175
 ROUTINE SERVICING

10 HOURS OR DAILY SERVICE

Front PTO (If Equipped) Drain Pneumatic Trailer Brake
Reservoirs (If Equipped)
Kitchin Front PTO

1
DP97G085
DP97E389
Operate the drain valve plunger under each
Put the tractor on level ground. reservoir to drain any water which has collected.

Check the level glass (1) located on the front left

hand side of the housing. Check Windshield Washer
If the oil level is low, remove the fill plug (2) and Reservoir Level
add the recommended oil type until the oil is level
with the bottom edge of the level glass. Install the
fill plug and tighten.

Hydrac Front PTO

DP98J220
1
If the fluid level is low fill the reservoir.

MD01K007

Put the tractor on level ground.

Remove the fill/level plug (1) and check the oil

level, which must be to the bottom edge of the
plug hole. Add the recommended oil type as
required. Install the plug.

Page 176
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
50 HOUR SERVICE
NOTE: Complete the 10 hour, (or daily), service plus the following.

Grease Points
NOTE: Use McCormick Multi-Purpose Lithium Grease.
NOTE: In severe conditions lubricate these points more frequently.

Two Wheel Drive (2WD) Front Axle

(If Equipped)

DP97C021

Front Axle Swivel - (1 point each side)

DP97C042
Mechanical Front Drive (MFD) Axle
Axle Pivot Pin

DP97E355
DP97C042
Axle Pivot Pins - (Front and Rear)
Steering Cylinder Trunnion

DP97E277
DP97C042
Steering Knuckle Swivel Pins -
Steering Cylinder and Rod Pivots (2 points each side)

Page 177
 ROUTINE SERVICING

50 HOUR SERVICE

Clean Grille Screens and STEP 4

Radiator Area
Clean the grille screens, air conditioning
condenser, oil cooler (if equipped) and radiator
area every 50 hours of operation, or more
frequently if required when operating in dirty
conditions.

IMPORTANT: Be careful not to bend or damage

the fins during cleaning.

IMPORTANT: If you clean using compressed air

use an air hose with a safety ON/OFF control
DP98A099
nozzle and ALWAYS WEAR FACE PROTECTION.
Pull the top of the oil cooler or air conditioning
WARNING: DO NOT steam clean any air condenser (if equipped) forward.
conditioning system parts while the system
is charged. The heat will cause the Clean as necessary.
! refrigerant to rise to a pressure that could
cause the system to explode.
Check Clutch Reservoir Level
To gain access:

STEP 1
Remove both side covers (if equipped).

STEP 2
Raise the hood, if equipped with a tilt hood.
Remove the hood if equipped with a fixed hood.

STEP 3

MD01L001

To check the level, put the tractor on level

ground. If the level is below minimum, fill the
reservoir to the maximum mark with McCormick
LHM plus Clutch/Brake Fluid.

DP98A098

Loosen the condenser retaining bolts, at both

sides of the oil cooler or air conditioning
condenser (if equipped).

Page 178
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
50 HOUR SERVICE

Drain Fuel Filter Clean Cab Air Recirculation Filter

(Deluxe Cab Only)
STEP 1

MD03K006

The drain plug is located on the bottom of the fuel

filter. Loosen the plug to let any water or
DP96J436
sediment drain from the filter. Tighten the plug
Remove the four screws from the recirculation
after the water has drained.
grille. Remove the recirculation grille and the
filter.
IMPORTANT: Dispose of fuel in accordance
with local regulations. DO NOT drain on the STEP 2
ground, into a drain or into a container that
can leak. Be responsible for the environment. Clean the filter using mild soap and water. Rinse
with clear water and squeeze out the excess.

STEP 3
Check Engine Air Filter Dust Valve
Install the filter in the recirculation grille.
(If Equipped)
+ STEP 4
Squeeze the rubber dust valve (1) under the filter
Install the grille and filter. Install and tighten the
body cover to remove any dust. Install a new dust
screws.
valve if damaged, or not operating correctly.

NOTE: A new rubber dust valve MUST be

installed every 1000 hours.

Page 179
 ROUTINE SERVICING

100 HOUR SERVICE

NOTE: Complete the items in the 10 hour, (or daily) and 50 hour service plus the following.

Grease Points
NOTE: Use McCormick Multi-Purpose Lithium Grease.
NOTE: In severe conditions lubricate these points more frequently.

Rear 3 Point Hitch Front 3 Point Hitch (If equipped)

NOTE: Lubricate if not used frequently and
also after washing with water pressure hose.
Kitchin Hitch

DP98D186

Turnbuckles,
2 points, 1 each side
DH97N056
Lower links, 4 points*.
Hydrac Hitch

DP97D108
Stabilizers, if equipped.

MD01K006
Lower links, Front

MD01K009
Lower links, Rear - One each side

Page 180
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
100 HOUR SERVICE
Check and Clean Cab Air Intake For optimum performance we recommend that the
filter is serviced sooner if used in extreme
Filter conditions. Replaced with genuine McCormick
Check and clean the intake air filter every 100 parts if damaged or when the filter can not be
hours or more often if needed. Keep the air filter cleaned.
clean for efficient operation of the heating and
cooling system. Replace with genuine McCormick IMPORTANT: Respiratory protection equipment
parts if damaged or when the filter can not be and protective clothing appropriate to the
cleaned. environment that the filter has been in contact with
MUST be used during the cleaning of the filter.
WARNING: Cab air filters remove dust in
the air, but are not capable of removing Deluxe Cab
chemicals used in spraying crops or in
weed control. Many chemicals used for STEP 1
these purposes are toxic when improperly
used, and can be hazardous to operators
! and others in the area. Follow the
instructions of manufacturers of both the
equipment and the chemicals regarding
prohibitions against inhalation of dust or
spray, personal hygiene practices, and
other precautions noted by the
manufacturers.

IMPORTANT: Always wear protective clothing,

e.g.: overalls, goggles, gloves and face mask
when preparing equipment for chemical spraying DP97A075
operations and ALWAYS follow the chemical
Open the filter cover by pulling the front lower
manufacturers instructions.
edge out.
DELUXE CAB - Remove all protective items and
store outside the operators cab in the locker on
STEP 2
the spraying equipment before entering the
tractor operators cab.
LOW PROFILE CAB - This tractor CANNOT be
used for chemical spraying operations without
wearing full protective clothing while in the
operators cab.

The air intake filters should be checked weekly or

daily if used in extreme conditions. The standard
paper element has the following efficiency with a
maximum differential pressure increase of 2 mbar: -
SAE coarse 99.5%.

NOTE: This element gives no protection against DP96J439

chemical spray. Push the catch down.

Continued ....
WARNING: Do not stand on the tractor to
service the filter, use the correct equipment
! for a safe standing platform or injury can
result.

Page 181
 ROUTINE SERVICING

100 HOUR SERVICE

STEP 3 METHOD B

DP97A090 DP96J446

Remove the filter element and clean the filter Use the compressed air method to remove the
housing. dust. Move the flow of air up and down the clean
side of the filter. Maximum air pressure must not
STEP 5 be more than 2 bar (30 psi). Too much pressure
will damage the filter.
The filter element can be cleaned by following
IMPORTANT: Always use an air hose with a
two methods:
safety ON/OFF control nozzle and ALWAYS
A. By tapping against a flat surface. WEAR FACE PROTECTION.
or
STEP 6
B. By blowing with compressed air.

METHOD A

DP96J438

Install the filter element into the filter cover. Push

T93787 the catch (1) up. Close the filter cover.
DP96J447

When most of the dirt is dust, this method can be

used to clean the filter. Tap the dirty side of the
filter against a flat surface. Do not use excessive
force that can cause damage to the filter.

Page 182
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
100 HOUR SERVICE
Low Profile Cab STEP 2

IMPORTANT: Respiratory protection equipment

and protective clothing appropriate to the
environment that the filter has been in contact
with MUST be used during the cleaning of the
filter.

STEP 1

DD97E261
LP CAB WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING

Slide the filter element out.

DD97E258
LP CAB WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING

MD02L141
LP CAB WITH AIR CONDITIONING

Release the retaining catch and remove the filter

element.

IMPORTANT: If at any time the tractor has

MD02L140
been used for chemical spraying operations,
LP CAB WITH AIR CONDITIONING remove the filter and access cover
immediately from the cab. Take care not to
Loosen the retaining screws from the filter deposit any dirt from the filter and access
access cover and remove. cover on the cab interior.

STEP 3
Clean the filter housing.

STEP 4
The filter element can be cleaned by following
two methods:
A. By tapping against a flat surface.
or
B. By blowing with compressed air.

Continued ....

Page 183
 ROUTINE SERVICING

100 HOUR SERVICE

METHOD A STEP 5

T93787
DP96J447 DD97E261
LP CAB WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING
When most of the dirt is dust, this method can be
used to clean the filter. Tap the dirty side of the
filter against a flat surface. Do not use excessive
force that can cause damage to the filter.

METHOD B

MD02L141
LP CAB WITH AIR CONDITIONING

Install the clean filter element and secure.

Replace the access cover and tighten the
retaining screws.
DP96J446

Use the compressed air method to remove the

dust. Move the flow of air up and down the clean
side of the filter. Maximum air pressure must not
be more than 2 bar (30 psi). Too much pressure
will damage the filter.

IMPORTANT: Always use an air hose with a

safety ON/OFF control nozzle and ALWAYS
WEAR FACE PROTECTION.

Page 184
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
250 HOUR SERVICE
NOTE: Complete the items in the 10 hour, (or daily) and 50 services plus the following.

Grease Points Hydrac Front PTO

NOTE: Use McCormick Multi-Purpose Lithium

Grease. 2
NOTE: In severe conditions lubricate these
points more frequently.
Auto Hitch Locking Latches

1
MD001K007

To change the power takeoff oil, put the tractor on

level ground. Put a suitable container under the
drain plug (1) and remove. (Drain plug located at
the rear, underside of PTO Housing. See insert).
DP97D110
For best results drain the oil after operation when
Locking Latches and Rear Pivot Points. the oil is warm.
Install the drain plug.
Change Front PTO Oil (If Equipped) Remove fill/level plug (2) and add the
Kitchin Front PTO recommended oil type through hole until the oil is
level with the bottom edge of the hole. Wait
approximately 5 minutes. Check the oil level
2 again and add oil as necessary. Install the fill/
level plug.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil in accordance with

local regulations. DO NOT DRAIN THE OIL
3 ON THE GROUND OR INTO A DRAIN. Be
responsible for the environment.

1
DP97E389

To change the power takeoff oil, put the tractor on

level ground. Put a suitable container under the
drain plug and remove plug (1) located under the
housing.
For best results drain the oil when the oil is warm.
Install the drain plug.
Add the recommended oil type through the fill
plug hole (2) until the oil is level with the bottom
edge of the level glass (3). Wait approximately 5
minutes. Check the oil level again and add oil as
necessary. Install the fill plug.

Page 185
 ROUTINE SERVICING

250 HOUR SERVICE

Check Differential Check Drawbar Support Bracket

Oil Level Bolts Torque
Check the drawbar support bracket bolt torque
after every 250 hours of operation.

1. Tighten bolts (1) to a torque of 135 to 152 Nm

(100 to 112 lb ft).

2. Tighten bolt (2) to a torque of 45 to 50 Nm (33

to 37 lb ft).

DP97N050

To check the differential oil level, put the tractor

on level ground. Remove the fill/level plug (1).
The oil must be level with the bottom edge of the 1
1 2
hole. Add the recommended oil type to raise the
oil to the correct level if required. Install the plug DI97F225
and tighten.
Grease Trailer Hitch Slide Rails
and Hitch Coupling Operating
Check Planetary Oil Level
Parts.
1. Every 250 hours of operation, the hitch should
be thoroughly cleaned and all moving parts,
including the inner slide rails, should be
greased to protect from corrosion.

2. Make sure that all moving parts move freely

and operate correctly.

NOTE: In extreme operating conditions it may

2 be necessary to clean and grease the hitch
more frequently to ensure correct operation.

DP97E394
IMPORTANT: The hitch clevis and the pivot pin
are sufficiently greased by the factory to
To check the planetary oil level, park the tractor
ensure correct operation for a long period of
on level ground.
time. However, under severe operating
Turn the wheel hub until the plug (2) is in the 3 or conditions, it may be necessary to grease
9 o'clock position. Remove the plug and check these points more often. If necessary, this
the oil level. The oil must be level with the bottom should ONLY be carried out by your Dealer.
of the plug hole, add the recommended oil type to
the correct level if required. Install the plug and
tighten.

Page 186
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
250 HOUR SERVICE
Check the Torque of the Trailer Batteries
Hitch Bolts (If Equipped) Check the electrolyte level in each cell if your
tractor is equipped with a Low Maintenance
Check the torque of all the retaining bolts for ALL battery.
types of hitches at pre-delivery and every 250
hours of operation.
WARNING: BATTERY ACID CAUSES
Tighten bolts (1) to a torque of 405 to 460 Nm
SEVERE BURNS. Batteries contain
(300 to 340 lb ft).
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
Tighten bolts (2) to a torque of 360 to 405 Nm eyes or clothing. Antidote:
(266 to 300 lb ft). EXTERNAL - Flush with water.
INTERNAL - Drink large quantities of
Tighten bolts (3) to a torque of 230 to 260 Nm
water or milk. DO NOT induce vomiting.
(169 to 191 ft).
Seek medical attention immediately.
! EYES - Flush with water for 15 minutes
1 and get medical attention immediately.
BATTERIES PRODUCE EXPLOSIVE
GASES. Keep sparks, flame and cigarettes
away. Ventilate when charging or using in
enclosed space. Always shield eyes when
working near batteries. KEEP OUT OF
REACH OF CHILDREN.

2
Check Electrolyte Level
STEP 1

DI97F224

1 1

3 3
DR98D199

Remove the battery box lid screws, front and

rear, then lift the lid clear.

NOTE: The steps and tool box (If Equipped)

DI97F225
have been removed for photographic purposes
only.
Continued ....

Page 187
 ROUTINE SERVICING

250 HOUR SERVICE

STEP 2 Check Drive Belts Tension
Check the tension of ALL drive belts, on the
longest run of the belt (1), every 50 hours during
the first 100 hours of operation until constant,
then every 250 hours of operation.
The tension is correct when the belt deflects 10
mm (0.5 inch) on the longest run of the belt with a
thumb pressure of 4.5 kgf (10 lbf) applied.

Check the belt for cuts and wear. Replace as

necessary.

DP97E445

Remove cell cover plates carefully.

Add distilled water to just cover the top of the
separators. DO NOT OVER FILL. Do not use
water which contains minerals. The level should
be 3 to 6 mm (0,12 to 0.24 inch) below vent well.

When distilled water is added at ambient

temperatures below 0oC (32oF) the batteries
must be charged immediately to mix the water
and electrolyte or the water will freeze, because
the water will stay on top of the electrolyte.

Battery Cables and Terminals

The battery terminals must be kept clean and
tight. Remove all corrosion with a wire brush,
then wash with a weak solution of baking soda or
ammonia. Put some petroleum jelly or light
grease on terminals to prevent more corrosion.

Page 188
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
250/500* HOUR SERVICE
Change Engine Oil and Filter STEP 2

*NOTE: On early production tractors (with

engine serial numbers starting AQ or AS)
the engine oil and filter change interval is
250 hours. HOWEVER on later production
tractors (with engine serial numbers
starting RE or RG) the service interval
increases to 500 hours.

To change the engine oil, put the tractor on level

ground and stop the engine.
NOTE: For best results change the oil when MD03K004
the engine is warm.
Using a strap wrench, turn the oil filter
counterclockwise to remove.
WARNING; Avoid contact with hot oil. Do
not change a hot filter due to risk of burning STEP 3
! skin on hands, wait until temperature is
below 50°C (122°F).

STEP 1

MD03K005

Apply clean oil to the gasket on the new filters.

Install the filters. Turn the filters clockwise until
1
the gasket comes in contact with the filter head.
MD03K003 Tighten the filters an additional one half turn by
Put a suitable size container (see page 170 for hand.
engine capacity) under the drain plug (1). IMPORTANT: Only use a McCormick approved
Remove the drain plug and drain the oil. Take oil filter, these filters have been specifically
care of hot oil when draining. designed to provide superior engine
protection.
IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil and filters in
accordance with local regulations. DO NOT IMPORTANT: DO NOT use a filter wrench to
drain the oil on the ground, into a drain, or put install the oil filter or you can cause damage
into a container that can leak. Be responsible to the gasket and filter.
for the environment.
STEP 4
Install a new seal on the drain plug (1).
Install the drain plug in the crankcase and
tighten.
Fill with the correct grade of engine oil, to the
correct level, see engine oil selection.

Page 189
 ROUTINE SERVICING

500 HOUR SERVICE

NOTE: Complete the items in the 10 hour (or daily), 50, 100 and 250 hour services plus the
following. On later production tractors, with engine serial numbers starting RE or RG the engine
oil and filter change interval is 250 hours, as decribed on page 190.

Change Transmission/Hydraulic Oil Filter

2 1

3 5
6
4 5

MS02E059

1. MULTI CONTROL VALVE 4. WASHER

2. FILTER HOUSING 5. “O” RING SEAL
3. FILTER RETAINING BOLT 6. FILTER ELEMENT

See page 200 if the transmission oil is to be STEP 6

changed. Install the assembly with new "o" rings onto the
Hydraulic System Filter Manifold. Tighten the
STEP 1 retaining bolt to 16 to 21 Nm (12 to 16 lb ft). DO
Park the machine on hard level ground, apply the NOT over tighten.
park brake and stop the engine.
STEP 7
STEP 2 Operate the hydraulic system and steering system
Place a container under the Multi- Control Valve (1). several times.

STEP 3 STEP 8
Remove the retaining bolt (4) and filter housing (3). Check the transmission oil level.

STEP 4 STEP 9
Remove and discard the old filter element (7) and Start the engine. Check for oil leaks around the
"o" rings (6). drain plugs and oil filter and the correct operation
of all systems.
IMPORTANT: Dispose of used oil and filters in
accordance with local regulations. Be
responsible for the environment.

STEP 5
Install a new filter element.
IMPORTANT: Only use a McCormick approved
hydraulic oil filter, these filters have been
specifically designed to provide superior
transmission/hydraulic system protection.

Page 190
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
500 HOUR SERVICE
STEP 4
Change Fuel Filter

WARNING: Engine fuel is flammable and

can cause a fire or an explosion. DO NOT
! fill the fuel tank or service the fuel system
near an naked flame, welding, burning
cigars, cigarettes etc.

STEP 1
Clean the filter head, filter and engine area next
to the filter before removing the filter.

STEP 2 MD03K008

Put clean oil or grease on the filter gasket of the

new filter before installing.
Install the filter by hand. Turn the filter until the
gasket contacts the filter head then turn a further
1/2 turn.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT fill the new filter with
fuel before installing.
IMPORTANT: Only use a McCormick approved
fuel filter, these filters have been specifically
designed to provide superior engine
1 protection.
MD03K006
STEP 5
Loosen the drain plug (1) on the bottom of the
filter to drain any water. Fill the fuel tank and remove air from the fuel
system. See Fuel System Air Removal on page
STEP 3 192.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT crank the engine before
removing all the air from the fuel system or the fuel
injection pump can be damaged.

MD03K007

Use a filter wrench to remove the filter.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of filter in accordance with
local regulations. DO NOT drain fuel onto the
ground, into a drain or into a container that can
leak. Be responsible for the environment.

Page 191
 ROUTINE SERVICING

500 HOUR SERVICE

Remove Air From Fuel System
Air can enter the fuel system in the following STEP 3
situations:
A. If the fuel tank becomes empty or is low on fuel. 2
B. After fuel system parts have been removed for
service or repairs.
C. If the tractor has been in storage for a long period of
time.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT crank the engine before
removing all the air from the fuel system or the fuel
injection pump can be damaged.

On later production tractors (engine serial

numbers starting RE or RG) no fuel system
priming should be necessary as there is an DK98A054
electric transfer pump which automatically
Loosen the banjo connection bolt (2) on top of
operates and is controlled by the electronic
the fuel filter.
control module.
Turn the keyswitch to the ON position, but do STEP 4
NOT start the engine. The electric transfer pump
will run and purge air from the system. Keep the
key in this position for approximately 60 seconds.
After 60 seconds start the engine and check for
leaks.

On early production tractors (engine serial

numbers starting AQ or AS) use the following
procedure to remove air from the fuel system.

STEP 1
Make sure there is fuel in the tank, check the
gauge.
MD01H054
STEP 2 Operate the hand primer pump to fill the fuel
filter. Tighten the air screw when fuel with no air
bubbles flows from the screw.
NOTE: If the primer pump cannot be activated,
turn the engine crankshaft a small amount.

DP96J332

Turn the key switch to ON to energize the cut off

solenoid.

Page 192
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
500 HOUR SERVICE
STEP 5 Check Function of the Operator
Presence Switch
(XtraShift Tractors ONLY)
1
Check the switch for correct function every 500
hours of operation or at least once annually.
When doing the following checks, do so in a clear
open area with no other persons or objects near
the tractor:

STEP 1
DS97E427
While sitting on the operator’s seat, with the
If equipped with thermostart, loosen the pipe
engine running at low idle speed, and the F-N-R
union (1) at the cold starting aid connection on
lever in NEUTRAL, put the transmission into 1st
the intake manifold. Operate the hand primer
range and release the clutch pedal. Stand up out
pump until air free fuel (no bubbles) flows from
of the operator’s seat while holding onto the
the union. Tighten the union.
steering wheel and move the F-N-R lever from
NEUTRAL to either FORWARD or REVERSE.
STEP 6
The Neutral indicator “N” light will illuminate. The
tractor should not move. If the tractor moves
under power, see your dealer for repair.
2
STEP 2

While sitting on the operator’s seat, with the

engine running at low idle speed, put the F-N-R
lever in FORWARD, the transmission in 1st range
and release the clutch pedal to start the tractor
moving. Stand up out of the operator’s seat while
holding onto the steering wheel, and move the F-
DS97E428 N-R lever out of the FORWARD position into the
Loosen two of the injector pipes (2) at the REVERSE position. The Neutral indicator “N”
injectors. Operate the starter motor until air free light should illuminate. The tractor should stop
fuel flows. Tighten the injector pipes (do not over (default to Neutral). If the tractor does not default
tighten). to Neutral, see your dealer immediately for
repair.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT operate the starter motor
for long periods or you could cause damage to IMPORTANT: If the operator presence switch
starter motor, battery and fuel injection pump. circuit is bypassed, the electronic system will
sense the change and the master warning
STEP 7 lamp will illuminate.
Start the engine and check for fuel leaks around
the filter, the fuel lines and fittings.
If the engine does not run correctly, repeat the air
removal procedure.
IMPORTANT: Run the engine at low idle for a
minimum of two minutes after removing air, to
prevent any damage to the fuel injection system.

WARNING: Never start the engine in a

! closed building. Proper ventilation is
required under all circumstances.

Page 193
 ROUTINE SERVICING

500 HOUR SERVICE

Check/Adjust Auto Hitch (If Equipped)
As necessary or at least every 500 hours check STEP 6
the operation of the auto hitch and make sure the
locking latches engage and the hitch is operating
correctly.

STEP 1
Connect a loaded trailer to the auto hitch.

STEP 2
Raise the three point linkage to maximum height.
The locking latches should spring into the locked
position when the hitch reaches maximum height. 1

DD96H235
WARNING: When checking the operation
of the auto hitch, stay well clear of moving Remove the cotter pin (1) and disconnect the lift
! parts or injury can result. rod at the lower end.

STEP 7
WARNING: Never operate the engine in a
! closed building. Proper ventilation is
required under all circumstances.

If the latches do not lock, adjust both lift rods

equally, as follows:

STEP 3
Disconnect the loaded trailer.

STEP 4
Raise the three point linkage to maximum height.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the lift arms are at DP97E199
maximum height before adjusting the lift rods. Turn clockwise to shorten the lift rod and
counterclockwise to lengthen the lift rod.
STEP 5
Put all controls in the NEUTRAL position. Turn off STEP 8
the engine and remove the key. Connect the lift rod and apply the cotter pin.

STEP 9
Do steps 1 to 3 to check the lift rods have been
adjusted correctly and the locking latches lock.

IMPORTANT: If the lift rods are over adjusted

the tractor hydraulics will be under constant
pressure causing damage to the hydraulic
system.

Page 194
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
1000 HOUR SERVICE
NOTE: Have your authorized McCormick dealer complete the 1000 Hour Service. The dealer
engineer should complete the items in the 10 hour (or daily), 50, 100, 250 and 500 hour services
plus the following.

Grease Two Wheel Drive Front Wheel Bearing

7 6

4
2

1
3

DS76C128

STEP 1 STEP 3
Remove the hub cap (1), cotter pin (2) and nut
Park the machine on hard level ground, apply the
(3).
park brake and stop the engine. Put blocks in
front of and behind the rear wheels.
STEP 4
STEP 2 Remove the washer (4), outer bearing (5) and
front wheel hub assembly (6).

STEP 5
Clean and examine bearings (5 & 7) and dust
seal (8) for damage, replace if necessary.

STEP 6
Fill the inner bearing (7) and dirt seal (8) with
grease.

STEP 7
Part fill the hub (6) with grease and install.
DP97C129
Continued ....
Loosen the wheel nuts. Use a hydraulic jack under
the front axle, raise the tractor and remove the
wheel. Support the tractor on a suitable axle stand.

Page 195
 ROUTINE SERVICING

1000 HOUR SERVICE

STEP 8 Grease MFD Drive Coupling
Fill the outer bearing (5) with grease and install
NOTE: Use McCormick Multi-Purpose Lithium
the washer (4) and nut (3).
Grease.
NOTE: A good quality Lithium based grease to
NL.G.I. No.2 consistency is recommended for
temperatures 0°C and above. Temperatures
below 0°C use a good quality Lithium based
grease to NL.G.I. No.1 consistency.

STEP 9
Tighten the nut (3) to a torque of 95 Nm while
rotating the hub to seat the bearings.

STEP 10
Loosen the nut then tighten to a torque of 68 Nm
(50 lb ft) for Adjustable Swept Back Axles or 34
Nm (25 lb ft) for Adjustable Straight Axles. J02820

STEP 11 The MFD Drive shaft shield must be removed to

gain access to the grease point.
Install the cotter pin. The nut can be loosened 1/4
of a turn or more if necessary to fit the pin.

STEP 12 Engine Valves

Have your dealer check the engine valve
Install the hub cap. DO NOT fill the hub cap with clearances.
grease unless operating in rice fields or other
severe wet conditions.

Page 196
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
1000 HOUR SERVICE

Check Engine Air Induction The primary (outer) filter is a high capacity filter
designed to provide optimum protection to the
System engine.

Check all hoses for damage and that hose The primary filter can be cleaned as required
clamps are tight, correct torque between filter changes. See the following pages for
= 3.4 Nm (2.5 lb ft). service procedure.

Filter Restriction Indicator Lamp The secondary (inner) filter gives extra protection
to the engine if there is damage to the primary
When the air filter restriction indicator lamp (1) on filter.
the instrument cluster illuminates, the primary
(outer) filter element needs cleaning. Service the IMPORTANT: THE SECONDARY (INNER) FILTER
element after the days work is completed. MUST NOT BE CLEANED. REPLACE THE
FILTER IF DAMAGED OR DIRTY, OR AT THE
THIRD CLEANING OF THE PRIMARY FILTER.
1

DS99G183

NOTE: If the air filter restriction indicator lamp

illuminates after the primary filter has been 2
serviced, check the following possible causes:
DP97C090
A. Secondary (inner) element is dirty.
B. Grille screen is dirty. 1. PRIMARY (OUTER) FILTER ELEMENT
2. SECONDARY (INNER) FILTER ELEMENT
NOTE: If the air filter restriction indicator lamp
still illuminates and the air induction system is IMPORTANT: Only use McCormick approved
clean, see your dealer to check the restriction air filters, these filters have been specifically
indicator sending unit. designed to provide superior engine
protection.

Page 197
 ROUTINE SERVICING

1000 HOUR SERVICE

Service Engine Air Filter
STEP 1

Pull the yellow locking tab (1) out, turn the cover
(2) counterclockwise and remove.
5
STEP 2

Pull out the primary (outer) filter element (3).

STEP 3
4
Pull out the secondary (inner) filter element (4), if
it is to be changed.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove the secondary

(inner) element unless it is to be changed.

STEP 4

Clean the inside of the filter body (5).

1
IMPORTANT: Dispose of filters correctly in
accordance with local regulations. Be
responsible for the environment.
3
STEP 5

Install a new secondary (inner) element (4), if

necessary or after the third cleaning of the
primary filter (3). Apply talcum powder or similar
to the inner seal face before installing the filter. 2
Install with closed end outwards.

NOTE: NEVER use a petroleum base lubricant

on the seal area. Petroleum lubricant could
“glue” the cover to the element seal and 6
damage the element. MR01E009

Page 198
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
1000 HOUR SERVICE
STEP 6 STEP 8
Before installing the primary (outer) element,
apply talcum powder or similar to the inner seal
face before installing the filter. Install with closed
end outwards. Install the primary (outer) element,
closed end outwards.
NOTE: NEVER use a petroleum base lubricant
on the seal area. Petroleum lubricant could
“glue” the cover to the element seal and
damage the element.

STEP 9
DP96J426 Install the air cleaner cover, rotate clockwise and
push the locking tab back into position to lock the
If most of the dirt is dry, clean the primary
cover in place.
element with compressed air from the inside of
the element to the outside. STEP 7
Keep the air nozzle approximately 130 mm (5
inches) away from the element and move the
nozzle up and down while turning the element.
IMPORTANT: The air pressure must not be
more than 207 kPa, 2 bar (30 psi). Use an air
hose with a safety ON/OFF control nozzle and
always wear face protection. 6
STEP 7

DK98A049

Change the rubber dust valve (6), if equipped.

DP96J427

To check the clean element for damage or holes,

put a lamp inside the element and turn the
element. Visually check the rubber gasket for
damage. Check the metal cover and filter
material for damage. Replace an element that is
damaged.
IMPORTANT: Do not run the engine with the
filters removed.

Page 199
 ROUTINE SERVICING

1000 HOUR SERVICE

Change Transmission/Hydraulic Oil
STEP 1 STEP 4
Put the tractor on hard level ground, apply the park
brake and stop the engine.

STEP 2

J02816
1
Remove the drain plug from the PTO housing.
NOTE: The PTO housing drain plug (3) is covered
by the auto hitch (which has to be lowered) or the
DP97C002
drawbar, if equipped, (which has to be removed).
Remove the front drain plug.
The photograph above shows the front drain plug STEP 5
on a 2WD tractor. Install and tighten the drain plugs after the oil has
On tractors equipped with MFD, the drive shaft drained.
shield must be removed to gain access to the IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil and filters in
front drain plug. accordance with local regulations. DO NOT
drain the oil on the ground, into a drain or into
STEP 3 a container that can leak. Be responsible for
the environment.

STEP 6

2
2

1
D11233

Remove the drain plug (2) from the MFD transfer

gearbox (if equipped).
DP98D185

Remove the fill plug (1) and fill the transmission

with the recommended oil to the correct level.
Install a new transmission housing breather (2).

Page 200
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
1000 HOUR SERVICE
STEP 7 Change In-line Fuel Filter

DP98D185

DP97D187
Check the oil Level.
Make a note of the direction of the arrow on the
IMPORTANT: It is recommended to check the
filter (1).
oil level prior to starting the engine. If the
tractor has been running the transmission oil Loosen the filter hose clips and remove the filter.
MUST be allowed to settle (the time will vary
Install the new filter, making sure the arrow on
depending upon how long the tractor has been
the filter is pointing in the correct direction.
running, hot or cold oil etc.).

Make sure the dipstick is completely in before

checking the level.
If the oil level is below the FULL mark on the
dipstick, add the necessary oil.

Page 201
 ROUTINE SERVICING

1000 HOUR SERVICE

Change Differential Oil Change MFD Planetaries Oil
STEP 1 STEP 1
Put the tractor on level ground and put a suitable
size container under the drain plug.

STEP 2

DP97E395

Park the tractor on level ground and turn each

hub until the plug (1) is at the bottom.
1
DP97N050 STEP 2
Remove the drain plug (1), located on the bottom Put a suitable size container under the plug.
of the axle housing at the rear, and drain the oil. Remove the plug. For best results drain the oil
For best results drain the oil when the oil is warm when the oil is warm (after operation).
after operation.
STEP 3
IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil and filters in
accordance with local regulations. DO NOT drain After the oil has drained, turn each wheel hub
the oil on the ground, into a drain or put in a until the plug is at the 3 or 9 o'clock position. Add
container that can leak. Be responsible for the the recommended oil type until the oil is level
environment. with the bottom edge of the plug hole. Wait
approximately 5 minutes for the oil to settle, then
STEP 3 check the oil level again and add oil if necessary.
Install the drain plug and tighten.
STEP 4
STEP 4 Install the plug and tighten.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of oil and filters in

accordance with local regulations. DO NOT
drain the oil on the ground, into a drain or put
in a container that can leak. Be responsible
for the environment.

DP97N050

Remove the fill/level plug (2). Add the

recommended oil type until the oil is level with
the bottom edge of the hole. Wait approximately
5 minutes. Check the oil level again and add oil
as necessary.
Install the fill/level plug and tighten.

Page 202
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
1000 HOUR SERVICE
Change Cab Air Intake Filter STEP 4

IMPORTANT: Respiratory protection equipment

and protective clothing appropriate to the
environment that the filter has been in contact with
MUST be used during the cleaning of the filter.

Deluxe Cab

STEP 1

DP97A070
Remove the old element from the metal retainer.
IMPORTANT: The old element MUST be put into a
sealed container and disposed of in accordance with
local regulations. Be responsible for the environment.

STEP 5

DP97A075

Open the filter cover by pulling the front lower

edge out.

STEP 2

DP97A071
Install the new element into the retainer making
sure the rubber surround is pressed firmly inside
the retainer rim and the retaining lugs are located
in the slots in the retainer.
NOTE: Replace the element with a genuine
McCormick part.

STEP 6
DP97A090

Push the catch down, see insert.

Remove the filter element assembly and clean
the filter housing.

DP96J438
Install the new filter assembly and push the catch
(1) up. Close the cover.

Page 203
 ROUTINE SERVICING

1000 HOUR SERVICE

Change Cab Air Intake Filter STEP 2

(Cont’d)
IMPORTANT: Respiratory protection equipment
and protective clothing appropriate to the
environment that the filter has been in contact with
MUST be used during the cleaning of the filter.

Low Profile Cab

STEP 1

DD97E261
LP CAB WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING

Slide the filter element out.

DD97E258

LP CAB WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING

MD02L141
LP CAB WITH AIR CONDITIONING

Release the retaining catch and remove the filter

element.

IMPORTANT: If at any time the tractor has been

used for chemical spraying operations, remove the
filter and access cover immediately from the cab.
Take care not to deposit any dirt from the filter and
MD02L140
access cover on the cab interior.
LP CAB WITH AIR CONDITIONING

Loosen the retaining screws from the filter STEP 3

access cover and remove. Clean the filter housing.

STEP 4
Install new filter element.
NOTE: Replace the element with a genuine
McCormick part.
IMPORTANT: The old element MUST be put into a
sealed container and disposed of in accordance
with local regulations. Be responsible for the
environment.

Page 204
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
1000 HOUR SERVICE
STEP 5 Check Condition of Fuel Injectors
The fuel injectors must not be cleaned. New
injectors must be fitted by your dealer if there is
damage or a fault occurs as listed below:

● Engine will not start or is difficult to start.

● Not enough power.
● Engine misfires or runs erratically.
● High fuel consumption.
● Black exhaust smoke.
DD97E261
LP CAB WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING
● Engine knocks or vibration.
● Excessive engine temperature.

MD02L141
LP CAB WITH AIR CONDITIONING

Install the clean filter element and secure.

Replace the access cover and tighten the
retaining screws.

Page 205
 ROUTINE SERVICING

2000 HOUR SERVICE

NOTE: Have your authorized McCormick dealer complete the 2000 Hour Service. The dealer
engineer should complete the items in the 10 hour (or daily), 50, 100, 250 and 500 hour services
and the items in the 1000 hour service plus the following.

Change Engine Coolant IMPORTANT: Dispose of drained coolant

responsibly. DO NOT pour on the ground or
STEP 1 into a drain. Be responsible for the
Remove the radiator cap slowly. environment.

STEP 4
WARNING: Hot coolant can spray out if the
coolant recovery reservoir cap or radiator Close the radiator drain valve (2) and install the
cap is removed while system is hot. DO NOT drain plug (1) when the system is empty.
REMOVE RADIATOR CAP. To remove the
! coolant recovery reservoir cap or radiator STEP 5 (Early Production Tractors ONLY)
cap, let system cool, turn cap to first notch,
then wait until all pressure is released.
Scalding can result from fast removal of
radiator cap. 4

STEP 2

DD98H125

Disconnect hoses (3) and (4) from the oil cooler

and flush the oil cooler through the outlet
1 connection (3) until clean water runs from the
inlet (4).
Allow the water to pour into a suitable container.
DP98J227

Put a suitable container under the engine block IMPORTANT: Dispose of the containers contents
drain plug (1) and remove plug. responsibly. DO NOT pour on the ground or into a
drain. Be responsible for the environment.
STEP 3
Connect hoses (3) and (4) and tighten fittings.

STEP 6
Use a good quality radiator cleaner and fill the
system. Follow the instructions given with the
radiator cleaner to clean the system.

DP97A098

Put a hose on the radiator drain valve (2) and

open valve. Drain coolant into a suitable
container.

Page 206
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
2000 HOUR SERVICE
STEP 7 Do not use rust inhibitors that are not approved.
It is possible that the rust inhibitors and ethylene
Remove the engine block drain plug and open the
glycol will not mix, and work against each other
radiator drain valve. Flush the system with clean
to decrease corrosion protection, form deposits
water to remove the radiator cleaner solution.
in the cooling system and cause damage to the
IMPORTANT: Allow cleaning solution to drain into cooling system and the radiator.
suitable containers. Dispose of the cleaning
solution responsibly. DO NOT pour on the ground Do not use a low boiling point, alcohol type
or into a drain. Be responsible for the environment. coolant solution. Because the boiling point of
alcohol is below the tractor minimum operating
STEP 8 temperature, loss of coolant from evaporation will
result.
Inspect the hoses and fittings for damage and
IMPORTANT: Always have a minimum of 33
leaks.
percent ethylene glycol in the cooling system
at all times and at all ambient temperature
STEP 9
ranges. Never use a solution of more than 50
Install the engine block drain plug, close radiator percent, unless the ambient temperature is
drain valve and remove drain hose. below -37 degrees C (-34 degrees F). More
than 50% ethylene glycol decreases heat
STEP 10 transfer and will increase the engine surface
temperature to more than normal.
Fill the cooling system with the coolant solution
as specified below. Prepare the coolant solution as follows:

Start the engine and run at low idle for A. Use clean water (distilled or deionized
approximately 10 minutes. preferred).

Stop the engine and check the coolant level. B. Mix the correct ratio of ethylene glycol and
Replenish as required. water to suit the market requirements.
C. Fill the radiator and coolant recovery
reservoir using the following procedure.
Coolant Solution
(Anti Freeze)

To prevent the coolant freezing in cold

temperatures the cooling system is filled with an
Fuel System General Inspection
ethylene glycol/water coolant solution that has a
low freezing point and a high boiling point. Every 2000 hours of operation see your Dealer
for an inspection of the fuel system and fuel
IMPORTANT: The heat generated by the diesel injection nozzles. Also check the engine for
engine causes a natural change in the needed general service or tune-up.
inhibitors in the coolant which results in loss
of corrosion protection. The loss of the To prevent dirt or water from reaching the
inhibitors may cause water pump cavitation injection parts and causing damage and
and cylinder block erosion. decreased performance, use clean fuel, keep the
fuel tank full, drain any water from the fuel
Use only low silicate ethylene glycol coolant primary filter at regular intervals and service the
solution in the cooling system. Use a good filters.
quality, high boiling point, ethylene glycol that
does not have any additives to stop leaks. The
silicate content must not exceed 0.1 percent.

Page 207
 ROUTINE SERVICING

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Air Conditioning System (If Equipped)
Compressor
WARNING: Never attempt to open the air
conditioning system. Liquid refrigerant can During cold weather if the air conditioner has not
cause severe and painful frostbite. Contact been used for at least 30 days, operate the air
! your dealer, who is experienced in conditioner for a period of 10 to 15 minutes, at an
servicing and handling of refrigerants. engine speed of 1500 rpm. This will lubricate the
seals to prevent them becoming brittle and help
prevent the loss of refrigerant from the system.
System Check
IMPORTANT: This tractor is equipped with
HFC-134a refrigerant, which will not destroy
the ozone layer. Never recharge the air
1 conditioning system with refrigerant other than
HFC-134a as this will result in loss of cooling
and permanent damage to all air conditioning
components.

Hoses and Wiring

Check all hoses for damage and leakage. Check
the hose clamps are tight,
correct torque = 3.4 Nm (2.5 lb ft).
DD95M222

The cab air conditioner is equipped with a system Check all wiring for damage. If damage is found
to protect the compressor from high or low see your Dealer for replacement of parts or
refrigerant pressures. refrigerant.
On Deluxe Cab tractors an indicator lamp is fitted to
warn the operator. If the air conditioner indicator
lamp (1) is illuminated, check the following possible
causes.
A. Cold ambient temperature (turn thermostat switch or
blower switch off then back on to desired setting).
B. Restricted condenser.
C. Restricted evaporator.
D. Low air flow (dirty filter or restriction).

See your dealer if problem continues.

Page 208
 ROUTINE SERVICING

ROUTINE SERVICING
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Viscous Fan Drive Seat Belt Inspection and
Maintenance (If Equipped)

WARNING: Securely fasten your seat belt.

1 Your tractor is equipped with a ROPS cab
or frame for your protection. The seat belt
can help insure your safety if it is used and
! maintained. Never wear a seat belt loosely
or with slack in the belt system. Never wear
the belt in a twisted condition or pinched
between the seat structural members.

● Keep sharp edges and items that can cause

damage, away from the belt.
DP98E262

During cleaning and maintenance of the engine ● From time to time, check belt, buckles and
and radiator, be careful not to cause damage to mounting bolts for damage.
the viscous fan drive.
DO NOT use steam or high pressure jets to clean
● Replace all parts that are worn or damaged.
the drive.
● Replace a belt that has cuts that can weaken
DO NOT restrict the fan blade rotation during the belt.
engine operation.
DO NOT remove the bi-metal coil (1) on the front ● Check that the bolts are tight on the seat
of the drive. bracket.

Check the fan and drive for external damage or ● Keep seat belt clean and dry.
erratic operation. See your dealer if service is
required. ● Clean belt only with a soap solution and warm
water.
Clean the Operators Seat
● Do not use bleach or dye on the belt because
Before removing stains, use a vacuum cleaner to this can make the belt weak.
remove loose dirt.
Find what type and how old the stains are. Some
stains can be removed with water or soap
solution.
CLEANER FLUID - This type of cleaner can be
used for grease or oil stains, follow manufactures
instructions.
FOAM CLEANER: This type of cleaner is good
for all stains, follow manufactures instructions.

WARNING: Never use petroleum spirit,

naptha or any other volatile material for any
! cleaning purposes. These materials may
be toxic and/or flammable.

NOTE: Do not make the material wet or clean

with a hard brush. Clean with a damp cloth
only. Immediately after the material is clean,
dry the material with dry cloth.

Page 209
 ROUTINE SERVICING

NOTES:

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

Page 210
 ELECTRICS

BATTERIES
Removal and Installation of
WARNING: Battery explosion and/or
damage to electrical components can Batteries
result from improper connection of booster
batteries or charger. Connect positive to STEP 1
! positive and negative to negative.
Externally, battery acid can cause burns
and blindness, and taken internally is
poison.

ELECTRICS
Keep the batteries in good operating condition as
follows:

● Keep the batteries clean and dry, and the

vents clear.
● Make sure the batteries are fastened securely
in position. Do not over tighten the clamps. DP98D199

● LOW MAINTENANCE BATTERIES - Add Remove the battery box lid screws, front and
distilled water as needed to keep separators rear, then remove the lid.
under water. Before you add water, check NOTE: The steps and tool box (If Equipped) have
each cell with a hydrometer. The specific been removed for photographic purposes only.
gravity in each cell must indicate a full charge
of 1.270 SG.
STEP 2
oC
NOTE: Cold temperatures of approximately -18
(0oF) will cause freezing of a battery with specific 1
gravity of 1.175 SG.

Keep the batteries fully charged. Charge at the

lowest rate possible to reduce gas formation. If a
battery will not keep a charge, install a new
battery that has the specifications given in
‘Specifications’ section.
.

WARNING: Do not charge a frozen

! battery, it can explode, causing serious
injury. DP97E447

Lower the front panel to gain better access.

To remove battery, disconnect the battery cables
When Batteries Are Not In Use (1) and slide the battery out. When the battery is
installed, make sure the cables are connected to
When the tractor is not in use, the batteries will
the correct terminals. The electrical system is 12
need a charge every six weeks to keep the
volt, negative ground.
specific gravity at or above 1.270 SG. Storage
batteries not in use will slowly discharge. A IMPORTANT: Always disconnect the ground cable
battery that has discharged can freeze at low first and connect the ground cable last to prevent
ambient temperatures and cause damage to the sparks. Do not start or operate the engine with the
battery and tractor. electrical system not completely connected.
NOTE: Discarding old batteries can cause an NOTE: The batteries can be disconnected without
environmental liability. Check with your local affecting any programmed or stored information in
environmental or recycling center or your the digital instrument cluster. When the batteries
dealer for the correct disposal information. are connected again the instrument cluster will
remember and use all stored information such as
Tire Size Code Number, etc.

Page 211
 ELECTRICS

Connecting a Booster Battery STEP 5

Start the tractor engine. See correct procedure in
IMPORTANT: When connecting a booster this manual.
battery to the tractor battery(s), make sure the
batteries are the same voltage (i.e. 12 Volt) STEP 6
and the electrolyte is at the correct level. DO When the tractor engine has started, disconnect
NOT connect auxiliary battery cables across the negative booster cable from the tractor frame
the terminals of the starter. Always start the and the booster battery negative first, then the
engine from the operator's seat. positive cable from the tractor battery and the
booster battery.
WARNING: Always connect the ground
cable last and disconnect the ground cable
! first so you do not cause a spark at the
battery. A spark can cause a battery
Auxiliary Battery Terminal (If Equipped)
explosion and cause injury. Remove the red protection cap (1), from the
positive terminal (2); and connect the positive
(red) cable clamp from the auxiliary battery to the
Procedure terminal.
Connect the negative (black) cable clamp from
2
the auxiliary battery to a good ground on the
tractor frame.

2
1 3

4
DI98J017

1
1. BOOSTER BATTERY 3. TRACTOR BATTERY
2. POSITIVE CABLE 4. NEGATIVE CABLE

DP99G158
STEP 1
Install the red protection cap on the positive
Position the machine with the booster battery terminal after the starting operation has been
next to the tractor so that the booster cables can completed.
be connected easily. MAKE SURE THE
MACHINES ARE NOT TOUCHING.

STEP 2
Turn off all electrical components on both
machines.

STEP 3
Connect the booster battery positive (+) to the
tractor battery positive (+) and the negative (-)
to a good ground on the tractor frame, not to
the tractor battery terminal.

STEP 4
Start the engine of the machine with the booster
battery and run the engine for approximately 2
minutes.

Page 212
 ELECTRICS

Battery System Servicing

Follow these general rules to prevent damage to ● If electric welding is necessary, do the
the electrical system. following to protect the electrical components:

A. disconnect the battery(s) or turn off the

master switch (if equipped).
1
B. disconnect the instrument cluster
harness.

ELECTRICS
C. disconnect the powershift controller (if
equipped).

D. disconnect the alternator.

Put the welding equipment ground cable as
close as you can to the weld area.
DP99G158
Do not put the ground cable where the current
● Before working on the electrical system, can flow through bearings or along channels
disconnect the battery cables, ground cable with wiring harnesses.
first, or turn off the master switch (1) (if
equipped) and remove the key.

● Do not make a reverse battery connection.

● When you use an auxiliary battery for

starting, connect negative (-) to negative (-)
and positive (+) to positive (+). Use the
auxiliary battery connections provided on the
tractor (if equipped). See Auxiliary Battery
Connections in this manual.

● When charging the tractor batteries, use the

auxiliary battery connections on the tractor (if
equipped). Do not attach directly to the
battery terminals. Do not use a battery
charging machine for starting the tractor.

● Never operate the tractor when the battery

cables are disconnected.

● When you carry out maintenance on the

engine, cover the alternator to prevent foreign
material from entering.

Page 213
 ELECTRICS

BULB AND LAMP REPLACEMENT

Type/Voltage/Watts Part No.

Head Lamps Bulb ................................................................ H4, 12 V-60/55 W.................................... 91967C1

Work Lamps...................................................................................... 12V-55W................................ 1312210C2

Side Lamps ......................................................................................... 12V-5W................................ 1094368R1

Direction Turn Lamps........................................................................ 12V-21W................................ 3131227R1

Stop and Tail Lamps ...................................................................... 12V-21/5W................................ 1094366R1

Number Plate Lamp .......................................................................... 12V-10W...................................... E35556

Cab Interior Lamp Bulb ..................................................................... 12V-10W................................ 3050958R1

Side Console Lamp Bulb .......................................................... 168 (12V-3W)...................................... D71346

Warning and Function Indicator Lamps:

Hazard Warning, Work Lamps,
Beacon Light, Front PTO,
Rocker Switches .......................................................................... 12V-1.2W................................ 3141107R1
Engine Oil Pressure, Alternator Charge, Air Cleaner Restriction,
Park Brake, Head lamp High Beam,
Left/Right Turn Indicators, Rear Work Lamp, Forward/Reverse Neutral,
PTO rpm, Differential Lock, MFD Engaged,,
First/Second Trailer Indicator Lamps ......................................... 168 (14V) .................................. 191999A1

Master Warning Lamp................................................................... 168 (14V) .................................... 26617R1

Gauge Illumination:
Fuel Level, Coolant Temperature, Hour Meter,
Trailer Brake Air Pressure (If equipped) ............................................... 161.........Anolog Cluster: 188057A1
Digital Cluster.............Not Serviced Serarately

Page 214
 ELECTRICS

Cluster Lamp Replacement Procedure

STEP 1 STEP 3

Remove the four retaining screws from the front

of the instrument cluster.

STEP 2

ELECTRICS
DP96K008

Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and pull

B out to remove.
Pull the bulb out of the holder.
DR98J254

Remove the instrument cluster, but DO NOT STEP 4

DISCONNECT THE HARNESS.
Remove the relavent cover over the bulb holders Push the new bulb into the holder.
(A or B, as equipped).
Install the holder into the cluster, turn holder
clockwise to lock in position.

3. Install the cover, the cluster and the four

retaining screws.

Page 215
 ELECTRICS

FUSE LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION

(North American Tractors)
The fuses give protection to the electrical circuits of
the tractor and cab.
To service the fuses remove the left hand side panel
from the front console. To replace a fuse, pull the
fuse out of the clips and push a new fuse in.

IMPORTANT: Make sure the new fuse has the

same ampere rating as the fuse being
replaced.

RP95F100

41 42 43 44

37 38 39 40

33 34 35 36

29 30 31 32

22 23 24 25 26 27 28

15 16 17 18 19 20 21

8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

NOTE: Locations 9, 10, and 32 are mini circuit breakers, which will reset automatically.

Fuse No Circuit Amps

1 HORN 15

2 REAR WORK LAMPS 25

3 FRONT WORKLAMPS 25

4 IMPLEMENT INTERFACE CONNECTOR UNSWITCHED B+ 10

5 IMPLEMENT INTERFACE CONNECTOR SWITCHED B+ 10

6 NOT USED -----

7 NOT USED -----

8 LOADER CONTROL 15

9 LEFT HAND GRILLE HEADLIGHT (LOW BEAM) (CIRCUIT BREAKER) 10

10 RIGHT HAND GRILLE HEADLIGHT (LOW BEAM) (CIRCUIT BREAKER) 10

Page 216
 ELECTRICS

Fuse No Circuit Amps

11 NOT USED -----

12 LEFT HAND GRILLE HEADLIGHT (HIGH BEAM) 10

13 RIGHT HAND GRILLE HEADLIGHT (HIGH BEAM) 10

14 NOT USED -----

15 NOT USED -----

ELECTRICS
16 NOT USED -----

17 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER UNSWITCHED B+ 5

18 TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS 15

19 WARNING LIGHTS 5

20 FLASHER 15

21 NOT USED -----

22 NOT USED -----

23 TAIL LIGHTS 5

24 NOT USED -----

25 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SWITCHED POWER B+ 7.5

26 MFD, DIFF LOCK 30

27 SEAT 15

28 XTRASHIFT TRANSMISSION CONTROLLER 15

29 7 POLE CONNECTOR SWITCHED B+ 30

30 INTERIOR LIGHT, RADIO CLOCK POWER, INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 7.5

CLOCK POWER,

31 REAR WINDSCREEN WIPER/WASHER 15

32 FRONT WINDSCREEN WIPER/WASHER (CIRCUIT BREAKER) 15

33 ELECTRONIC HITCH 7.5

34 POWERSHIFT 20

35 PARK BRAKE ALARM 5

36 FRONT PTO 10

37 COLD START 20

38 FUEL SHUT-OFF 10

39 CIGAR LIGHTER 10

40 ACCESSORY, INSTRUMENT CLUSTER, RADIO 7.5

41 RIGHT HAND CONSOLE AUXILIARY CONNECTOR (BATTERY B+) 30

42 FRONT CONSOLE AUXILIARY CONNECTOR (BATTERY B+) 30

43 RIGHT HAND CONSOLE AUXILIARY CONNECTOR (SWITCHED B+) 30

44 FRONT CONSOLE AUXILIARY CONNECTOR (SWITCHED B+) 30

Page 217
 ELECTRICS

FUSE LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION

(Rest Of World Tractors)
The fuses give protection to the electrical circuits of
the tractor and cab.
To service the fuses remove the left hand side panel
from the front console. To replace a fuse, pull the
fuse out of the clips and push a new fuse in.

IMPORTANT: Make sure the new fuse has the

same ampere rating as the fuse being
replaced.

RP95F100

41 42 43 44

37 38 39 40

33 34 35 36

29 30 31 32

22 23 24 25 26 27 28

15 16 17 18 19 20 21

8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

NOTE: Locations 9, 10, and 32 are mini circuit breakers, which will reset automatically.

Fuse No Circuit Amps

1 HORN 15

2 FRONT WORK LIGHTS 25

3 REAR WORK LIGHTS 25

4 IMPLEMENT INTERFACE CONNECTOR UNSWITCHED B+ 10

5 IMPLEMENT INTERFACE CONNECTOR SWITCHED B+ 10

6 LEFT HAND POSITION LIGHT 10

7 RIGHT HAND POSITION LIGHT 10

8 LOADER CONTROL 15

9 NOT USED -----

10 NOT USED -----

Page 218
 ELECTRICS

Fuse No Circuit Amps

11 REAR FOG LAMP 10

12 LEFT HAND GRILLE HEADLIGHT (HIGH BEAM) 10

13 RIGHT HAND GRILLE HEADLIGHT (HIGH BEAM) 10

14 NOT USED -----

15 CAB ROOF HEADLIGHT (LOW BEAM) 15

16 NOT USED -----

ELECTRICS
17 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER UNSWITCHED B+ 5

18 WARNING LIGHTS 15

19 LEFT HAND GRILLE HEADLIGHT (LOW BEAM) (CIRCUIT BREAKER) 10

20 RIGHT HAND GRILLE HEADLIGHT (LOW BEAM) (CIRCUIT BREAKER) 10

21 TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS 15

22 ROTARY BEACON LIGHT 15

23 NOT USED -----

24 BRAKE LIGHTS 20

25 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SWITCHED POWER 7.5

26 MFD, DIFF LOCK 30

27 SEAT 15

28 XTRASHIFT TRANSMISSION CONTROLLER 15

29 7 POLE CONNECTOR SWITCHED B+ 30

30 INTERIOR LIGHT, RADIO CLOCK POWER, INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 7.5

CLOCK POWER,

31 REAR WINDSCREEN WIPER/WASHER 15

32 FRONT WINDSCREEN WIPER/WASHER (CIRCUIT BREAKER) 15

33 ELECTRONIC HITCH 7.5

34 POWERSHIFT 20

35 PARK BRAKE ALARM 5

36 FRONT PTO, RIDE CONTROL 10

37 THERMOSTART 20

38 FUEL SHUT-OFF 10

39 CIGAR LIGHTER 10

40 ACCESSORY, INSTRUMENT CLUSTER, RADIO 7.5

41 RIGHT HAND CONSOLE AUXILIARY CONNECTOR (BATTERY B+) 30

42 FRONT CONSOLE AUXILIARY CONNECTOR (BATTERY B+) 30

43 RIGHT HAND CONSOLE AUXILIARY CONNECTOR (SWITCHED B+) 30

44 FRONT CONSOLE AUXILIARY CONNECTOR (SWITCHED B+) 30

Page 219
 ELECTRICS

RELAYS
Relays under Instrument Panel

4 5 6
2 3 7
8
9
10
1 11

12

13 14
15 16 17

DI97J150

1. FUSE BLOCK 10. WORK LIGHT SWITCH

2. COLD START SWITCH 11. HEADLAMP CHANGE OVER SWITCH
3. REAR WORK LIGHT RELAY 12. KEY SWITCH
4. FRONT WORK LIGHT RELAY 13. CAB POWER RELAY
5. ACCESSORY POWER RELAY 14. HEADLAMP DIPPER RELAY
6. BRAKE POWER RELAY 15. FLASHER RELAY
7. EITHER BRAKE RELAY 16. BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUIT RELAY
8. BOTH BRAKES RELAY 17. 3 PIN ACCESSORY POWER
9. HAZARD WARNING SWITCH

Page 220
 ELECTRICS

Relays under R/H Side Console

25 24 23
26
27

21 20
28
22
19

ELECTRICS
18

11 12
10 13
14 17

15
2 16
7
8
3 5
9
4

DI99J077
6

12. FRONT PTO SWITCH

1 13. REAR FOG LAMP SWITCH
14. ROTATING BEACON SWITCH
15. CIGARETTE LIGHTER
16. SHIFTABLE PTO SWITCH
17. AUXILIARY POWER CONNECTOR
1. AFS CONNECTOR 18. HITCH UPPER LIMIT CONTROL
2. AIR TRAILER BRAKE CONNECTOR 19. DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY
3. HITCH ENABLE RELAY 20. HITCH TRAVEL CONTROL
4. DIFF LOCK RELAY 21. HITCH RESPONSE CONTROL
5. PARK BRAKE ALARM RELAY 22. HITCH DROP SPEED CONTROL
6. MFD RELAY 23. HITCH LOAD CONTROL
7. FRONT PRO RELAY 24. HITCH POSITION CONTROL
8. POWERSHIFT RELAY #5 25. MFD SWITCH
9. POWERSHIFT RELAY #6 26. SLIP LIMIT CONTROL SWITCH
10. 2 SPEED POWERSHIFT SWITCH 27. DIFF LOCK SWITCH
11. RIDE CONTROL SWITCH 28. HITCH UP/DOWN SWITCH

Page 221
 ELECTRICS

Relays In Front Headliner

DI97K102 & RP96H331

1. AIR CONDITIONING RELAY

Page 222
 MACHINE STORAGE

PUTTING THE TRACTOR INTO STORAGE

Preparing the Tractor for Storage STEP 8

The batteries do not need to be removed from
When your tractor is not going to be used for
the tractor, except for extended storage (more
some time, store the tractor in a dry protected
than 30 days) below freezing temperatures. The
place. Leaving your tractor outside, open to the
batteries must be fully charged to prevent
weather, will shorten its life.
freezing. Disconnect the negative (-) ground
Follow the procedure below when your tractor is cable at the batteries to prevent possible
placed in storage for periods up to six months. discharge. Check the battery charge every 30
See your dealer for the procedure on longer days.
periods of storage.

MACHINE STORAGE
STEP 9
STEP 1 Store the tractor where there is protection from
Wash or clean and completely lubricate the sunlight. Clean the tires before storage. Support
tractor. See the Lubrication Section in this the tractor so that the load is off the tires. If the
manual. tractor is not supported, inflate the tires at regular
intervals.
STEP 2
Clean the inside of the operators cab and STEP 10
instrument console. Coat all exposed cylinder rods with light grease
to prevent rust.
STEP 3
Rodents can damage a tractor in storage. Removing the Tractor from
Rodents will eat plastic, insulation or rubber Storage
material. Clean the areas where rodents may
nest. Leave access panels and doors open to It is recommended that caution be used when
remove convenient nesting pockets. In some starting an engine that has been in storage.
conditions leaving moth balls will help discourage
rats and mice. STEP 1

STEP 4 Open the fuel filter drain plug and remove

contaminated fuel. Close the drain plug.
Run the engine long enough to completely warm
the oil in the crankcase before draining the oil. STEP 2
Remove and replace the oil filter as instructed.
Fill the crankcase with fresh oil and run the Check that the grade of oil in the engine
engine for two to five minutes. crankcase is as specified in this Manual.

STEP 5 STEP 3

Open the drain on the fuel filter and drain the Check the coolant level in the reservoir and
water and sediment before closing. Fill the fuel radiator.
tank with a premium grade diesel fuel. If this fuel
grade has not been used regularly, drain the fuel STEP 4
tank and fill with premium diesel fuel. Run the Check that the batteries are fully charged.
engine for five minutes to circulate the fuel
through the fuel injection system. STEP 5
Connect the ground cable(s) (-) and tighten all
STEP 6 terminals.
Clean the engine air filter and body.
STEP 6
STEP 7 Check the transmission/hydraulic fluid level and
Drain, flush and fill the cooling system with the linkages.
correct antifreeze mixture to protect the tractor to
the lowest anticipated temperature.

Page 223
 MACHINE STORAGE

STEP 7 Fire Prevention

Check and adjust the tension on all drive belts.
Fire risks can be minimized by frequent removal
STEP 8 of accumulated crop material, trash or debris
Do not accelerate the engine rapidly, or operate from the machine.
at high RPM immediately after starting.
Remove all crop material, trash or debris at the
STEP 9 start of each working day. Take extra care to
make sure the engine area and exhaust system
Inflate the tires to the correct operating are clean.
pressures.
It is your responsibility to remove and/or clean
STEP 10 your machine on a regular basis.
Make sure that all shields and guards are in the
correct position. Fire risk can also be minimized by prompt
repairing of leaks and cleaning up fuel and oil
spills.
WARNING: Before starting the engine, be
sure all operating controls are in neutral Engine fuel is flammable and can cause a fire or
and the park brake applied. This will an explosion. DO NOT fill the fuel tank or service
! eliminate accidental movement of the the fuel system near an naked flame, welding,
machine on start-up or power driven burning cigars, cigarettes etc.
equipment.
Sparks or flames can cause the hydrogen gas in
a battery to explode. To prevent an explosion, do
WARNING: Do not operate the engine in a the following:
! closed building. Proper ventilation is
required under all circumstances.
● When disconnecting the battery cables,
disconnect the negative (-) cable first. When
connecting the battery cables, connect the
negative (-) cable last.
● When connecting jumper cables to start the
engine, ONLY use the procedure shown on
page 212 of this manual.
● DO NOT short circuit the battery posts with
metal items.
● DO NOT weld, grind or smoke near a battery.

Check the electrical system for loose

connections or frayed insulation. Repair or
replace the loose or damaged parts.

Page 224
 SPECIFICATIONS

DIESEL ENGINE

General

CX75 Tractor Engine

Type ................................................................................ Naturally Aspirated, Direct Injection, Four Cylinder, Four Stroke
Power Output................................................................................................................................................................54 kW
Max. Torque............................................................................................................................................................... 284 Nm
Governed Engine Speed Without Load....................................................................................................... 2325 +/- 25rpm
Rated Engine Speed...............................................................................................................................................2200 rpm
Engine Low Idle Speed................................................................................................................................... 775 +/- 25rpm

CX85 Tractor Engine

Type .........................................................................................Turbocharged, Direct Injection, Four Cylinder, Four Stroke
Power Output................................................................................................................................................................62 kW
Max. Torque............................................................................................................................................................... 338 Nm
Governed Engine Speed Without Load....................................................................................................... 2325 +/- 25rpm

SPECIFICATIONS
Rated Engine Speed...............................................................................................................................................2200 rpm
Engine Low Idle Speed................................................................................................................................... 775 +/- 25rpm

CX95 Tractor Engine

Type ................................................................................................................ Turbocharged (Wastegate), Direct Injection,
Four Cylinder, Four Stroke
Power Output................................................................................................................................................................66 kW
Max. Torque............................................................................................................................................................... 355 Nm
Governed Engine Speed Without Load....................................................................................................... 2325 +/- 25rpm
Rated Engine Speed...............................................................................................................................................2200 rpm
Engine Low Idle Speed................................................................................................................................... 775 +/- 25rpm

CX105 Tractor Engine

Type ................................................................................................................ Turbocharged (Wastegate), Direct Injection,
Four Cylinder, Four Stroke
Power Output................................................................................................................................................................75 kW
Max. Torque............................................................................................................................................................... 405 Nm
Governed Engine Speed Without Load....................................................................................................... 2325 +/- 25rpm
Rated Engine Speed...............................................................................................................................................2200 rpm
Engine Low Idle Speed................................................................................................................................... 775 +/- 25rpm

Page 225
 SPECIFICATIONS

Air Intake System

Type ...................................................................................................................Dry Type Air Induction System, Two Stage
Filter System with Service Indicator on instrument cluster

Engine Cooling System

System Type ........................................................................................ Pressure System, Thermostat Controlled Bypass,
and Impeller Type Pump
Radiator .............................................................................................................................. Heavy Duty, Fin and Tube Type
Thermostat Operation...............................................................................Starts to Open at Approx. 77-85°C (170-185°F)
Fully Open at 92-98°C (198-208°F)
Radiator Cap Pressure................................................................................................................................1.03 bar (15 psi)
Fan Drive....................................................................................................................................................................Viscous

Engine Lubrication System

Minimum Oil Pressure
CX75........................................................................................................................................................2.07 bar (30 psi)
with Engine Warm and Operating at Maximum Speed
CX85, CX95, CX105...............................................................................................................................2.67 bar (40 psi)
with Engine Warm and Operating at Maximum Speed
Oil Pump................................................................................................................................................................ Gear Type
Oil Filter..................................................................................................................................................................... Full Flow

Engine Fuel System

Fuel Primer Pump Type....................................................................................................................................... Diaphragm
Fuel Filter Type......................................................................................................................................................... Full Flow
Water Trap and Drain Location ........................................................................................................... Bottom of Fuel Filter
Fuel Tank Capacity .....................................................................................................................155 Litres (41 US gallons)
Cold Starting Aid......................................................................................................................Ether or Thermostart System

Page 226
 SPECIFICATIONS

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
General Specifications
Type of System..............................................................................................................................12 Volt, Negative Ground
Batteries.................................................................................................One x 12 Volt, Low Maintenance Hybrid Batteries
Taper Post Terminals

SAE (COLD CRANKING AMPERE RESERVE

TYPE IEC DIN
CAPACITY) HOURS CAPACITY

644 660 Amps 440 Amps 400 Amps 95 180 mins

664 770 Amps 515 Amps 465 Amps 105 210 mins

Alternator .................................................................................................................................................... 12 Volt, 65 Amp.

Starter Motor, with Solenoid Switch............................................................................................................. 12 Volt, 2.8 kW

SPECIFICATIONS
Circuit Breakers
See Electrics section.

Fuses and Lamps

See Electrics section.

Accessory Connectors
7 Terminal Electrical Outlet .......................................................................................Equipped for Directional Turn Lamps,
Stop lamps, Tail Lamps
Single Auxillary Socket (NOT North American Tractors)
(next to 7 Terminal Socket)........................................................................................................................... 12 Volt Power
for Implements with Circuit Protection,

3 Pin Cab Connector...............................................................................................................................Unswitched 12 Volt

Switch 12 volt Power (Through Key Switch)
and also Direct with Ground for
Implement Controllers and Monitors

Page 227
 SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL MACHINE
Brakes
Brake Type .................................................................................................................................... Hydraulic, Self-Adjusting,
Single Wet Plate Type Differential Brakes
Trailer Brake....................................................................................................................................Hydraulic, or Air System

Differential Lock
Lock Type ................................................................................................................................................................Multi Disc
Control ........................................................................................................ Electro-hydraulic by a Switch on Side Console

Drawbar and Auto Hitch

Standard Drawbar or Yoke Type..................................................................................... Adjustable Slide and Swing Type
Maximum Load with Pivot Pin thru Rear Hole (Single or Dual Shaft PTO)
Standard ..................................................................................................................................................880 kg (1940 lb)
Heavy Duty...........................................................................................................................................1240 kg (2735 lb)
Maximum Load with Pivot Pin thru Front Hole (Shiftable PTO)
Standard ..................................................................................................................................................790 kg (1740 lb)
Heavy Duty............................................................................................................................................1070 kg (2360 lb)
Auto Hitch Maximum Static Loads:
Hook.......................................................................................................................................................2250 kg (4960 lb)
Drawbar .................................................................................................................................................1500 kg (3307 lb)
Lift capacity of Auto Hitch -
EEC Approved [Council directive 89/173/EEC Annex IV, appendix 2 (dynamic test method)].

Height Adjustable Hitches

Maximum Vertical Load.............................................................................................................................1500 kg (3307 lb)
IMPORTANT: The maximum loads stated for all the above hitch types may vary depending upon
restrictions due to capacity of rear tyres fitted and/or legal requirements.

Hydrostatic Power Steering

Pump ..........................................................................................................................................Gear Pump, Engine Driven
Capacity..................................................................................................................... Approx. 30 Litre/min (6.6 US gal/min)
Steering Pump............................................................................................................................................ Hydrostatic Type,
Steering Cylinder...............................................................................................................................Double Action Cylinder

Page 228
 SPECIFICATIONS

Front Axle Differential and Planetaries

Axle Type........................................................................................................................................................Carraro 707S4
Inter Axle Ratio.............................................................................................................................................................. 1:407
Optional (10.5-18 MFD Tyre ONLY) ...................................................................................................... 1:564

Transmission
Transmission Types .......................................................................................................XtraShift: 24 Forward, 24 Reverse
2 Speed Powershift: 16 Forward, 8 Reverse
Synchromesh: 8 Forward, 8 Reverse
optional Creeper for all transmission types
Oil Cooler.................................................................................................................................Transmission/Hydraulic Fluid
Engine Clutch
Clutch Plate Diameter .......................................................................................................................... 305 mm (12 inch)

Front Hitch System (If Equipped)

SPECIFICATIONS
Valve Type ........................................................................................................................................................Four Position
Kitchin Hitch..................................................................................................................................................Single Acting
Hydrac Hitch ............................................................................................................................................... Double Acting
Type of Lower Links .................................................................................................................................. Claw Ends, Fixed
Type of Hitch....................................................................................................................................Three Point, Category II
Maximum Lift Capacity,
Kitchin Hitch......................................................................................................................................... 2359 kg (5200 lb)
Hydrac Hitch ......................................................................................................................................... 3000 kg (6614 lb)

Rear Hitch System

Type of Sensing (*)................................................................................................................................. Electronic, Top Link
Note (*): Optional build is position only (no draft sensing). Tractors built without draft sensing may be upgraded to include this
feature by installing a filed package available from your dealer.

Type of Lower Links ............................................................................................. Eye or Claw Ends, Fixed or Telescoping

Type of Hitch.................................................................................................................................... Three Point, Category ll
Lift Capacity at Hitch Points and Lower Links Horizontal
With No Assistor Ram.......................................................................................................................... 1972 kg (4347 lb)
With Single Assistor Ram ..................................................................................................................... 2914 kg(6424 lb)
With Twin Assistor Rams..................................................................................................................... 3816 kg (8413 lb)

Page 229
 SPECIFICATIONS

Remote Hydraulic System

Pump Type ......................................................................................................................................................................Gear
Maximum System Pressure.............................................................................................................. 17 237 kPa (2500 psi)
Remote Valves..........................................................................................................................Open Center, Lever Control
Remote Couplings ............................................................................................................. ISO Standard, Breakaway Type
Flow Capacities From Remote Valve ................................................................................. 59 Litre/min (15.5 US gal/min)

Front Power Takeoff (If equipped)

PTO Type ................................................................................................................................Independent of Transmission
Clutch Type
Kitchin .....................................................................................................................................Electro-Magnetic Actuated
Hydrac................................................................................................................................................. Hydraulic Actuated
Rotation .................................................................................................................. Counterclockwise from Front of Tractor
Output Shaft Size.......................................................................................... 6 Splines, 34.925 mm (1.375 inch) Diameter
PTO Speed..............................................................................................................................................................1000 rpm
Engine Speed for 1000 PTO Speed......................................................................................................................2200 rpm

Rear Power Takeoff

PTO Type ................................................................................................................................Independent of Transmission
Versions....................................................................................................................... Single Shaft, Twin Shaft or Shiftable
Type of Clutch ....................................................................................................................................Hydraulically Actuated
Rotation ............................................................................................................................... Clockwise from Rear of Tractor
PTO Speeds.......................................................................................................... 540 rpm, 540/750 rpm or 540/1000 rpm
Output Shaft Size................................................................................... 6 or 21 spline, 34.925 mm (1.375 inch) Diameter
Engine Speed at 540/1000 rpm PTO Speed (Twin Shaft)
540 rpm...............................................................................................................................................................1954 rpm
1000 rpm.............................................................................................................................................................2000 rpm
Engine Speed at 540/750 rpm PTO Speed (Shiftable)
540 rpm................................................................................................................................................................... 2007 rpm
750 rpm.................................................................................................................................................................... 2011 rpm
Engine Speed at 540/1000 rpm PTO Speed (Shiftable)
540 rpm...............................................................................................................................................................1994 rpm
1000rpm..............................................................................................................................................................2000 rpm

Page 230
 SPECIFICATIONS

APPROXIMATE TRAVEL SPEEDS

How To Use These Speed Charts
1. Select the chart corresponding to your transmission type, eg:
XtraShift Transmission
2 Speed Powershift Transmission
Synchromesh (Mechanical) Transmission

2. Using the speeds in the speed charts and the correction factor, (see page 236) calculate the correct speed
for the tyre size (RR = Rolling Radius*) fitted to your tractor.
* The rolling radius given in these speed charts has been taken from the European Tyre & Rim
Technical Organisation (ETRTO) Standards Manual. Due to tyre manufacturer, tyre pressure and
load capacities the rolling radius will vary. For a more accurate dimension carry out the dynamic
procedure found in this manual.
IMPORTANT: The speeds given in the following charts are only approximate and will vary according to make
of tyre, tyre pressure and tyre wear. No allowance has been made for wheel slip.

Synchromesh (Mechanical) Transmission

SPECIFICATIONS
Speeds below are calculated at an engine speed of 2200 rpm.

REGULAR SPEEDS
18.4-30
REAR TYRES
(RR 720)
FORWARD

RANGE/GEAR km/h mph

LO 1 2.57 1.60
LO 2 4.18 2.60
LO 3 5.65 3.51
LO 4 8.11 5.04
HI 1 9.64 5.99
HI 2 15.67 9.74
HI 3 21.18 13.16
HI 4 30.41 18.90

REVERSE

RANGE/GEAR km/h mph

LO 1 2.50 1.55
LO 2 4.07 2.53
LO 3 5.50 3.42
LO 4 7.90 4.91
HI 1 9.39 5.83
HI 2 15.26 9.48
HI 3 20.63 12.82
HI 4 29.62 18.41

LO = Low range, HI = High range, RR = Rolling Radius

Page 231
 SPECIFICATIONS

2 Speed Powershift, 30 km/h Transmission

Speeds below are calculated at an engine speed of 2200 rpm.

REGULAR SPEEDS CREEPER SPEEDS

16.9-34 16.9-34
REAR TYRES REAR TYRES
480/70R34 480/70R34
540/65R34 540/65R34
15.5-38 15.5-38
(RR 745) (RR 745)
FORWARD FORWARD
RANGE SPEED P/SHIFT km/h mph RANGE SPEED P/SHIFT km/h mph
LO 1 1.88 1.17 1 0.30 0.19
2.27 1.41 0.36 0.22
LO 2 3.31 2.06 2 0.53 0.33
3.99 2.48 0.64 0.40
LO 3 5.35 3.32 3 0.85 0.53
6.45 4.01 1.03 0.64
LO 4 6.88 4.27 4 1.10 0.68
8.30 5.16 1.33 0.83
HI 1 7.04 4.37
8.50 5.28 REVERSE

HI 2 12.41 7.71 RANGE SPEED km/h mph

14.96 9.29 1 0.33 0.21

HI 3 20.07 12.47 2 0.58 0.36

3 0.94 0.58
24.21 15.04
4 1.21 0.75
HI 4 25.81 16.04
31.14 19.35
LO = Low range, HI = High range, RR = Rolling Radius
REVERSE = SPEED REDUCTION
RANGE SPEED P/SHIFT km/h mph
= DIRECT DRIVE
LO 1 2.07 2.07
= CREEPER
LO 2 3.64 3.64
LO 3 5.89 5.89
LO 4 7.58 7.58
HI 1 7.76 7.76
HI 2 13.66 8.49
HI 3 22.10 13.73
HI 4 28.43 17.66

Page 232
 SPECIFICATIONS

2 Speed Powershift, 40 km/h Transmission

Speeds below are calculated at an engine speed of 2200 rpm.

REGULAR SPEEDS CREEPER SPEEDS

18.4-34 18.4-34
REAR TYRES REAR TYRES
500/70R34 500/70R34
520/70R34 520/70R34
(RR 770) (RR 770)
FORWARD FORWARD
RANGE SPEED P/SHIFT km/h mph RANGE SPEED P/SHIFT km/h mph
LO 1 2.12 1.32 1 0.34 0.21
2.56 1.59 0.41 0.26
LO 2 3.73 2.32 2 0.60 0.37
4.50 2.80 0.72 0.45
LO 3 5.53 3.44 3 0.88 0.55
6.67 4.14 1.07 0.66
LO 4 8.67 5.39 4 1.38 0.86
10.46 6.50 1.67 1.04

SPECIFICATIONS
HI 1 7.95 4.94
9.59 5.96 REVERSE

HI 2 14.00 8.70 RANGE SPEED km/h mph

16.88 10.49 1 0.37 0.23

2 0.65 0.40
HI 3 20.75 12.89
3 0.96 0.60
25.02 15.55
4 1.51 0.94
HI 4 32.52 20.21
39.22 24.37
LO = Low range, HI = High range, RR = Rolling Radius
REVERSE
= SPEED REDUCTION
RANGE SPEED P/SHIFT km/h mph
LO 1 2.31 1.44 = DIRECT DRIVE
LO 2 4.07 2.53 = CREEPER
LO 3 6.04 3.75
LO 4 9.46 5.88
HI 1 8.67 5.39
HI 2 15.28 9.49
HI 3 22.63 14.06
HI 4 35.48 22.05

Page 233
 SPECIFICATIONS

XtraShift, 30 and 40 km/h Transmission

(Regular Speeds)
Speeds below are calculated at an engine speed of 2200 rpm.

REGULAR FORWARD SPEEDS REGULAR REVERSE SPEEDS

18.4-34 18.4-34
REAR TYRES REAR TYRES
500/70R34 500/70R34
520/70R34 520/70R34
(RR 770) (RR 770)
RANGE SPEED P/SHIFT km/h mph RANGE SPEED P/SHIFT km/h mph
LO 1 1 2.12 1.32 LO 1 1 2.11 1.31
2 2.61 1.62 2 2.60 1.62
3 3.08 1.91 3 3.07 1.91
LO 2 1 3.30 2.05 LO 2 1 3.28 2.04
2 4.06 2.52 2 4.04 2.51
3 4.79 2.98 3 4.77 2.96
LO 3 1 4.94 3.07 LO 3 1 4.92 3.06
2 6.08 3.79 2 6.06 3.77
3 7.17 4.46 3 7.14 4.44
LO 4 1 7.28 4.52 LO 4 1 7.25 4.51
2 8.97 5.57 2 8.93 5.55
3 10.58 6.57 3 10.53 6.54
HI 1 1 7.95 4.94 HI 1 1 7.92 4.92
2 9.79 6.08 2 9.75 6.06
3 11.55 7.18 3 11.50 7.15
HI 2 1 12.36 7.68 HI 2 1 12.31 7.65
2 15.22 9.46 2 15.16 9.42
3 17.95 11.15 3 17.88 11.11
HI 3 1 18.52 11.51 HI 3 1 18.45 11.46
2 22.81 14.17 2 22.81 14.17
3 26.90 16.71 3 26.79 16.65
HI 3 1 27.31 16.97 HI 3 1 27.20 16.90
2* 33.63 20.90 2* 33.49 20.81
3* 39.66 24.64 3* 39.50 24.54

LO = Low range, HI = High range, RR = Rolling Radius

(*)NOTE: On XtraShift 30 km/h transmission tractors the

transmission is electronically governed and will not allow
travel speeds to exceed 30 km/h.

Page 234
 SPECIFICATIONS

XtraShift, 30 and 40 km/h Transmission

(Creeper Speeds)
Speeds below are calculated at an engine speed of 2200 rpm.

CREEPER FORWARD SPEEDS CREEPER REVERSE SPEEDS

18.4-34 18.4-34
REAR TYRES REAR TYRES
500/70R34 500/70R34
520/70R34 520/70R34
(RR 770) (RR 770)
RANGE SPEED P/SHIFT km/h mph RANGE SPEED P/SHIFT km/h mph
1 1 0.33 0.21 1 1 0.33 0.21
2 0.41 0.25 2 0.40 0.25
3 0.48 0.30 3 0.48 0.30
2 1 0.51 0.32 2 1 0.51 0.32
2 0.63 0.39 2 0.63 0.39
3 0.74 0.46 3 0.74 0.46
3 1 0.77 0.48 3 1 0.77 0.47
2 0.95 0.59 2 0.94 0.59

SPECIFICATIONS
3 1.12 0.70 3 1.11 0.69
4 1 1.13 0.70 4 1 1.13 0.70
2 1.39 0.86 2 1.39 0.86
3 1.64 1.02 3 1.64 1.02

LO = Low range, HI = High range, RR = Rolling Radius

Page 235
 SPECIFICATIONS

Speed Chart Adjustment For Alternative Tyres

To calculate the approximate tractor speeds for STEP 3
alternative rear tyre sizes, multiply the speeds in
the correct speed chart for your transmission option
by the correction factor in the chart on the next
page for tyres fitted on your tractor.
Example:
Your tractor (a XtraShift CX85, with a 40 km/h
transmission) is fitted with 16.9R30 rear tyres
and you wish to know what the lowest
possible creeper speed is.

STEP 1

DD98J114

Using the correction factor chart on the next page

find the correction factor for a 16.9R30 rear tyre
(0.90).

STEP 4

Multiply the creeper speed from page 235 by the

correction factor from page 237 to obtain the
correct speed for your tyre fitted.
ie,
DD98J113 0.33 km/h x 0.90 = 0.30 km/h
(0.18 mph)
Find the chart corresponding to your tractor
model and transmission type, (ie. XtraShift -
40km/h, see page 235).

STEP 2

DD98J113

Find the lowest possible creeper speed in this

chart, (0.33 km/h).

Page 236
 SPECIFICATIONS

Correction Factor Chart

RADIUS CORRECTION
REAR TYRE SIZE
(mm) FACTOR

13.6-24 560 0.86

14.9-24 or 14.9R24 590 0.77

16.9-24 620 0.80

18.4-26 670 0.87

13.6-28 or 13.6R28 610 0.79

14.9-28 or 14.9R28 640 0.83

16.9-28 or 16.9R28 670 0.87

14.9-30 or 14.9R30 665 0.86

16.9-30 or 16.9R30 695 0.90

18.4-30 or 18.4R30 720 0.94

480/70R30 695 0.90

12.4-32 or 12.4R32 640 0.83

SPECIFICATIONS
16.9-34 or 16.9R34 745 0.97

18.4-34 or 18.4R34 770 1.00

480/70R34 745 0.97

520/70R34 770 1.00

540/65R34 745 0.97

540/70R34 770 1.00

12.4-36 or 12.4R36 690 0.89

13.6-36 or 13.6R36 715 0.93

12.4-38 720 0.94

13.6-38 or 13.6R38 740 0.96

15.5-38 or 15.5R38 745 0.97

12.4-42 750 0.99

18.4-16.1 480 0.62

21.5-16.1 485 0.63

Page 237
 SPECIFICATIONS

APPROXIMATE TRACTOR DIMENSIONS

IMPORTANT: The dimensions shown on the following pages are only approximate. Many varying factors
affect these dimensions, for example; tyre sizes, ballast, amount of fuel and tyre pressures, etc. etc.

Two Wheel Drive (2WD) Tractor with Foldable 2 Post ROPS

2371

DS00M101

REAR RADIUS FRONT RADIUS

TYRE SIZE A B TYRE SIZE C D
STATIC MAX. IN STATIC MAX. IN
LOADED SERVICE LOADED SERVICE
MIN 583 660 MIN 392 413
13.6R28 7.50-16
MAX 710 803 MAX 465 500
16.9R34 11.00-16

Page 238
 SPECIFICATIONS

Mechanical Front Drive (MFD) Tractor with Foldable 2 Post ROPS

SPECIFICATIONS
2356

DS00M102

REAR RADIUS FRONT RADIUS

TYRE SIZE A B TYRE SIZE C D
STATIC MAX. IN STATIC MAX. IN
LOADED SERVICE LOADED SERVICE
MIN 583 660 MIN 444 508
13.6R28 11.2R20
MAX 726 840 MAX 543 608
18.4R34 13.6R24

Page 239
 SPECIFICATIONS

Two Wheel Drive (2WD) Tractor with 4 Post ROPS

2371

DS00M105

REAR RADIUS FRONT RADIUS

TYRE SIZE A B TYRE SIZE C D
STATIC MAX. IN STATIC MAX. IN
LOADED SERVICE LOADED SERVICE
MIN 583 660 MIN 392 413
13.6R28 7.50-16
MAX 710 803 MAX 465 500
16.9R34 11.00-16

Page 240
 SPECIFICATIONS

Mechanical Front Drive (MFD) Tractor with 4 Post ROPS

SPECIFICATIONS
2356

DS00M106

REAR RADIUS FRONT RADIUS

TYRE SIZE A B TYRE SIZE C D
STATIC MAX. IN STATIC MAX. IN
LOADED SERVICE LOADED SERVICE
MIN 583 660 MIN 444 508
13.6R28 11.2R20
MAX 726 840 MAX 543 608
18.4R34 13.6R24

Page 241
 SPECIFICATIONS

Two Wheel Drive (2WD) Tractor with Low Profile Cab

2371

DS00M103

REAR RADIUS FRONT RADIUS

TYRE SIZE A B TYRE SIZE C D
STATIC MAX. IN STATIC MAX. IN
LOADED SERVICE LOADED SERVICE
MIN 583 660 MIN 392 413
13.6R28 7.50-16
MAX 710 803 MAX 465 500
16.9R34 11.00-16

Page 242
 SPECIFICATIONS

Mechanical Front Drive (MFD) Tractor with Low Profile Cab

SPECIFICATIONS
2356

DS00M104

REAR RADIUS FRONT RADIUS

TYRE SIZE A B TYRE SIZE C D
STATIC MAX. IN STATIC MAX. IN
LOADED SERVICE LOADED SERVICE
MIN 583 660 MIN 444 508
13.6R28 11.2R20
MAX 726 840 MAX 543 608
18.4R34 13.6R24

Page 243
 SPECIFICATIONS

Two Wheel Drive (2WD) Tractor with Deluxe Cab

2371

DS00M107

REAR RADIUS FRONT RADIUS

TYRE SIZE A B TYRE SIZE C D
STATIC MAX. IN STATIC MAX. IN
LOADED SERVICE LOADED SERVICE
MIN 583 660 MIN 392 413
13.6R28 7.50-16
MAX 710 803 MAX 465 500
16.9R34 11.00-16

Page 244
 SPECIFICATIONS

Mechanical Front Drive (MFD) Tractor with Deluxe Cab

SPECIFICATIONS
2356

DS00M108

REAR RADIUS FRONT RADIUS

TYRE SIZE A B TYRE SIZE C D
STATIC MAX. IN STATIC MAX. IN
LOADED SERVICE LOADED SERVICE
MIN 583 660 MIN 444 508
13.6R28 11.2R20
MAX 726 840 MAX 543 608
18.4R34 13.6R24

Page 245
 SPECIFICATIONS

Approximate Tractor Width

Front Dimensions

DI97G171

A B C
(FLANGE TO (MAXIMUM (GROUND
FLANGE) OVERALL CLEARANCE)
AXLE WIDTH)
2WD MFD
1640 mm 1800 mm 394 mm 531 mm

NOTE: The overall front tractor width will vary depending upon which axle is
fitted (eg. 2WD or MFD) and the front tread width setting,

Page 246
 SPECIFICATIONS

Rear Dimensions

SPECIFICATIONS
DI97E388A

A B C
(FLANGE TO (BAR AXLE)
FLANGE) BASIC EXTENDABLE MIRRORS
MIRRORS
MIN MAX

1565.1 mm 2235 mm 2185 mm 2736 mm 3238 mm

NOTE: The overall rear tractor width will vary depending upon which axle is fitted (eg.
Flanged or Bar Axle) and the rear tread width setting.

NOTE: (EEC Member States Only): An overall width of 2500 mm to 3000 mm MAY
require local authorization for use on the highway, overall widths above 3000 mm
WILL require local authorization.

Page 247
 SPECIFICATIONS

APPROXIMATE TRACTOR WEIGHTS

The following weights are only approximate. Many varying factors affect the overall tractor weight;
for example:
tyre sizes, ballast, amount of fuel, operator weight and what rear hitch option has been chosen.

NOTE: See Maximum recommended Operating Weights on page 249 in this manual for complete
weight recommendations.

Tractors with ROPS

MODEL FRONT REAR TOTAL

2WD 1175 kg (2590 lb) 2050 kg (4519 lb) 3225 kg (7109 lb)
CX75
MFD 1475 kg (3252 lb) 2160 kg (4762 lb) 3635 kg (8014 lb)

CX85 2WD 1180 kg (2601 lb) 2050 kg (4519 lb) 3230 kg (7120 lb)
CX95
CX105 MFD 1480 kg (3263 lb) 2160 kg (4762 lb) 3640 kg (8025 lb)

Tractors with Low Profile Cab

MODEL FRONT REAR TOTAL

2WD 1205 kg (2657 lb) 2075 kg (4575 lb) 3280 kg (7232 lb)
CX75
MFD 1505 kg (3318 lb) 2185 kg (4817 lb) 3690 kg (8135 lb)

CX85 2WD 1210 kg (2668 lb) 2025 kg (4464 lb) 3235 kg (7132 lb)
CX95
CX105 MFD 1460 kg (3219 lb) 2085 kg (4597 lb) 3545 kg (7816 lb)

Tractors with Deluxe Cab

MODEL FRONT REAR TOTAL

2WD 1240 kg (2734 lb) 2110 kg (4652 lb) 3350 kg (7386 lb)
CX75
MFD 1540 kg (3395 lb) 2220 kg (4894 lb) 3760 kg (8289 lb)

CX85 2WD 1245 kg (2745 lb) 2110 kg (4652 lb) 3355 kg (7397 lb)
CX95
CX105 MFD 1545 kg (3406 lb) 2200 kg (4894 lb) 3765 kg (8300 lb)

Page 248
 SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum Permitted Operating Weights

IMPORTANT:
1. DO NOT exceed the maximum load capacity of the tyres on your tractor. See Loads and Inflation
Pressures in this manual for more information.
2. DO NOT exceed the local legal limitations of the axle loads and the total weight on the road.
3. ALWAYS refer to tractor P.I.N. plate for front and rear permissible axle loads.

Maximum Permitted TRACTOR Operating Weight

The maximum permitted tractor operating weight includes the tractor,
additional tractor equipment/implements and ballast......................................................................... 6000 kg (13 226 lb)

Maximum Permitted AXLE Operating Weight

The maximum permitted axle operating weight includes the tractor, tractor equipment, ballast and three-
point hitch mounted equipment.

FRONT AXLE
For Road Operation up to 30 km/h (19 mph)
2WD Front Axle at 1530 mm (60 in) tread ......................................................................................... 2400 kg (5209 lb)
MFD Front Axle at 1530 mm (60 in) tread.......................................................................................... 2900 kg (6393 lb)

SPECIFICATIONS
For Road Operation 30 km/h - 40 km/h (25 mph)
2WD Front Axle at 1530 mm (60 in) tread ..........................................................................................2112 kg (4655 lb)
MFD Front Axle at 1530 mm (60 in) tread.......................................................................................... 2900 kg (6393 lb)

REAR AXLE
For Road Operation
Rear Axle at 1530 mm (60 in) tread................................................................................................. 4800 kg (10 582 lb)
For Off Road Operation upto 8 km/h (5 mph)
2WD Front Axle at 1530 mm (60 in) tread.......................................................................................... 2800 kg (6173 lb)
2WD Front Axle at maximum tread..................................................................................................... 1600 kg (3527 lb)
MFD Front Axle at 1530 mm (60 in) tread.......................................................................................... 3653 kg (8053 lb)
MFD Front Axle at maximum tread..................................................................................................... 2404 kg (5300 lb)
Rear Axle at 1530 mm (60 in) tread..................................................................................................5000 kg (11 031 lb)
Rear Axle at maximum tread.............................................................................................................. 3300 kg (7275 lb)

Page 249
 SPECIFICATIONS

NOISE LEVELS
This Tractor is designed such that:

1. Noise level inside the cab at operator's ear

(measured in accordance with
EEC Directive 77/311/EEC) is .......................................................................... 73 to 77* dB (A) Annex II,
Doors and windows closed

2. Bystander noise level 7500 mm (295 in)

away from the cab at bystander ear
(measured in accordance with
EEC Directive 74/151/EEC) is .................................................................. 80 to 85* dB (A) Annex VI

* These figures will vary depending upon tractor model and specification.
NOTE: If a radio is operated at the work position, for the radio to be heard, the volume level
required is approximately 3 dB(A) above that of the machine/work station noise level.

Page 250
 DETAIL INDEX

A C
Air Blower - Cab ................................................. 54 Cab Air Filters
Air Conditioner Control ................................... 54, 56 Recirculation Filters .........................................179
Air Conditioner Operation ...................................... 80 Service Interval ...............................................181
Air Conditioner Pressure Lamp ............................... 54 Cab Air Intake Filter ...................................203, 204
Air Conditioning System ...................................... 208 Cab Door Lock ................................................... 21
Refrigerant Check ........................................... 208 Cab Environment ................................................ 79
Air Induction System .......................................... 197 Cab Cooling .................................................... 79
Filter Service ................................................. 198 Pressurizing Cab .............................................. 79
Restriction Indicator Lamp ................................. 197 Quick Reference Chart .................................77, 78
Air Induction System-Engine ................................ 197 Window Demisting/defrosting .............................. 79
Air Pressure Check ............................................ 138 Capacities .......................................................170
Analog Instrument Cluster Check Chains ...................................................111
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge ...................... 29 Chemicals - Hazardous ........................................ 13
Fuel Gauge ..................................................... 29 Claw End Lower Links ........................................112
Hourmeter ....................................................... 29 Clock/Hourmeter ................................................ 30
Low Fuel Warning Lamp ..................................... 29 Clutch Pedal ..................................................... 49
Tachometer/Speedmeter ..................................... 29 Cold Start Procedure ........................................... 65
Auto Hitch Cold Temperature Operation ................................. 64
Auto Hitch Clevis Positions .................................. 91 Thermostart .................................................... 65
Hook/clevis Change Over .................................... 90 Coolant Level ...................................................175
Auto Hitch Locking Latches Release Control .............. 50 Cooling System
Auxiliary Battery Connections ............................... 212 Change Engine Coolant ....................................206
Auxiliary Electrical Power Sockets Solutions .......................................................207
Seven Terminal ................................................ 95 Creeper Operation .............................................. 99
Three Terminal ................................................. 96
Axle - Steering Stops ......................................... 146 D
Axle Operating Weights ...................................... 249
Decals ............................................................. 14
Declaration Of Conformity ...................................... 2
B

DETAIL INDEX
Differential Lock ................................................123
Ballast ............................................................ 159 Differential Lock Switch ........................................ 53
Front Weights ................................................ 161 Digital Displays .................................................. 32
Liquid ........................................................... 165 Digital Instrument Cluster ..................................... 30
Loads Matched To Tractor ................................. 159 Clock And Engine Hourmeter .............................. 30
Rear Wheel Weights ........................................ 164 Coolant Temperature Gauge ............................... 30
Weight Distribution .......................................... 159 Fuel Gauge ..................................................... 30
Wheel Slip ..................................................... 160 Indicator Lamps ............................................... 30
Batteries ................................................. 187, 211 Low Fuel Warning Lamp ..................................... 30
Auxiliary Connections ....................................... 212 Main Digital Display .....................................30, 31
Cables And Terminals ...................................... 188 Programming ................................................... 34
Charging System ............................................ 213 Dimensions ......................................................238
Checking The Electrolyte Level ........................... 187 Direction Turn Signal Switch ................................. 48
When Not In Use ............................................ 211 Distance Function Operation ................................. 43
Before Starting Engine ......................................... 61 Draft Control Knob .............................................. 53
Bolt Torques Drawbar ........................................................... 81
Drawbar Support Bracket .................................. 186 Drawbar Preparation ......................................... 82
Front Wheels ................................................. 150 Connecting Drawbar ......................................... 84
Rear Wheels ................................................... 158 Drawbar Bolt Torques .........................................186
Trailer Hitch ................................................... 187 Dual Wheel Installation .......................................158
Bolt Torques Rear Wheels ................................... 158 Dual Wheel Tread Positions .................................158
Brake Couplings ................................................. 93
Brake Pedals ..................................................... 49
Brake Pedals Interlock ......................................... 49

Page 251
 DETAIL INDEX

E G
Electrical Socket - 3 Pin ....................................... 96 General Safety Before You Service ........................167
Electrical Socket - 7 Pin ....................................... 95
Electrical Specifications ...................................... 227 H
Engine Air Induction System ................................ 197
Hazard Warning Lamps ....................................9, 10
Engine Coolant Change ...................................... 206
Hazard Warning Switch ........................................47
Engine Coolant Heater ......................................... 66
Hazardous Chemicals ..........................................13
Engine Lubrication
Head Lamps Switch .............................................48
Filter Change ................................................. 189
Height Adjustabl Hitch
Oil Level ....................................................... 175
Automatic
Oil Selection .................................................. 170
Internal Hitch Release Control ..............................86
Environment .................................................... 167
Height Adjustable Hitch
Automatic ........................................................85
F Manual Type .............................................. 86, 87
Fan/alternator/Compressor Belt Tension ................. 188 Piton - Fixe ......................................................87
Filters Hi/Low Beam Switch ............................................48
Cab Air Intake ........................................ 203, 204 Hitch Bolts Torque .............................................187
Engine Oil ..................................................... 189 Hitch Diagnostic Display
Fuel ............................................................. 191 Hitch Control Bypass ........................................ 121
Trans/Hyd Oil ................................................. 190 Hitch Diagnostic Codes ....................................121
Transmission ................................................. 200 Hitch Drop Speed Control ......................................52
First Service Intervals .......................................... 62 Hitch Load Control .............................................120
Fluid Levels Hitch Position Control .........................................118
Coolant Reservoir ........................................... 175 Hitch Position Control Knob ...................................53
Differential ..................................................... 186 Hitch Remote Switches .......................................117
Engine Oil ..................................................... 175 Hitch Response Control Knob .................................52
Planetary ....................................................... 186 Hitch Ride Control .............................................122
Trans/Hyd Oil ................................................. 174 Hitch Travel Control .............................................52
Windshield Washer Reservoir ............................ 176 Hitch Up/Down Switch ..........................................53
Foldable ROPS Frame ....................................... 135 Hitch Upper Limit Control ......................................52
Forward/neutral/reverse Lever ............................... 49 Horn ................................................................48
Front Axle Adjustments Hourmeter ................................................. 29, 168
2WD Tread Widths .......................................... 148 Hydraulic Motor Return Circuit ..............................133
MFD Tread Widths .......................................... 149 Hydraulic Motors ...............................................134
Oscillation Stops ............................................. 146 Hydraulic Oil ....................................................174
Steering Stops ............................................... 146 Hydraulic Oil Change .........................................200
Steering Stops ............................................... 146 Hydraulic Trailer Brakes ........................................94
Toe-in Setting ................................................ 144
Front Ballast Weights ......................................... 161 I
Front Hitch Preparation ...................................... 126
Identification Numbers ............................................3
Lower Link Adjustments .............126, 127, 128, 129
Implement Cable Access .......................................97
Top Link Adjustments .............................. 127, 129
Indicator Lamps ..................................................31
Upper Link Adjustments ............................ 126, 128
Instrument Clusters
Front Power Takeoff .......................................... 106
Digital ............................................................30
Front Wheel Fenders ......................................... 154
Standard (Anolog) .............................................29
Fuel Gauge ....................................................... 29
Instrument Panel
Fuel Level ....................................................... 174
F/N/R Lever .....................................................49
Fuel Storage .................................................... 223
Head Lamp Switch ............................................48
Fuel System
Key Switch ......................................................47
Air Removal .................................................. 192
Thermostart Switch ............................................47
Filter Drain Plug ............................................. 179
Warning Lamps Switch .......................................47
Fuel Storage .................................................. 174
Work Lights Switch ............................................47
Inspection ..................................................... 207
Specifications ................................................ 174
Function Check - Operator Presence Switch ............ 193 K
Fuses - North American ...................................... 216 Key Switch ........................................................47
Fuses - Rest Of World Tractors ............................ 218

Page 252
 DETAIL INDEX

L O
Liquid Ballast ................................................... 165 Opening Windshield ............................................ 58
Load Control .................................................... 120 Operating Controls .............................................. 47
Lower Link Flotation .......................................... 113 Operating The Transmission ................................. 69
Lower Links ..................................................... 112 Operating Weights .............................................249
Lubricants And Capacities ................................... 170 Operator Environment Controls
Lubrication/maintenance Air Conditioner Control .................................54, 56
Oil Viscosity And Temperature Range .................. 170 Air Conditioner Pressure Indicator Lamp ................ 54
Air Discharge Louvers ............................54, 55, 56
M Blower Control ......................................54, 55, 56
Defroster Control .............................................. 54
Machine Storage ............................................... 223
Defroster Vents ...........................................55, 56
Maintenance
Front Wiper ................................................55, 56
Air Conditioning System .................................... 208
Heat Control .................................................... 54
Hoses And Wiring ........................................... 208
Opening Windshield .......................................... 58
Viscous Fan Drive ........................................... 209
Rear Window ................................................... 58
Maintenance - General
Recirculation Vent ............................................ 54
Cleaning The Operators Seat ............................. 209
Side Window ................................................... 58
Maintenance Schedule ....................................... 172
Sun Visor ....................................................... 59
Manual Storage ....................................................2
Temperature Control ....................................55, 56
Master Switch-Electrical ....................................... 68
Windshield Wiper Control ................................... 54
Maximum Permitted Operating Weights .................. 249
Operator Presence Switch Function Check ..............193
Measurements And Weights ................................ 238
Operators Cab Refrigerant Check ..........................208
2WD 4 Post ROPS Tractor (Platform) ................... 240
2WD Foldable 2 Post ROPS Tractor (Platform) ....... 238
2WD Low Profile Cab Tractor ............................. 242 P
2WD Standard Cab Tractor ................................ 244 Park Brake ........................................................ 50
MFD 2 Post ROPS Tractor (Platform) ................... 241 Passenger Seat ................................................. 27
MFD Foldable 2 Post ROPS Tractor (Platform) ....... 239 Pedal Controls ................................................... 49
MFD Low Profile Cab Tractor ............................. 243 Brake Pedals ................................................... 49

DETAIL INDEX
MFD Standard Cab Tractor ................................ 245 Brake Pedals Lock ............................................ 49
Tractor Width (All Models) ................................. 246 Clutch Pedal ................................................... 49
MFD Toe-in ..................................................... 145 Throttle Pedal .................................................. 49
MFD Assisted Stops .......................................... 125 Piton Fixe ......................................................... 87
MFD Axle Oscillation Stops ................................. 146 Pneumatic Trailer Brakes ..................................... 93
MFD Axle Steering Stops .................................... 146 Position Control ................................................118
MFD Front To Rear Tyre Power Takeoff
Size Combinations ........................................ 151 Operation - Front .............................................106
MFD Operation ................................................. 124 Operation - Rear .............................................104
MFD Switch ....................................................... 53 Rear .............................................................102
Mirrors Safety ...........................................................105
Basic ............................................................. 57 Powershift Transmission .................................70, 72
Extendable ...................................................... 57 Product Identification And Serial Numbers .................. 3
Internal ........................................................... 57 Programming Clusters For Different Tire Sizes .........142
Standard ......................................................... 57 Programming The Digital Instrument Cluster
Programming In The Accessory Mode ................... 34
N Area Function Mode ......................................... 39
Clock ........................................................... 34
Noise Levels .................................................... 250
Mph Or Km/h ................................................. 35
Old Instrument Cluster Hours .............................. 40
Service Timer ................................................. 38
Tire Radius .................................................... 36
Programming In The Dynamic Mode ...................... 41
Programming The Implement Width Mode .............. 41
PTO Speed Lever - Shiftable PTO .......................... 52

Page 253
 DETAIL INDEX

R Intended Use .....................................................5

Leaving The Tractor ...........................................11
Radio ............................................................... 59
Neutral Start System ............................................7
Range Lever ...................................................... 51
Operation ......................................................8, 9
Rear Hitch
Operator Presence System ....................................7
Claw End Links .............................................. 112
PTO Operation .................................................11
Lower Link Adjustment ..................................... 108
ROPS ............................................................19
Lower Link Flotation ........................................ 113
Service ...........................................................12
Preparation ................................................... 107
Transporting Passengers ......................................7
Telescopic Lower Links .................................... 112
Safety - Hazardous Chemicals ................................13
Upper Link Adjustment ..................................... 108
Seat Belt ...........................................................26
Rear Power Takeoff ........................................... 102
Seats ...............................................................22
Changing The PTO Speed ................................ 103
Air Suspension .................................................24
Operating ...................................................... 104
Mechanical Suspension - Cab Tractors ...................22
Safety .......................................................... 105
Mechanical Suspension - ROPS Tractor .................26
Safety Guard ................................................. 105
Passenger .......................................................27
Shiftable Type Pto ........................................... 103
Seat Belt .........................................................26
Rear Pto On/Off Lever ......................................... 52
Serial Numbers .....................................................3
Rear Three Point Hitch Preparation ....................... 107
Service ...........................................................168
Rear View Mirrors ............................................... 57
Engine Lubrication Oil Selection .........................170
Rear Wheel Ballast Weights ................................ 164
Environment ..................................................167
Rear Wheel Bolt Torques .................................... 158
Hourmeter .....................................................168
Rear Wheel Tread Adjustments ............................ 155
Plastic And Resin Parts ....................................167
Rear Wiper/Washer ............................................. 59
Transmission Lubrication Oil Level ......................174
Regular Service Intervals .................................... 172
Service Access .................................................169
Relays ........................................................... 220
Service Intervals ...............................................172
Remote Hydraulic Levers ...................................... 51
Service Lamps And Gauges ...................................62
Remote Hydraulic Preparation ............................. 130
Side Console Controls
Connecting Remote Hoses ................................ 130
Ashtray ...........................................................51
Hose Coupler ................................................. 131
Cigarette Lighter ...............................................52
Quick Release Type
Diagnostic Display .............................................52
Hydraulic Couplers ........................................ 131
Differential Lock Switch ......................................53
Remote Hydraulics Operation .............................. 132
Front PTO Switch ..............................................51
Control Levers ............................................... 132
Hitch Control Box ..............................................52
Float ............................................................ 133
Hitch Draft Control Knob .....................................53
Hydraulic Motors ............................................. 134
Hitch Drop Speed Control Knob ............................52
Neutral Lock .................................................. 132
Hitch Position Control .........................................53
Single Acting Remote ...................................... 133
Hitch Response Control Knob ...............................52
Resin And Plastic Parts ...................................... 167
Hitch Travel Control Knob ...................................52
Ride Control .................................................... 122
Hitch Up/Down Switch ........................................53
Right Hand Console Controls ................................. 51
Hitch Upper Limit Control Knob .............................52
Roof Hatch ........................................................ 59
Loader Joystick Control ......................................53
ROPS Frame ................................................... 135
Mechanical Front Drive Switch .............................53
ROPS Safety
Powershift Control - 2 Speed ................................51
Safety Rules .................................................... 19
Rear Fog Lamp Switch .......................................51
Tractor Roll Over .............................................. 19
Rear Pto Clutch Lever ........................................52
Rotating Amber Beacon ........................................ 10
Remote Hydraulic Levers ....................................51
Run In Procedure ................................................ 61
Remote Lever Lock ............................................51
Ride Control Switch ...........................................51
S Rotating Beacon Switch ......................................51
Safety ................................................................ 5 Shiftable PTO Speed Lever .................................52
Basic Rule .................................................. 6, 13 Slip Limit Control Switch .....................................53
Battery ........................................................... 12 Three Terminal Socket .......................................52
Decals ........................................................... 14 Throttle Lever ...................................................51
Fire ............................................................... 13 Transmission Range Levers .................................51
General Safety ................................................... 6 Transmission Speed Lever ..................................51
Hazardous Chemicals ........................................ 13 Xtrashift Control - 3 Speed ..................................51
Implements ..................................................... 11

Page 254
 DETAIL INDEX

Single Acting Hydraulic Cylinder Circuits ................. 133 Three Point Hitch Preparation
Slip Limit Control Switch ..................................... 120 Check Chains .................................................111
Slow Moving Vehicle Symbol ................................. 10 Claw End Links ...............................................112
Specifications Stabilizers .....................................................110
Electrical Accessory Connectors ......................... 227 Upper And Lower Links Adjustment.......................108
Electrical Circuit Breakers ................................. 227 Upper Link Adjustment ..............................108, 109
Electrical System ............................................ 227 Throttle Lever .................................................... 51
Engine Air Intake System .................................. 226 Throttle Pedal .................................................... 49
Engine Cooling System .................................... 226 To The Owner ..................................................... 1
Engine Fuel System ......................................... 226 Tool Box .........................................................169
Front Axle ..................................................... 229 Towing The Tractor ............................................. 98
Front Hitch .................................................... 229 Tractor Access ................................................... 21
Front PTO ..................................................... 230 Tractor Ballast ..................................................159
Rear Hitch ..................................................... 229 Front Weights .................................................161
Rear PTO ...................................................... 230 Liquid Ballast .................................................165
Remote Hydraulic Sytem ................................... 230 Loads Matched To Tractor .................................159
Steering System ............................................. 228 Rear Wheel Weights ........................................164
Transmission ................................................. 229 Weight Distribution ..........................................159
Specifications-Engine Wheel Slip .....................................................160
CX75 Engine ................................................. 225 Tractor Dimensions
CX85 Engine ................................................. 225 2WD 4 Post ROPS Tractor (Platform) ...................240
CX95 Engine ................................................. 225 2WD Foldable 2 Post ROPS Tractor (Platform) .......238
CX105 Engine ................................................ 225 2WD Low Profile Cab Tractor .............................242
Specifications-General ....................................... 228 2WD Standard Cab Tractor ................................244
Auto Hitch ..................................................... 228 MFD 2 Post ROPS Tractor (Platorm) ....................241
Brakes ......................................................... 228 MFD Foldable 2 Post ROPS Tractor (Platorm) ........239
Differential Lock .............................................. 228 MFD Low Profile Cab Tractor .............................243
Drawbar ........................................................ 228 MFD Standard Cab Tractor ................................245
Height Adjustable Hitches ................................. 228 Tractor Width (All Models) .................................246
Speed Lever ...................................................... 51 Tractor Operating Weight ....................................249

DETAIL INDEX
Stabilizers ....................................................... 110 Tractor Storage .................................................223
Standard Instrument Cluster .................................. 29 Tractor Weights ................................................248
Starting Procedure .............................................. 63 Trailer Brake Couplings ........................................ 93
Stationary Tractor Operation .................................. 67 Hydraulic ........................................................ 94
Steering Column Adjustment .................................. 28 Pneumatic ...................................................... 93
Steering Stops ................................................. 146 Trailer/Implement
Stopping The Engine ........................................... 67 Drawbardimensions ........................................ 92
Storage-machine ............................................... 223 Transmission Operation ....................................... 69
Sun Visor .......................................................... 58 Transmission, Operation
Deluxe Cab ..................................................... 58 Powershift (2 Speed and Xtrashift) ...............70, 72
Low Profile Cab ................................................ 58 Synchromesh (Mechanical) ............................... 74
Synchromesh Transmission Operation ..................... 74 Transporting The Tractor ...................................... 98
Travel Speeds ..................................................231
T Tread Widths
2wd Front Axle Adjustment ................................147
Tachometer ....................................................... 29
Front, 2WD ....................................................148
Technical Documentation ........................................1
Front, MFD ....................................................149
Telescoping Lower Links ..................................... 112
Rear, Bar Axle ................................................157
Temperature Control - Cab Heating ............. 54, 55, 56
Rear, Flanged Axle ..........................................155
Thermostart Switch .............................................. 47
True Ground Speed Sensor .................................100
Three Point Hitch Operation ................................. 114
Two Wheel Drive Toe-in ......................................144
Diagnostic Display ........................................... 121
Tyre Inflation Procedure ......................................138
Extenal Controls ............................................. 117
Tyre Inflation Specifications .................................137
Load Control .................................................. 120
Tyre Pressures And Load Capacities ......................139
Position Control .............................................. 118
Tyre Size Combinations ......................................151
Ride Control .................................................. 122

Page 255
NOTE: This manual has been published for worldwide circulation. The
standard and optional equipment and the availability of individual models may
vary from one country to the next. McCormick reserves the right to
undertake modifications without prior notice to the design and technical
equipment at all times without this resulting in any obligation whatsoever to
make such modifications to units already sold. Whilst every effort is made to
ensure that the specifications, descriptions, photographs and illustrations in
this manual are correct at the time of going to print, these are also subject to
change without prior notice. The photographs and illustrations used in this
manual may show optional equipment or may not show all standard
equipment. Any reproduction or translation, even partial, is forbidden
without the written authorization of McCormick.

Page 257
Page 258